diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/plain')
52 files changed, 0 insertions, 14345 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c1da39eb921..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,239 +0,0 @@ -Thu Apr 6 12:32:28 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@booth35.ecs> - - * pdcguide.tex: Added dtxtags to file lists and TAGS to Makefile - targets. Shortened a couple of table entries by a word each so - that the GPL doesn't overflow onto the next page. - - * maamac.dtx (\toksa): Added definition of toksa - - * pdcfmt2.dtx (\alphabetletter): Added missing backslash. - - * pdcoput5.dtx (section{Routines for balanced columns}): Removed - spurious space from \makepartialpage - - * dtxtags: New shellscript, generates an etags-format tags file. - * makefile.in (mostlyclean): Added support for dtxtags. - - -Thu Mar 30 17:16:01 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@booth10.ecs> - - * Release 1.1 - - * makefile.in (dist): Made version.txt format prettier. - - * Changed all header comments to say doc/plain/pdcmac for the sake - of TWG-TDS 0.61. - -Tue Mar 28 13:18:47 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdccode.dtx: Recognizes the "locker" field of RCS id. - Puts line numbers in headline. - - * pdcfsel.dtx: Tidied documentation. Changed \fsel_... to \FSEL... - -Fri Mar 24 17:08:36 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - - * pinstall: Created a shellscript `pinstall' to replace `install' - command on systems without GNU `install'. Trying to keep track of - all the stupid variants of `install' is pointlessly difficult. - * configure: uses 'pinstall' script if not gnu 'install'. - * makefile.in (install): much simplified by assuming either GNU - "install" or my "pinstall". Changed "mkdirhier" ro "pmkdir" at - the same time. Added manpages for the three shellscripts included - with the package. - - * pdcmisc.dtx (section{PDCIMTH}): Added version ID \message. - - * makefile.in: Added new target, version.txt, which is the version - IDs of all the DTX files. Checked all the DTX files in to RCS (at - long last). - -Thu Mar 16 12:52:02 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdccode.dtx: notepars now allow \rightskip to shrink. - - * pdcfmt2.dtx: chased down some overfull hboxes - - * pdcsty.dtx (section{Starting up}): Changed name of pdcmasub to - the more sensible pdccmsub. - -Tue Mar 14 12:58:09 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@booth8.ecs> - - * pdcadobe.dtx: Corrected definition or rbrace. - -Thu Mar 9 16:42:07 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcmisc.dtx (pdccmsub.dtx): new name for pdcmasub.dtx. - \currency, \orda, \ordo, \florin, \brdecimal, \permille. - -Wed Mar 8 16:53:36 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcsty.dtx (\abstract): Stop from generating underfull - hbox. - - * pdcadobe.dtx (\brdecimal): Removed spurious redefinition. - - * pdcguide.tex: Added list of file suffixes. Added - pdcadobe.{dtx,tex} and pdcl1maa.{dtx,tex} to lists of files. - Added PostScript title for when POstScript fonts available. - -Mon Mar 6 16:54:15 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcl1maa.dtx: New file - - * pdcsty.dtx: Chased down some overful hboxes. - -Fri Mar 3 18:12:02 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcfmt2.dtx (verbatim): added \ttminus, so that PostScript fonts - used as typewriter fonts can change hyphens to minus signs. - - * pdcsty.dtx: Added use of \asyfam, etc. - - * pdcadobe.dtx: Tested with pdcguide and tested ISO Latin-1 - support, found several bugs. - -Thu Mar 2 18:08:48 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcsty.dtx: Added rudimentary support for PostScript fonts. - - * pdcadobe.dtx: New file!! - -Tue Feb 28 10:17:40 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcsty.dtx: Removed attempts to make a Concrete style; there - really doesn't seem to be much point. Put more of the common code - in pdc{lft,doc}1.tex. - - * pdcguide.tex: reorganized sections, expanded user guide and - installation sections. - -Mon Feb 27 14:43:43 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcguide.tex: Made it into a "doc" not a "lft"; expanded - installation section (unfinished) - - * pdccode.dtx: Added summary to end of file, and some backgorund - info at the start. - (section{Layout}): CHanged width to 72 \tentt characters not 36 - \tenrm ems. - -Fri Feb 24 18:55:30 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcguide.tex: Removed use of PostScript fonts -- now does a - title using the circlew10 font! - -Thu Feb 23 16:50:33 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * install.txt: new file - - * configure (INSTALL): sets INSTALL and INSTALL_DATA to "cp - -p" and puts package name at end of "$docdir". - - * magrman.tex (\twocolgr): adjusted to use new \rigidbalance syntax - - * pdcoput5.dtx (section{Making a page vbox}): adjust colht by - - (section{Routines for balanced coumns}): \rigidpalane no longer - takes an argukent for the width of the completed columns; instead - one should enclose \rigidbalance in \hbox to ...{...}. Eliminated - some variables (\RGDfirstcol etc.). - - *depth* of topbox and partialpage as well as height. - - * pdccode.dtx: New file, which generates tmp.tex (the Makefile - checks it isn't truncated before renaming it to pdccode.tex). - (section{Code sections}): added \~ for a tilde in expanded lines. - - Changed text width and suppressed parindent at start of sections. - Copied verbatim text from pdcfmt2.dtx. Added \filelocker; this is - empty if the file has been checked in. - -Wed Feb 22 15:46:06 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcoput5.dtx: Added section headings and brief comments on the - rest of the file. Seached out overfull hboxes in the text so - far. - - (section{Routines for balanced coumns}): Added - \rigidbalancedpartialpage. - -Thu Feb 16 18:04:55 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcfmt2.dtx: Adjusted a little so that it now TeXs without hbox - warnings. - - * pdccode.tex: Changed to allow ragged-right printing inside - footnotes. Added \title and \author commands, and set \everycode - and \evercodeline so that some common code at the start of DTX - files is factored out. - -Wed Feb 15 15:45:30 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcsty.dtx (section{Starting up}): pdcoput->pdcoput5 - - * configure (cfgdate): Configuration shellscript, made by cutting - down the pdctt configure script. - - * pdcoput5.dtx: Changed name to prevent conflict with old version - of pdcoput (since the calling interface is changing). - -Tue Feb 14 12:20:41 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcoput.dtx (section{How to make one column}): Change to just - use vertical mode material to do illustrations insteasd of - separate <dimen> and caption arguments. Added \topillustration - and \botillustration commands. - - * pdcsty.dtx (section{Layout}): foomarge->foomg to match pdcoput.dtx - - * config.status.sh: placeholder for configuration script. - -Mon Feb 13 14:23:50 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcoput.dtx: New file, made from pdcoput.tex 4.1.7. - -Fri Feb 10 13:46:10 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdcguide.tex: Added a copy of the GNU GPL to the end. - - * copying.tex: new file -- a formatted copy of copying.txt, which - is the GNU General Public License. - - * *.dtx: Updated header comments to include GPL. - -Thu Feb 9 10:38:59 1995 Damian Cugley <pdc@boothp1.ecs> - - * pdccode2.tex: a new version of pdccode that allows multiple - files to be generated. - - * pdcsty.dtx: replaces ma55doc.dtx, pdccm*.dtx. Uses pdccode2 to - generate multiple files. Sectioning commands go in pdcdoc1.tex - and pdclft1.tex. - - * pdcguide.tex: new file - -Sat Dec 3 16:26:00 1994 P. Damian Cugley (pdc@alleged) - - * pdccode.tex: - Set the vertical margins so that files may be printed on American - paper without losing any of the print. - - * pdcfsel.dtx: - Added a title line on the first page. Removed the dependency of - the code file on pdcutil.tex by adding definitions for \expcs and - \noexpcs. - -Fri Dec 2 00:55:38 1994 P. Damian Cugley (pdc@alleged) - - * pdccode.tex: - Changed \rcs...\end to \rcs...\endrcs for consistency with other - macros that go \foo...\endfoo. - - * pdcfsel.dtx: Removed spurious definiton of \n. Changed - \rcs...\end to \rcs...\endrcs. Changed name of \ldfont to - \loadfont. Removed \setmag. Now produces pdcfsel.tex not xx.tex. - - * pdccode.tex: checked in with -k by pdc at 1994/12/02 00:50:24 - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status deleted file mode 100644 index 34a118a9ff7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -# config.status -- configuration status file -# creator: configure for pdcmac 1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24> < > -# created: 1996-04-29 -# command: configure - -case "$1" in - -r*|--r*) - shift - echo $0: rerunning configure 1>&2 - exec sh configure $* ;; -esac - -echo This is config.status, generated by configure for pdcmac on 1996-04-29 - -srcdir=. -date=1996-04-29 -files="${*-makefile}" -sedscript=' - s,@package@,pdcmac, - s,@srcdir@,., - s,@texmf@,//texmf, - s,@configure@,configure, - s,@INSTALL@,install, - s,@INSTALL_DATA@,$(INSTALL) --mode=644, - s,@texdir@,$(texmf)/tex/plain/$(package), - s,@docdir@,$(texmf)/doc/plain/$(package), -' - -for file in $files; do - echo $0: writing $file... 1>&2 - sed -e 's,Template for configure,Generated from '$file'.in on '$date' by '$0, \ - -e "$sedscript" $srcdir/$file.in > $file || exit 1 -done - -exit 0 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure deleted file mode 100644 index 267494d6269..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure +++ /dev/null @@ -1,302 +0,0 @@ -#!/bin/sh - -# Mini-configure script for PDCMAC for the benefit of UNIX users - -version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>" - -# Takes arguments a bit like the GNU autoconf, but only uses them to -# try to guess the TeX root directory - -package=pdcmac -date=`date +19%y-%m-%d` -files=makefile -unique=pdcmisc.dtx -cmd="$0 $@" -me=`basename $0` - -# The flag used with "test" to see if a directory is writable. -# For debugging, I sometimes set writable to -d so that -# the searches will pretend that I have write-access to system -# directories (so I can simulate running the script as root) -writable=-w - -echo "This is configure for $package $version $cfgdate" - -tmp=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/cfg$$ -trap 'rm -f $tmp; exit 1' 1 2 15 - -while test $# -gt 0; do - case $1 in - -n*|--n*) - nocreate=t ;; - -v*|--v*) - echo "configure for $package $version <$cfgauthor $cfgdate>" 1>&2 - exit 0 ;; - -h*|--h*) - cat 1>&2 <<@EOF -USAGE: configure [ option ]... - -Running this script creates config.status and optionally -$files. - -Options: - -h, -help, --help, -v, -version, --version - print a message and exit - - -p DIR, -prefix DIR, --prefix=DIR - prefix for installed file names, for example /usr/local - - -e DIR, -exec_prefix DIR, --exec_prefix=DIR - ignored - - -t DIR, -texmf DIR, --texmf=DIR - prefix for all TeX-related installed file names, for - example /usr/texmf or /usr/local/lib/tex - - -w tds, -with tds, --with-tds - Assume a TDS-like directory tree -@EOF - exit 0 ;; - --p*=*) - prefix=`expr $1 : '--p.*=\(.*\)'` ;; - -p|-prefix|--p*) - prefix=$2; shift ;; - -p*) - prefix=`expr $1 : '-p\(.*\)$'` ;; - --s*=*) - srcdir=`expr $1 : '--s.*=\(.*\)'` ;; - -s|-srcdir|--s*) - srcdir=$2; shift ;; - -s*) - srcdir=`expr $1 : '-s\(.*\)$'` ;; - --t*=*) - texmf=`expr $1 : '--t.*=\(.*\)'` ;; - -t|-texmf|--t*) - texmf=$2; shift ;; - -t*) - texmf=`expr $1 : '-t\(.*\)$'` ;; - --f*=*) - fonts=`expr $1 : '--f.*=\(.*\)'` ;; - -f|-fonts|--f*) - fonts=$2; shift ;; - -f*) - fonts=`expr $1 : '-f\(.*\)$'` ;; - --w*-*) - with=$with/`expr $1 : '--w.*-\(.*\)'`/ ;; - -w|-with|--w*) - with=$with/$2/; shift ;; - -w*) - with=$with/`expr $1 : '-w\(.*\)$'`/ ;; - -e*|--e*=*) - ;; - -e|--e*) - shift ;; - *) - echo $me: ignoring $1 1>&2 - ;; - esac - shift -done - -# Check for the "with" keywords we're interested in: -case $with in */tds/*) tds=t ;; esac -# case $with in */bigendian/*) bigendian=t ;; esac - # endianness doesn't matter because no fonts in this package - - -# Find out how to print a dot with no newline -n=-n c= -echo $n x$c > $tmp -case "`cat $tmp`" in - -n*) - n= c='\\c' ;; -esac -dot="$n .$c" - - -# INSTALL -- oh, I can't be bothered trying to be clever. -if install --version 2>&1 | grep GNU >/dev/null; then - INSTALL="install" -else - INSTALL='$(srcdir)/pinstall' -fi -INSTALL_DATA='$(INSTALL) --mode=644' -echo $me: install files with $INSTALL - - -# find srcdir -if test -z "$srcdir" ; then - echo $n "$me: searching for srcdir (package directory)..$c" - for d in . `dirname $0` ..; do - echo $dot - if test -f $d/$unique; then - echo srcdir=$d - srcdir=$d - break - fi - done -fi - -if test -z "$srcdir"; then - echo "" - echo $me: fatal error: could not find sourcdir - exit 1 -fi - -# User might use --prefix to give the TeX prefix: - -if test -z "$texmf"; then - case "$prefix" in - */texmf|*/tex) - texmf=$prefix ;; - esac -fi - -# If $texmf is not set, then search for it -# We look in all sorts of prefixes like /usr/local (with or without extra -# lib), using all sorts of directiry names like "tex" -# - -if test -z "$texmf"; then - prefixes="$prefix - `echo $TEXINPUTS:$TEXFONTS | tr : \\\\12 | - sed -n -e 's,/[Tt]e[Xx].*,,p' -e 's,/font.*,,p' | uniq` - / /usr /usr/local /opts /p /packages /package - /pd /usr/pd /usr/local/pd /usr/contrib /usr/TeX - $HOME" - echo $n $me: searching for \$texmf..$c - for d in texmf tex TeX tex3.14 tex3 tex82; do - for p in $prefixes; do - echo $dot - if test -d $p/$d -a $writable $p/$d; then - echo texmf=$p/$d - texmf=$p/$d - break 2 - fi - if test -d $p/lib/$d -a $writable $p/lib/$d; then - echo texmf=$p/lib/$d - texmf=$p/lib/$d - break 2 - fi - done - done -fi -if test -z "$texmf"; then - echo "" - echo $me: fatal error: could not guess a texmf directory 1>&2 - exit 1 -fi -if test ! -d "$texmf" -o ! -w "$texmf"; then - echo $me: warning: $texmf needs to be a writable directory 1>&2 -fi - - -# If --with-tds not set, try to guess whether we have found -# a TDS directory or not: -if test -n "$tds" || test -d $texmf/tex/plain; then - tds=t - echo "$me: using TWG-TDS 0.61 directory structure" -else - echo "$me: using old-style directory structure :-(" -fi - - -# Start making the config.status file - -f=config.status - -# Special care is taken with the -n option -# -- -n is not to be included by default when configure is run with -# "config.status -r", so it must be removed from $cmd -# -- -n (or other options) may be included on the command line -# of "config.status -r" and will be passed to configure -cmd2=`echo $cmd | sed 's/ --*n[a-z-]*//g'` -cat >$f <<@EOF -# config.status -- configuration status file -# creator: configure for $package $version <$cfgauthor $cfgdate> -# created: $date -# command: $cmd - -case "\$1" in - -r*|--r*) - shift - echo \$0: rerunning $cmd2 1>&2 - exec sh $cmd2 \$* ;; -esac - -echo This is config.status, generated by configure for $package on $date - -srcdir=$srcdir -date=`date +19%y-%m-%d` -files="\${*-$files}" -sedscript=' - s,@package@,$package, - s,@srcdir@,$srcdir, - s,@texmf@,$texmf, - s,@configure@,$0, - s,@INSTALL@,$INSTALL, - s,@INSTALL_DATA@,$INSTALL_DATA, -@EOF - -if test -n "$tds"; then - echo >>$f " s,@texdir@,\$(texmf)/tex/plain/\$(package)," - echo >>$f " s,@docdir@,\$(texmf)/doc/plain/\$(package)," -else - echo $n $me: searching for TeX macro dir..$c; found= - for d in inputs macros; do - echo $dot - if test -d $texmf/$d -a $writable $texmf/$d; then - echo $texmf/$d - echo >>$f " s,@texdir@,$texmf/$d," - found=t - break - fi - done - if test -z "$found"; then - echo "" - echo $0: fatal error: TeX macro dir NOT FOUND 1>&2 - exit 1 - fi - - # now same again for a documentation directory - echo $n $me: searching for documentation dir..$c; found= - for p in $texmf $fonts $prefixes; do - for d in doc doc/tex docs docs/tex ; do - echo $dot - if test -d $p/$d -a $writable $p/$d; then - echo $p/$d/$package - echo >>$f " s,@docdir@,$p/$d/\$(package)," - found=t - break 2 - fi - done - done - if test -z "$found"; then - echo "" - echo $0: warning: documentation dir NOT FOUND 1>&2 - fi -fi - - -# Finish off the config.status file: - -cat >>$f <<'@EOF' -' - -for file in $files; do - echo $0: writing $file... 1>&2 - sed -e 's,Template for configure,Generated from '$file'.in on '$date' by '$0, \ - -e "$sedscript" $srcdir/$file.in > $file || exit 1 -done - -exit 0 -@EOF - -echo $me: configuration status written on config.status - -if test -z "$nocreate"; then - sh config.status -fi - -rm -f $tmp -exit 0 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 165cc4ab2fc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -total 498 --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 1006 Mar 20 14:23 00readme.txt --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 7984 Apr 6 16:10 changes.txt --rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 6910 Mar 24 18:56 configure --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 0 Apr 6 16:10 contents.txt --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 19466 Mar 8 18:16 copying.tex --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 19038 Feb 10 11:02 copying.txt --rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 1282 Apr 6 14:38 dtxtags --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 4267 Apr 6 12:19 dtxtags.1 --rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 787 Mar 24 18:34 fig2epsf --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 1101 Mar 27 16:56 fig2epsf.1 --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 3196 Feb 23 18:51 install.txt --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 21818 Apr 6 14:34 maamac.dtx --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 7785 Mar 29 17:32 magrmac.dtx --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 21216 Feb 23 17:39 magrman.tex --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 4854 Apr 6 12:43 makefile.in --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 387 Apr 6 14:38 news.txt --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 10187 Apr 6 12:42 oput01.eps --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 8784 Feb 13 17:07 oput01.fig --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 12285 Apr 6 12:42 oput02.eps --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 8032 Feb 13 15:34 oput02.fig --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 20544 Mar 30 17:07 pdcadobe.dtx --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 29428 Mar 30 17:08 pdccode.dtx --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 8194 Apr 6 12:44 pdccode.tex --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 7961 Mar 3 15:41 pdccode2.tex --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 38300 Apr 6 12:55 pdcfmt2.dtx --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 23174 Mar 28 20:06 pdcfsel.dtx --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 61708 Apr 6 16:04 pdcguide.dvi --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 31674 Apr 6 16:04 pdcguide.tex --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 8670 Mar 30 17:10 pdcl1maa.dtx --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 27 Apr 6 12:20 pdcmacvn.tex --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 18597 Mar 30 17:13 pdcmisc.dtx --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 5207 Mar 29 15:54 pdcmondo.tex --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 32746 Apr 6 12:51 pdcoput5.dtx --r--r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 37441 Mar 30 17:12 pdcsty.dtx --rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 1695 Mar 24 19:10 pinstall --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 1744 Mar 27 15:47 pinstall.1 --rwxr-xr-x 1 pdc mc86 1876 Mar 27 14:22 pmkdir --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 1538 Mar 27 16:49 pmkdir.1 --rw-r--r-- 1 pdc mc86 789 Apr 6 14:38 version.txt diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 184f8803bdd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,373 +0,0 @@ -\section{GNU General Public License\ifnum\pageno>0 \note{This licence is reproduced - verbatim, therefore the American spelling is used.}\fi} - Version 2, June 1991 - -\noindent - Copyright \copyright~1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., - 675~Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA - - Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of - this license document, but changing it is not allowed. - - -\noindent{\bf Preamble}\quad - The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom -to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is -intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to -make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public -License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and -to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free -Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General -Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. - - When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not -price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you -have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for -this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if -you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new -free programs; and that you know you can do these things. - - To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid -anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. -These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you -distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. - - For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether -gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that -you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the -source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their -rights. - - We protect your rights with two steps: (1)~copyright the software, and -(2)~offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, -distribute and/or modify the software. - - Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain -that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free -software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we -want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so -that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original -authors' reputations. - - Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software -patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free -program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the -program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any -patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. - - The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and -modification follow. - -\bigskip -\noindent{\bf TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND - MODIFICATION\advance\rightskip0pt plus 1em \par} -\medskip - - 1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a - notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed - under the terms of this General Public License. The `Program', - below, refers to any such program or work, and a `work based on the - Program' means either the Program or any derivative work under - copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a - portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or - translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is - included without limitation in the term `modification'.) Each - licensee is addressed as `you'. - - Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are - not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act - of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the - Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on - the Program (independent of having been made by running the - Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. - - 2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source - code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you - conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate - copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the - notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any - warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of - this License along with the Program. - - You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, - and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange - for a fee. - - 3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of - it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and - distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 - above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: - -\numbered - \\You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices - stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. - - \\You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that - in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or - any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to - all third parties under the terms of this License. - - \\If the modified program normally reads commands interactively - when run, you must cause it, when started running for such - interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display - an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and - a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you - provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the - program under these conditions, and telling the user how to - view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program - itself is interactive but does not normally print such an - announcement, your work based on the Program is not required - to print an announcement.) -\endnumbered - - These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If - identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the - Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate - works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply - to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But - when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a - work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on - the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees - extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part - regardless of who wrote it. - - Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or - contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the - intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of - derivative or collective works based on the Program. - - In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the - Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a - volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other - work under the scope of this License. - - 4. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, - under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms - of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the - following: - -\numbered - \\ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable - source code, which must be distributed under the terms of - Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for - software interchange; or, - - \\ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three - years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your - cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete - machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be - distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a - medium customarily used for software interchange; or, - - \\ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer - to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is - allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you - received the program in object code or executable form with - such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) -\endnumbered - - The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for - making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete - source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, - plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts - used to control compilation and installation of the executable. - However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need - not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source - or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so - on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless - that component itself accompanies the executable. - - If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering - access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent - access to copy the source code from the same place counts as - distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not - compelled to copy the source along with the object code. - - 5. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program - except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt - otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is - void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this - License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, - from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated - so long as such parties remain in full compliance. - - 6. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not - signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify - or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions - are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. - Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work - based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License - to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, - distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. - - 7. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the - Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the - original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject - to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further - restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted - herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third - parties to this License. - - 8. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent - infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent - issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, - agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this - License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this - License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously - your obligations under this License and any other pertinent - obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the - Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit - royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive - copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you - could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely - from distribution of the Program. - - If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable - under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is - intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply - in other circumstances. - - It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any - patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of - any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting - the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is - implemented by public license practices. Many people have made - generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed - through that system in reliance on consistent application of that - system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is - willing to distribute software through any other system and a - licensee cannot impose that choice. - - This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed - to be a consequence of the rest of this License. - - 9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in - certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, - the original copyright holder who places the Program under this - License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation - excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only - in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this - License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of - this License. - - 10. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new - versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new - versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may - differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. - - Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the - Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to - it and `any later version', you have the option of following the - terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version - published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not - specify a version number of this License, you may choose any - version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. - - 11. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free - programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the - author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by - the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software - Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision - will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of - all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing - and reuse of software generally. - -\medbreak\centerline{\bf NO WARRANTY}\nobreak\smallskip\nobreak -\begingroup\tolerance=3000 \advance\rightskip 0pt plus 1em - - 12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO - WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE - LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS - AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY - OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT - LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS - FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND - PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE - DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR - OR CORRECTION. - - 13. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN - WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY - MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE - LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, - INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR - INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF - DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU - OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY - OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN - ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. - -\endgroup -\bigskip \centerline{\bf END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS}\medbreak - -\noindent{\bf How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs}\quad - If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest -possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it -free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these -terms. - - To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest -to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively -convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the -`copyright' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. - -\quotation - {\it one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does} - - Copyright (C) 19{\it yy} {\it name of author} -\smallskip - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify - it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by - the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or - (at your option) any later version. -\smallskip - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. -\smallskip - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License - along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software - Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. -\endquotation - -Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. - -If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this -when it starts in an interactive mode: - -\quotation - Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19YY NAME OF AUTHOR - Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. - This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it - under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. -\endquotation - -The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the -appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the -commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show -c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever suits your -program. - -You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your -school, if any, to sign a `copyright disclaimer' for the program, if -necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: - -\quotation - Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program - `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. - - SIGNATURE OF TY COON, 1 April 1989 - Ty Coon, President of Vice -\endquotation - -This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program -into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you -may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications -with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library -General Public License instead of this License. - - -%Local Variables: -%tex-mother-file: "pdcguide.tex" -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags deleted file mode 100644 index a54f61760ab..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -#! /bin/sh - -# dtxtags -- getenerate a TAGS file for the DTX files -version="1.1 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06>" - -# The grep line produces LINE:BYTE:PATTERN -# the sed converts this to LINE:BYTE:PATTERN:TAG - -tmp=${TMP-/tmp}/mktags$$ -trap 'rm -f $tmp*' 0 - -me=`basename $0` -outfile=TAGS - -touch $tmp -while test $# -gt 0; do - case $1 in - --o*=*) - outfile=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;; - -o|--o*) - outfile=$2; shift ;; - -o*) - outfile=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;; - -h|--h*) - cat <<@EOF -$me: construct an etags-style tags file from DTX files. - -USAGE: - $me [ --output=OUTFILE ] [ INFILE... ] - $me --help | --version -@EOF - exit 0 ;; - -V|--v*) - echo This is $me $version - exit 0 ;; - -*) - echo >&2 $me: $1: not understood, try $me --help - exit 2 ;; - *) - i=$1 - echo >&2 $1: - egrep -nb '^[ ]\|[ ]*\\([a-z]*def|new)' <$1 | - sed ' - s/\([ ]*|\\[a-z]*\\[A-Za-z]*\).*$/\1/ - t finish - s/\([ ]*|\\[a-z]*\\.\).*$/\1/ - t finish - s/\([ ]*|\\[a-z]*[^a-z]\).*$/\1/ - : finish - s/\([0-9]*\):\([0-9]*\):\(.*\)/\3\1,\2/ - ' > $tmp.a - wc $tmp.a - echo ' ' >> $tmp - echo $1,`wc -c <$tmp.a` >>$tmp - cat $tmp.a >> $tmp - ;; - esac - shift - -done - -mv 2>/dev/null $outfile $outfile.bak && -echo >&2 backup written to $outfile.bak - -mv $tmp $outfile - -exit 0 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1d37d72bac7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,207 +0,0 @@ -.TH DTXTAGS 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE" -.SH NAME -dtxtags \- generate an Emacs tags (etags) file from DTX files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.na -.B dtxtags -[ -.BI \-\-output= outfile -] [ -.I infile -]\|.\|.\|. -.br -.B dtxtags -.B \-\-help -| -.B \-\-version -.SH DESCRIPTION -.na -This is a shellscript that looks for definitions in -.B dtx -files -(Documented TeX Macros, as used in the -.SM PDCMAC -package), and generates a tags file in -.IR etags (1) -format. The tags file will be called -.SM -.B TAGS -by default. -Any old tags file will be written to -.BR TAGS.bak . -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BI \-\-output= outfile, " \-o " outfile -Write tags to -.I outfile -instead of the default. -Any existing file with that name will be renamed -.IB outfile .bak -first. -.TP -.BR \-\-help ", " \-h -Print a summary of options and exit. -.TP -.BR \-\-version ", " \-V -Print version identification and exit. -.SH "INPUT SYNTAX" -This section describes the constructs in the -.B dtx -that will be recognized as tags. You should already be acquainted with -TeX terminology like `control sequence'. -.PP -A -.I keyword -is (1)\ a TeX control sequence -.I containing -.RB ` def ', -such as -.B \edef -or -.B \edefverbatim -or -.BR \emathchardef , -or (2)\ a control sequence -.I starting -with -.RB ` \enew ', -like -.B \enewif -and -.BR \enewcount . -Keywords define the -.I tag -(a control sequence or single character) immediately following. -.PP -Keywords are recognized only if immediately following a -.RB ` | ' -at the start of a line, the code used to introduce macro code in -.B dtx -files. -.PP -There may be whitespace between the start of the line and the -vertical bar, and between the vertical bar and the keyword (this means a -few definitions appearing within definitions are spuriously tagged, but -this should be harmless). -.SH "OUTPUT FORMAT" -This section sumarizes the syntax of the tag file that is generated, -because the documentation for -.IR etags (1) -omits it. Since this syntax description was made by reverse-engineering -.I etags -output, it should not be taken as definitive! -.PP -A tags file is composed of -.I sections -catenated together, -each section made of a -.I header -followed by the -.IR body . -All numbers are expressed in ASCII in decimal notation. -.PP -The header consists of a form feed, a newline, the name of the file the -tags are found in, a comma, and the size in bytes of the body and a -newline. -.PP -The body consists of -.I entries -which may be in -old format or new format. -Old format entries are of the form -.IP "" 4n -.I fragment -.B \e177 -.IB line , -.I byte -.SM NL -.PP -where -.I fragment -is a fragment from the file containing the tag (where the start of the -fragment is at the beginning of a line in the file), -.B \e177 -is a -.SM DEL -character (character 127), -.I line -is the number of the line in which the fragment appears, -.I byte -is the position of the start of the fragment in bytes from the -start of the file, -and -.SM NL -is a newline (character 10). -.PP -New format entries are of the form -.IP "" 4n -.I fragment -.B \e177 -.IB line , -.IB byte , -.B \e001 -.I tag -[ -.B \e001 -.I tag -]\|.\|.\|. -.SM NL -.PP -(two commas) where -.B \e001 -is a -.SM SOH -character (character 1), and -.I tag -is the exact tag (necessary for C++, where the entire tag is not -necessarily found on the definition line). The brackets and ellipsis -indicate that there may be one or more tags in the entry. -.PP -Real tags files may also have references to other tag files, but I don't -use this feature. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.TP -.SM TMP -Name of directory for temporary files. -Default is -.BR /tmp . -.SH FILES -.TP -.SB TAGS -Default output file name. -.TP -.B /tmp/mktags\(** -Temporary files. -.SH AUTHOR -P. Damian Cugley -.RI ( damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk ). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -etags(1), emacs(1) -.PP -The file -.B etc/etags.notes -in the Emacs distribution. -.PP -Richard Stallman, -.I Emacs Reference Manual -(or the corresponding Info file). -.PP -P. Damian Cugley, -.I PDCMAC User Guide -(file -.B pdcguide.tex -in the -.SM PDCMAC -distribution), -for information about -.B dtx -files. -.SH BUGS -This is just a shellscript emulating a subset of -.IR etags 's -functionality. -.PP -Despite the name, this program does not work with the -.B dtx -files used in LaTeX 2e distributions, which have a completely different -format (and their own indexing scheme). diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf deleted file mode 100644 index 210dd47edb8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -#! /bin/sh - -# Convert Fig files to conformant EPSF-3.0 files -# Fig's PostScript translation creates EPSF files that cause -# many laser printers to abort in mid-document. -# This script attempts to remedy this. - -version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>" - -# Usage fig2epsf [ -m MAG ] [ -f FONT ] [ -s FSIZE ] [ - -case $1 in - -V|--version) - echo 'This is fig2epsf $version, using fig2dev from' - fig2dev -V - exit 0 -esac - -fig2dev -Lps $* | sed ' - s/^%!$/%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0/ - s/^%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-2.0/%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0/ - s/%%Pages: 0/%%Pages: 1/ - /\/\$F2psDict/d - /\$F2psDict begin/d - / end/d - /\/\$F2psBegin/d - /\/\$F2psEnd/d - /\$F2psBegin/d - /\/col-1/d - s/col-1//g - s,\$F2psDict /mtrx matrix put,/mtrx matrix def, - s/\$F2psEnd/showpage/ - /%%EndProlog/a\ -\ -%%Page: 1 1 -' diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 10985153141..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIG2EPSF 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE" -.SH NAME -fig2epsf \- convert Fig picture files into Encapsulate PostScript format -.SH SYNOPSIS -.na -.B fig2epsf -[ -.I fig2dev options -] -.I figfile -.B > -.I epsffile -.SH DESCRIPTION -.na -This is a shellscript that uses the -.IR fig2dev (1) -program to convert files in Fig's format -(see -.IR fig (1) -or -.IR xfig (1)) -into Encapsulated PostScript Format compliant with version 3.0 of the -.SM EPSF -guidelines. The -.SM EPSF -file is printed on the standard output stream. -.PP -This shellscript cleans up some of the redundant PostScript code that -.I fig2dev -2.1.4.1 produces, so that the resulting files may be printed on a -tiny-brained LaserWriter, and corrects the header comments so that it -may be previewed with -.IR ghostview (1). -.SH AUTHOR -P. Damian Cugley -.SH "SEE ALSO" -fig2dev(1) -.PP -.I -PostScript Language Reference Manual -Second Edition -(Addison\-Wesley, 1990), -Appendix E. -.SH BUGS -It is possible that later versions of TransFig will produce less buggy -PostScript files, and that these will break this shellscript. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex deleted file mode 100644 index c22a178174f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ -% ma55doc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "ma55doc.tex", -%%% version = "1.2", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in -%%% Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts. -%%% This macro file was generated by running plain -%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, -%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def", -%%%} - -\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\input pdcimth -\input pdcmigr -\input pdcfmt2 -\input pdchyex -\input pdcoput5 -\input pdcfsel -\input maamac -\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}} -\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}} -\autoloadfonts -\def\STYheadingT{% - \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}% - \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% -} -\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\newfam\rmsyfam -\def\STYbodyT{% - \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}% - \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}% - \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}% -} -\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2 -\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 -\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1 -\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 -\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf -\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf -\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny} -\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt} -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000 -\bodyfonts -{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 } -\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}} -\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }} -\input pdcdoc.def -\inputifexists{ma55doc.cfg} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 0b72a6e99a4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ -% ma55lft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "ma55lft.tex", -%%% version = "1.2", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in -%%% Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts. -%%% This macro file was generated by running plain -%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, -%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def", -%%%} - -\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\input pdcimth -\input pdcmigr -\input pdcfmt2 -\input pdchyex -\input pdcoput5 -\input pdcfsel -\input maamac -\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}} -\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}} -\autoloadfonts -\def\STYheadingT{% - \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}% - \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% -} -\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\newfam\rmsyfam -\def\STYbodyT{% - \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}% - \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}% - \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}% -} -\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2 -\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 -\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1 -\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 -\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf -\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf -\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny} -\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt} -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000 -\bodyfonts -{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 } -\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}} -\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }} -\input pdclft.def -\inputifexists{ma55lft.cfg} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index a4398caa417..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,627 +0,0 @@ -% maamac.dtx -- documentation & source for maamac.tex -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "MAAMAC -- Malvern A Macros", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 1.5 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/04/06 13:33:44 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX definitions file maamac.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ maamac -%{{{ preamble - -\relax -\input pdccode - -\document -\rcs$Id: maamac.dtx,v 1.5 1995/04/06 13:33:44 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\newcount\chcda \newcount\chcdc \newcount\chcdn -\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{% - \chcda#2\relax \chcdc#3\relax \chcdn#4\relax - \loop \ifnum\chcdn>0 - #1\chcda\chcdc - \advance\chcda1 \advance\chcdc1 \advance\chcdn-1 - \repeat -} -\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26} - -\codefile{maamac.tex} -%}}} preamble -%{{{ introduction - -\author{P. Damian Cugley} -\title{MAAMAC---Malvern A Macros} -\advance\seccount-1 -\section{Introduction} - - This document describes |maamac.tex|, a collection of formatting - macros for plain \TeX\ documents using fonts with the Malvern~A - encoding. For example, it defines commands for making composite - letters and special symbols. - -\subsec{About this document} - - The definitions file and this printed documentation are both in - |maamac.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The - \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for - similar purposes.} which, when processed by plain \TeX, - generates a fresh copy of |maamac.tex| in the current directory - in addition to the |dvi| file. This ensures that the printed - documentation and the code it describes are identical. The - |dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|. - -\subsec{What is in MAAMAC?} - - The definitions in |maamac.tex| fall into three sections: -\smallskip -\item{\S1} Building {\it composite letters} like `\'e' from {\it - marks} like `\'{}' and {\it base letters} like `e'. This gives - new definitions for commands like |\'| and |\"|. -\item{\S2} Symbols and special letters: replacements for existing - commands like |\P| (\P) and |\ae| (\ae), and new commands like - |\registered| and |\pounds|. -\item{\S3} Switching between alphabets. The Malvern~A encoding includes - separate small capital and medium capital alphabets in addition - to the usual capitals and lower case. This section defines - commands for transliterating a list of tokens from one alphabet - to another. - -\smallskip\noindent - The first two sections make changes to commands described in - {\it\TeX book} Chapter~9 (and a few maths symbols from - Chapter~16) and defined in Appendix~B. - -%}}} introduction -%{{{ File identification -\subsec{File identification} - - Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the - file. - -\code - \|\% maamac.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Malvern A Macros - | - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "Macros for using the Malvern-A font coding - |%%% scheme in plain TeX documents. - |%%% This file was generated by running - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\} - | -\endcode - -%}}} -%{{{ building composite letters -\section{Building composite letters} - - THis section redefines commands listed at the start of Chapter~9 - of the {\it\TeX book}: |\'|, |\"|, etc. The main difference is - that these now use `medium capitals' and differently-drawn marks - to make composite capital letters. - - I~also define \<chardef tokens> called |\acuteglyph|, - |\twodotsglyph| which may be used to print these marks in a - document: `the acute mark ``\'{}''\dots' might be typeset with - `|the acute mark ``\acuteglyph''|\dots'. Also, if you don't - like the way my macros look, you can say `|\accent\acuteglyph - E|' rather than having to look up its glyph number. - -%{{{ utility macros - -\subsec{Utility macros} - - First some nicknames for scratch registers. -\code - |\dimendef\dimena0 \dimendef\dimenb2 - |\toksdef\toksa0 - |\countdef\counta255 - |\ifx\countb\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countb \fi - |\ifx\countc\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countc \fi -\endcode - - A macro to find the code in \TeX's internal encoding for a - character. The character might be represented by (1)~a - character with category code~11 or~12, (2)~a token defined with - |\chardef|, or (3)~the token |\char| followed by a \<number>. -\code - |\def\code#1{% - | \ifcat#1a% - | `#1 - | \else\ifcat#1+% - | `#1 - | \else\ifx\char#1 -\endcode -\hbox{\hskip6\fontdimen6\tentt - \% If the first token is |\char| the rest is the - \<number> we want.} -\code - | \else - | #1% - | \fi\fi\fi - |} -\endcode - - So as to make conditional macros that can be skipped over if - they appear nested inside another conditional, we make include - the token |\then| amongst the arguments, making this the `if-' - token to match the |\else| and |\fi| following it. This way we - write, for example -$$\hbox{|\ifcap|\<character> |\then| \<true text> - |\else| \<false text> |\fi|}$$ -\code - |\let\then=\iffalse -\smallbreak - |\def\ifcap#1\then{\expandafter\ifcapnum\code{#1}\then} - |\def\ifcapnum#1\then{\ifnum\lccode#1=#1} -\smallbreak - |\def\iflower#1\then{\expandafter\iflowernum\code{#1}\then} - |\def\iflowernum#1\then{\ifnum\uccode#1=#1} -\endcode - - A macro to extract the slant-per-point parameter of a font in - toe form of a \TeX\ \<factor>. -\code - |\def\fontslant#1{\expandafter\stripPT\the\fontdimen1#1} -\smallbreak - |\begingroup \uccode`2=`p \uccode`3=`t \uppercase{\toksa{\endgroup - | \def\\#123{#1} - |}} \the\toksa - |\let\stripPT=\\ -\endcode -%}}} utility macros -%{{{ macros for placing marks - -\subsec{Macros for placing marks} - - This simple macro places the text |#3| at displaced - $(\hbox{|#1|},\hbox{|#2|})$ from current position: -\code - |\def\putxy#1#2#3{\leavevmode\rlap{\hskip#1\raise#2\hbox{#3}}} -\endcode - - Now we have a generic mark-placement macro. It is similar to - the |\accent| primitive, but takes two extra parameters: -$$ - \hbox{|\putmarkxy|\arg{$xf$}\arg{$dy$}\arg{$mark$}\arg{$base$}} -$$ - The horizontal position $xf$ of the optical centre of the base - letter (ignoring slant) is expressed as a \<factor> (i.e., - decimal fraction of the width of the base glyph). The vertical - displacement $dy$ is expressed as a fragment of \TeX\ code that - will calculate $dy$. The code is expanded after setting box~0 - to contain the base glyph, and must put the result in |\dimena|. - For example, we could define -$$ - \hbox{|\def\fakeaccent{\putmarkxy{0.5}{\dimena\ht0 - \advance\dimena-1ex }}|} -$$ - This produces an approximation to the primitive |\accent| - command. - - Given the $x$-factor $xf$, a base glyph with width $wd$, a font - with slant $s$, the horizontal displacement $dx$ is given by -$$ - dx = xf \times wd + s \times dy\quad. -$$ - In this macro it is stored in |\dimenb|. -\code - |\def\putmarkxy#1#2#3#4{{% - | \setbox0=\hbox{#4}#2\relax - | \dimenb#1\wd0 \advance\dimenb\fontslant\font\dimena - | \leavevmode - | \putxy{\dimenb}{\dimena}{\hbox to 0pt{\hss\char#3\hss}}% - | \box0 - |}} -\smallbreak - |\def\putmarky{\putmarkxy{0.5}} -\endcode -%}}} macros for placing marks -%{{{ type I marks - -\subsec{Type~I Marks} - - A Type~I mark is one which does not have any scope for being - `squashed' to go over capital letters---for example, the - two-dots mark `\"{}' and macron `\={}'. - - Here's a macro for placing a Type~I mark given by |#1| (a - \<number>) over base glyph |#2| (which is anything that |\code| - understands). The difference between this macro and simply - using |\accent| is (1)~if presented with a capital letter it - will use the corresponding medium capital letter and (2)~the the - mark is raised by an amount intended to centre it vertically - between the top of the base letter and the top of the - body-height---assuming it was original centered between - body-height and $x$-height. - - If $H$ is the body height, $h$ the height of the base glyph, -$$ \mathcode`/="202F - \eqalign{dy &= { H + h \over 2 } - { H + 1\,{\rm - ex} \over 2}\cr - &= \textstyle { 1\over2}h - {1\over2}\,{\rm ex}\cr} -$$ -\code - |\def\typeImark#1#2{{% - | \setbox2=\hbox{#2}% - | \ifdim \ht2=1ex - | \accent#1\relax#2% - | \else - | \counta\code{#2}% - | \ifnum\counta>64 \ifnum\counta<96 - | \advance\counta 128 - | \fi \fi - | \putmarky{\dimena0.5\ht0 \advance\dimena-0.5ex } - | {#1}{\char\counta}% - | \fi - |}} -\endcode - - Finally we define the composite-letter-building commands. -\code - |\chardef\dotglyph22 \def\.{\typeImark\dotglyph} - |\chardef\twodotsglyph23 \def\"{\typeImark\twodotsglyph} - |\chardef\macronglyph150 \def\={\typeImark\macronglyph} - |\chardef\longmacronglyph151 - | \def\longmacronmark{\typeImark\longmacronglyph} -\endcode -%}}} type I marks -%{{{ type II marks - -\subsec{Type~II Marks} - - These marks have an alternative glyph for use of capital and - medium capital letters. As with |\typeImark|, |#1| is a - \<number> and |#2| is anything understood by |\code|. -\code - |\def\typeIImark#1#2{{% - | \counta#1\relax \countb\code{#2}% - | \ifcap{#2}\then - | \ifnum \counta<128 \advance\counta 128 \fi - | \ifnum \countb<128 \advance\countb 128 \fi - | \fi - | \accent\counta \char\countb - |}} -\smallbreak - |\chardef\acuteglyph8 \def\'{\typeIImark\acuteglyph} - |\chardef\graveglyph9 \def\`{\typeIImark\graveglyph} - |\chardef\circumglyph10 \def\^{\typeIImark\circumglyph} - |\chardef\tildeglyph11 \def\~{\typeIImark\tildeglyph} - |\chardef\ringglyph12 \def\ringmark{\typeIImark\ringglyph} - |\chardef\caronglyph13 \def\v{\typeIImark\caronglyph} - |\chardef\breveglyph14 \def\u{\typeIImark\breveglyph} - |\chardef\hungarglyph15 \def\H{\typeIImark\hungarglyph} -\endcode - I have abbreviated `circumflex' as `circum' (consistent with - Adobe's `|asciicircum|'). I~have called the hook `\v{}' - `|caron|' because that is its name as used by ISO and Adobe. - I~have called the long Hungarian umlaut `\H{}' `|hungar|' for - want of a better name (it's shorter than |hungarumlaut|).. -%}}} type II marks -%{{{ cedilla ogonek - -\subsec{Cedilla and ogonek} - - The cedilla and ogonek each have a variant intended for capital - letters (in this case the variant is larger not smaller). -\code - |\def\cedillalike#1#2#3{{% - | \setbox0=\hbox{#3}% - | \ifdim\ht0>1ex - | \ooalign{\hidewidth\char#2\relax\hidewidth\crcr\unhbox0 }% - | \else - | \accent#1 #3% - | \fi - |}} -\smallbreak - |\chardef\cedillaglyph6 \chardef\Cedillaglyph134 - |\def\c{\cedillalike\cedillaglyph\Cedillaglyph} -\smallbreak - |\chardef\ogonekglyph7 \chardef\Ogonekglyph135 - |\def\k{\cedillalike\ogonekglyph\Ogonekglyph} -\endcode -%}}} cedilla ogonek -%}}} -%{{{ symbols -\section{Symbols and special letters} -%{{{ special letters - -\subsec{Special letters} - - The letters defined here that are not included in Chapter~9 of - the {\it\TeX book} are the Icelandic thorn (|\TH|, |\th|) and - eth\footnote*{Also called `edh'.} (|\DH|, |\dh|), the Polish - {\it a} and {\it e} with ogonek (|\A|, |\a|, |\E|, |\e|), and - the Sami eng\footnote\dag{Also called `ing' or `ng'.} (|\NG|, - |\ng|). - - We also give replacements for {\it d}, {\it t} and {\it l} with - hook (which are usually drawn with a apostrophe-like mark), and - the Esperanto letter {\it hho} (\^h). -\code - |\chardef\TH"00 \chardef\th"10 \chardef\DH"04 \chardef\dh"14 - |\chardef\A "01 \chardef\a "11 \chardef\E "05 \chardef\e "15 - |\chardef\NG"02 \chardef\ng"12 \chardef\L "03 \chardef\l "13 - |\chardef\AE"5E \chardef\ae"7E \chardef\OE"5F \chardef\oe"7F - |\chardef\O "5C \chardef\o "7C -\smallbreak - |\chardef\vd"9C \chardef\vt"9D \chardef\h "9E \chardef\vl"9F - |\chardef\ss"18 \chardef\i "19 \chardef\j "1A -\smallbreak - |\def\aa{\ringmark a} \def\AA{\ringmark A} -\endcode - -\code -\smallbreak - |\chardef\orda"98 \chardef\ordo"99 \def\No{N\ordo} \def\no{n\ordo} - |\chardef\csuperior"98 \def\Mc{M\csuperior} -\endcode - The command |\Mc| is used for forming names like - M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b c}Donald. -%}}} special letters -%{{{ text syms - -\subsec{Other symbols used in text} - - There are several new symbols here. Note that |\trademark| is - what you will get if you use the ASCII double quote character - `|"|' in your manuscript. -\code - |\chardef\trademark "22 - |\chardef\copyright "FB \chardef\registered"FD - |\chardef\careof "9A \chardef\Box "A0 - |\chardef\cents "A2 \chardef\pounds "A3 - |\chardef\currency "A4 \chardef\permille "A5 - |\chardef\yen "A8 \chardef\florin "A9 - |\chardef\dag "AA \chardef\ddag "AB - |\chardef\gbdecimal "AE \chardef\minus "AF - |\chardef\S "BA \chardef\P "BB - |\chardef\degrees "C0 - |\chardef\lguillemet"BC \chardef\rguillemet"BE -\endcode - The |\careof| sign ($\rm ^c\!/\!_o$) is an abbreviation for - `care of' in English-language addresses (actually, Australians - traditionally write `$\rm ^c\!/\!_-$'). The raised dot - |\gbdecimal| is the British decimal point (I~usually do - |\mathcode`.=\gbdecimal| and let maths mode do all the work). - The |\degrees| sign replaces \TeX's |$^\circ$|. - - The guillemets can also be obtained with the ligatures |<<| and - |>>|. - - -%}}} text syms -%{{{ maths syms - -\subsec{Symbols used in maths} - - I have stuck with the plain \TeX\ conventions as much as - possible---even though |\bullet| is more often used in text than - maths. -\code - |\mathcode`\,"602C \mathcode`\-"20AF - |\mathcode`\."002E \mathcode`\/"002F -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\bullet "2020 \mathchardef\times "20A6 - |\mathchardef\backslash"005B \mathchardef\setminus "205B - |\mathchardef\cdot "20AE \mathchardef\cdotp "60AE -\smallbreak - |\def\langle{\delimiter"40DB30A } \delcode`\<"0DB30A - |\def\rangle{\delimiter"50DD30B } \delcode`\>"0DD30B - |\def\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308 } \let\{\lbrace \mathcode`\{"407B - |\def\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309 } \let\}\rbrace \mathcode`\}"407D -\endcode - -%}}} maths syms -%}}} symbols -%{{{ switching alphabets -\section{Switching between alphabets} - - This is one of the strange ideas that went into the design of - the Malvern font---I wanted to have small capitals and medium - capitals treated as separate alphabets rather than as a - different style, just as I treat old-style and ranging numerals - as separate symbols. These extra alphabets are present in all - Malvern~A encodings\footnote*{Fonts with the Malvern~A encoding - but made from normal PostScript fonts will have medium capitals - replaced with full capitals, and old-style numerals replaced - with ranging numerals.} - - These extra alphabets are obtained by transliterating a sequence - of letters using the |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| - commands.\footnote\dag{Alas! this task would be so much easier - and more efficient if it were possible to declare new - alphabet-switching tables styled after the |\uccode| and - |\lccode| tables which make |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| work. - Then all this nonsense could happen in \TeX's mouth, which has - some advantages. I~can imagine commands |\newchartable| (used - to create a token which can be used in the same way as - |\uccode|) and |\usechartable| (used to defined macros that work - like |\uppercase|). E\TeX\ hackers take note!} For example, to - transliterate capitals into small capitals (the |\sc| command), - we first make assignments so that, for example, |\lccode`a| is - set to the code for small-capital $\scriptstyle A$, then apply - |\lowercase| to the token list. - -\subsec{Setting upper and lower case codes for special letters} - - These entries in the |\uucode| and |\lccode| tables are used by - the composite-letter-building commands rather then the - alphabet-switchign commands, but they are included here to be - near the other code-hackery. - -\code - |\uccode\th\TH \lccode\TH\th \uccode\TH\TH \lccode\th\th - |\uccode\a \A \lccode\A \a \uccode\A \A \lccode\a \a - |\uccode\ng\NG \lccode\NG\ng \uccode\NG\NG \lccode\ng\ng - |\uccode\l \L \lccode\L \l \uccode\L \L \lccode\l \l - |\uccode\dh\DH \lccode\DH\dh \uccode\DH\DH \lccode\dh\dh - |\uccode\e \E \lccode\E \e \uccode\E \E \lccode\e \e - |\uccode\o \O \lccode\O \o \uccode\O \O \lccode\o \o - |\uccode\ae\AE \lccode\AE\ae \uccode\AE\AE \lccode\ae\ae - |\uccode\oe\OE \lccode\OE\oe \uccode\OE\OE \lccode\oe\oe -\smallbreak - |\uccode\i`I \uccode\j`J \lccode\i\i \lccode\j\j - |\uccode\csuperior`C -\endcode - - -\subsec{A macro for changing character codes} - - The |\changecodes| command is used to change those segments of - character tables that are contiguous and map onto a contiguous - segment in the range. It is invoked as -$$ - \hbox{\it |\changecodes| command x y n} -$$ - (where $\it command$ is a token like |\uccode| or |\mathcode| - and $x$, $y$, and $n$ are \<number>s), and does the equivalent - of -$$ - {\it command}\;i\mathrel{\hbox{\tt=}} - j\qquad \hbox{for all $\cases{x \le i < x + n\cr - y \le j < y + n\cr}$} -$$ - -\code - |\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{% - | \counta#2\relax \countb#3\relax \countc#4\relax - | \loop - | \ifnum\countc>0 - | #1\counta\countb - | \advance\counta 1 - | \advance\countb 1 - | \advance\countc-1 - | \repeat - |} -\endcode - - We can use this immediately to arrange that lowercasing medium caps - makes lower case, and uppercasing small caps makes full caps: -\code - |\changecodes\uccode{"E1}{`A}{26} - |\changecodes\uccode{"C1}{"C1}{26} - |\changecodes\lccode{"E1}{"E1}{26} - |\changecodes\lccode{"C1}{`a}{26} -\endcode - - We also make old-style numerals behave as lower case for ranging - numerals, and also arrange that maths mode uses ranging figures. -\code - |\changecodes\lccode{"B0}{`0}{10} - |\changecodes\uccode{`0}{"B0}{10} -\endcode - - In maths mode (1)~we use text italic for letters, since CM MAth - Italic will not match the body text and (2)~we use ranging - figures. -\code - |\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26} - |\changecodes\mathcode{`A}{"7441}{26} - |\changecodes\mathcode{`0}{"70B0}{10} -\endcode - -\subsec{Changing the alphabet for special letters got with commands} - - When applying |\uppercase| or |\lowercase| to a token list, - macros will be unaffected (|\ae| will still generate `ae'). To - get around this we define macros that redefine these control - sequences. They each take as parameters hex digits used to make - character codes. -\code - |\def\capspecials#1#2{% - | \chardef\TH"#10 \chardef\A "#11 \chardef\NG"#12 - | \chardef\L "#13 \chardef\DH"#14 \chardef\E "#15 - | \chardef\O "#2C \chardef\AE"#2E \chardef\OE"#2F - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\lcspecials#1#2#3{% - | \chardef\th"#10 \chardef\a "#11 \chardef\ng"#12 - | \chardef\l "#13 \chardef\dh"#14 \chardef\e "#15 - | \chardef\o "#2C \chardef\ae"#2E \chardef\oe"#2F - | \def\ss{\char"#23 \char"#23 }\chardef\i"#39 \chardef\j"#3A - |} -\endcode -\subsec{Pulling it all together} - Now we can define the user macros that do the work. These take - one argument, a piece of text to transliterate: |\sc{OX1~3QD}| - produces a small-capital `${\rm\scriptstyle OX}{\mit 1\ - 3}{\rm\scriptstyle QD}$'; - |\csc{ABCdef}| produces caps and small caps - `ABC{\the\scriptfont0 DEF}'. -\code - |\def\sc#1{{% - | \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"E1}{26}\capspecials9F\lowercase{#1}% - |}} -\smallbreak - |\def\mc#1{{% - | \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"C1}{26}\capspecials8D\lowercase{#1}% - |}} -\smallbreak - |\def\csc#1{{% - | \changecodes\uccode{`a}{"E1}{26}\lcspecials9FE\uppercase{#1}% - |}} -\smallbreak - |\def\allcaps#1{{% - | \lcspecials054\uppercase{#1}% - |}} -\smallbreak - |\def\alllc#1{{% - | \capspecials17\lowercase{#1}% - |}} -\endcode -%}}} switching alphabets -\endcodefile -\enddocument -\bye -%}}} maamac - - -% Local variables: -% fold-folded-p: t -% fill-prefix: "\t" -% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex deleted file mode 100644 index c3c2835eb10..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,193 +0,0 @@ -% maamac.tex 1.5 1995/04/06 -- Malvern A Macros - -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex", -%%% version = "1.5", -%%% date = "1995/04/06", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Macros for using the Malvern-A font coding -%%% scheme in plain TeX documents. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on maamac.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute maamac.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } - -\message{1.5 <pdc 1995/04/06>} - -\dimendef\dimena0 \dimendef\dimenb2 -\toksdef\toksa0 -\countdef\counta255 -\ifx\countb\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countb \fi -\ifx\countc\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countc \fi -\def\code#1{% - \ifcat#1a% - `#1 - \else\ifcat#1+% - `#1 - \else\ifx\char#1 - \else - #1% - \fi\fi\fi -} -\let\then=\iffalse -\def\ifcap#1\then{\expandafter\ifcapnum\code{#1}\then} -\def\ifcapnum#1\then{\ifnum\lccode#1=#1} -\def\iflower#1\then{\expandafter\iflowernum\code{#1}\then} -\def\iflowernum#1\then{\ifnum\uccode#1=#1} -\def\fontslant#1{\expandafter\stripPT\the\fontdimen1#1} -\begingroup \uccode`2=`p \uccode`3=`t \uppercase{\toksa{\endgroup - \def\\#123{#1} -}} \the\toksa -\let\stripPT=\\ -\def\putxy#1#2#3{\leavevmode\rlap{\hskip#1\raise#2\hbox{#3}}} -\def\putmarkxy#1#2#3#4{{% - \setbox0=\hbox{#4}#2\relax - \dimenb#1\wd0 \advance\dimenb\fontslant\font\dimena - \leavevmode - \putxy{\dimenb}{\dimena}{\hbox to 0pt{\hss\char#3\hss}}% - \box0 -}} -\def\putmarky{\putmarkxy{0.5}} -\def\typeImark#1#2{{% - \setbox2=\hbox{#2}% - \ifdim \ht2=1ex - \accent#1\relax#2% - \else - \counta\code{#2}% - \ifnum\counta>64 \ifnum\counta<96 - \advance\counta 128 - \fi \fi - \putmarky{\dimena0.5\ht0 \advance\dimena-0.5ex } - {#1}{\char\counta}% - \fi -}} -\chardef\dotglyph22 \def\.{\typeImark\dotglyph} -\chardef\twodotsglyph23 \def\"{\typeImark\twodotsglyph} -\chardef\macronglyph150 \def\={\typeImark\macronglyph} -\chardef\longmacronglyph151 - \def\longmacronmark{\typeImark\longmacronglyph} -\def\typeIImark#1#2{{% - \counta#1\relax \countb\code{#2}% - \ifcap{#2}\then - \ifnum \counta<128 \advance\counta 128 \fi - \ifnum \countb<128 \advance\countb 128 \fi - \fi - \accent\counta \char\countb -}} -\chardef\acuteglyph8 \def\'{\typeIImark\acuteglyph} -\chardef\graveglyph9 \def\`{\typeIImark\graveglyph} -\chardef\circumglyph10 \def\^{\typeIImark\circumglyph} -\chardef\tildeglyph11 \def\~{\typeIImark\tildeglyph} -\chardef\ringglyph12 \def\ringmark{\typeIImark\ringglyph} -\chardef\caronglyph13 \def\v{\typeIImark\caronglyph} -\chardef\breveglyph14 \def\u{\typeIImark\breveglyph} -\chardef\hungarglyph15 \def\H{\typeIImark\hungarglyph} -\def\cedillalike#1#2#3{{% - \setbox0=\hbox{#3}% - \ifdim\ht0>1ex - \ooalign{\hidewidth\char#2\relax\hidewidth\crcr\unhbox0 }% - \else - \accent#1 #3% - \fi -}} -\chardef\cedillaglyph6 \chardef\Cedillaglyph134 -\def\c{\cedillalike\cedillaglyph\Cedillaglyph} -\chardef\ogonekglyph7 \chardef\Ogonekglyph135 -\def\k{\cedillalike\ogonekglyph\Ogonekglyph} -\chardef\TH"00 \chardef\th"10 \chardef\DH"04 \chardef\dh"14 -\chardef\A "01 \chardef\a "11 \chardef\E "05 \chardef\e "15 -\chardef\NG"02 \chardef\ng"12 \chardef\L "03 \chardef\l "13 -\chardef\AE"5E \chardef\ae"7E \chardef\OE"5F \chardef\oe"7F -\chardef\O "5C \chardef\o "7C -\chardef\vd"9C \chardef\vt"9D \chardef\h "9E \chardef\vl"9F -\chardef\ss"18 \chardef\i "19 \chardef\j "1A -\def\aa{\ringmark a} \def\AA{\ringmark A} -\chardef\orda"98 \chardef\ordo"99 \def\No{N\ordo} \def\no{n\ordo} -\chardef\csuperior"98 \def\Mc{M\csuperior} -\chardef\trademark "22 -\chardef\copyright "FB \chardef\registered"FD -\chardef\careof "9A \chardef\Box "A0 -\chardef\cents "A2 \chardef\pounds "A3 -\chardef\currency "A4 \chardef\permille "A5 -\chardef\yen "A8 \chardef\florin "A9 -\chardef\dag "AA \chardef\ddag "AB -\chardef\gbdecimal "AE \chardef\minus "AF -\chardef\S "BA \chardef\P "BB -\chardef\degrees "C0 -\chardef\lguillemet"BC \chardef\rguillemet"BE -\mathcode`\,"602C \mathcode`\-"20AF -\mathcode`\."002E \mathcode`\/"002F -\mathchardef\bullet "2020 \mathchardef\times "20A6 -\mathchardef\backslash"005B \mathchardef\setminus "205B -\mathchardef\cdot "20AE \mathchardef\cdotp "60AE -\def\langle{\delimiter"40DB30A } \delcode`\<"0DB30A -\def\rangle{\delimiter"50DD30B } \delcode`\>"0DD30B -\def\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308 } \let\{\lbrace \mathcode`\{"407B -\def\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309 } \let\}\rbrace \mathcode`\}"407D -\uccode\th\TH \lccode\TH\th \uccode\TH\TH \lccode\th\th -\uccode\a \A \lccode\A \a \uccode\A \A \lccode\a \a -\uccode\ng\NG \lccode\NG\ng \uccode\NG\NG \lccode\ng\ng -\uccode\l \L \lccode\L \l \uccode\L \L \lccode\l \l -\uccode\dh\DH \lccode\DH\dh \uccode\DH\DH \lccode\dh\dh -\uccode\e \E \lccode\E \e \uccode\E \E \lccode\e \e -\uccode\o \O \lccode\O \o \uccode\O \O \lccode\o \o -\uccode\ae\AE \lccode\AE\ae \uccode\AE\AE \lccode\ae\ae -\uccode\oe\OE \lccode\OE\oe \uccode\OE\OE \lccode\oe\oe -\uccode\i`I \uccode\j`J \lccode\i\i \lccode\j\j -\uccode\csuperior`C -\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{% - \counta#2\relax \countb#3\relax \countc#4\relax - \loop - \ifnum\countc>0 - #1\counta\countb - \advance\counta 1 - \advance\countb 1 - \advance\countc-1 - \repeat -} -\changecodes\uccode{"E1}{`A}{26} -\changecodes\uccode{"C1}{"C1}{26} -\changecodes\lccode{"E1}{"E1}{26} -\changecodes\lccode{"C1}{`a}{26} -\changecodes\lccode{"B0}{`0}{10} -\changecodes\uccode{`0}{"B0}{10} -\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26} -\changecodes\mathcode{`A}{"7441}{26} -\changecodes\mathcode{`0}{"70B0}{10} -\def\capspecials#1#2{% - \chardef\TH"#10 \chardef\A "#11 \chardef\NG"#12 - \chardef\L "#13 \chardef\DH"#14 \chardef\E "#15 - \chardef\O "#2C \chardef\AE"#2E \chardef\OE"#2F -} -\def\lcspecials#1#2#3{% - \chardef\th"#10 \chardef\a "#11 \chardef\ng"#12 - \chardef\l "#13 \chardef\dh"#14 \chardef\e "#15 - \chardef\o "#2C \chardef\ae"#2E \chardef\oe"#2F - \def\ss{\char"#23 \char"#23 }\chardef\i"#39 \chardef\j"#3A -} -\def\sc#1{{% - \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"E1}{26}\capspecials9F\lowercase{#1}% -}} -\def\mc#1{{% - \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"C1}{26}\capspecials8D\lowercase{#1}% -}} -\def\csc#1{{% - \changecodes\uccode{`a}{"E1}{26}\lcspecials9FE\uppercase{#1}% -}} -\def\allcaps#1{{% - \lcspecials054\uppercase{#1}% -}} -\def\alllc#1{{% - \capspecials17\lowercase{#1}% -}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 71f2dd83cfe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,231 +0,0 @@ -% magrmac.dtx -- documentation and source for magrmac.tex -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "MAGRMAC.TEX -- Malvern Greek Macros", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 1.3 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/29 16:32:24 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX definitions file magrmac.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ magrmac.dtx -%{{{ preamble - -\relax -\input pdccode - -\document -\rcs$Id: magrmac.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/29 16:32:24 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\codefile{magrmac.tex} - -%}}} preamble -%{{{ introduction -\author{P. Dmaian Cugley} -\title{MAGRMAC---Malvern Greek Macros} - -\section{Introduction} - - This document describes |magrmac.tex|, a small file of macros - for setting Greek with Malvern~G fonts. `Malvern~G' is the name - of an encoding for typesetting Greek texts. Malvern - release~$1{\cdot}2$ has a collection of fonts ({\tt - ma$XX$g$YY$}) which use this encoding. The Levy and Dryllerakis - fonts should work to an extent. - - The conventions for Malvern Greek text files are intended to be - similar to those for K.~J.\ Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\ (the - `|kd|-' fonts), and will be most useful on computers where the - operating system uses latin letters (as opposed to those which - can display Greek letters on the screen). - - There is a brief guide for |magrmac.tex| called |magrman.tex|. -\notepar - These macros are not necessarily in final form and are not - intended to be supported. Use them at your own risk. -\endnotepar - - The document you are reading is a plain \TeX\ file called - |magrmac.dtx|. This `documented \TeX\ macros'\footnote*{The - suffix |dtx| is the same as files used to simlar effect in the - \LaTeX~2e distribution.} file produces the file `|magrmac.tex|' - in the current directory, in addition to the usual |dvi| file. - The code lines in the printed documentation are identical to - those in the macros file. - -%}}} introduction -%{{{ file identification -\section{File identification} - - Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the - file, for the benefit of people wondering what the file is for. - -\code - \|\% magrmac.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Malvern Greek Macros - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, Malvern, Greek, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "Macros for using Malvern Greek fonts. - |%%% This file was generated by running - |%%% plain TeX on magrmac.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - |%%% Distribute magrmac.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%%} - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\} - | -\endcode -%}}} file identification -%{{{ greek mode -\section{Greek Mode} - - The Greek Mode is started with |\begingreek| for compatibility - with the precedent of Greek\TeX\ and Levy's original Greek - macros.\footnote*{The conventions of PDCFMT2 would suggest - |\greek|\dots|\endgreek| but (besides being incompatible with - existing Greek macros) it is probable that the hyphenation table - code (|\language| code) for Greek would be called |\greek|, - based on the names I~have seen used.} - - The token register |\everygreek| is expanded each time we enter - Greek mode. At a minimum it should contain a command to select - an appropriate Greek font. -\code - |\newtoks\everygreek - |\chardef\other=12 -\smallbreak - |\def\begingreek{% - | \begingroup - | \catcode`\~\other \catcode`\|\other \catcode`\"\other - | \the\everygreek - |} -\smallbreak - |\let\endgreek=\endgroup -\endcode -%}}} greek mode -\section{Customization} -%{{{ lunate sigma, curly phi - -\subsec{Lunate sigma} - - The macro |\grlunatesigma| belongs in |\everygreek|. It makes - |s| an active char expanding to |c|. A certain amount of - jiggery-pokery is required because making |s| active makes it - impossible to use the name |\grlunatesigma|! - -\code - |\toksdef\toksa=0 -\smallbreak - |\begingroup \let\\=\toksa \catcode`\s=13 \catcode`\S=13 \\={\endgroup - | \def\tmp{% - | \catcode`\s\active \chardef s`c - | \catcode`\S\active \chardef S`C - | } - |}\the\\ - |\let\grlunatesigma=\tmp -\endcode - -\subsec{Variant phi} - - In the end I~make the two-stroke phi $\phi$ the default one, - with $\varphi$ as the `variant', for compatibility with plain - \TeX. -\code - |\chardef\ninetytwo=92 -\smallbreak - |\begingroup \uccode`\~=`f \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup - | \def\grvarphi{% - | \catcode`\f\active \chardef~\ninetytwo - | } - |}} \the\toksa -\endcode -%}}} lunate sigma -%{{{ accent - -\subsec{One-accent Greek} - - The |\monotonik| macro makes all the accent characters generate - the modern symmetrical accent, while the breathings and iota - subscript do nothing. -\code - |\begingroup \catcode`\<=\active \catcode`\>=\active - | \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active \toksa={\endgroup - | \def\monotoniko{% - | \catcode\lq\'\active \chardef'3 - | \catcode\lq\`\active \chardef`3 - | \catcode\lq\~\active \chardef~3 - | \catcode\lq\<\active \let<\relax - | \catcode\lq\>\active \let>\relax - | \catcode\lq\|\active \let|\relax - | } - |}\the\toksa -\smallbreak - |\def\plutoniko{% - | \catcode`\'\other \catcode`\`\other \catcode`\~\other - | \catcode`\<\other \catcode`\>\other \catcode`\|\other - |} -\endcode -%}}} accent -%{{{ define delims - -\subsec{Choose shorthand delimiters for Greek Mode} - - Define |#1| to be a `greek shift' in the way |$| is a maths - shift. Like |$|, |#1| will stand for either |\begingreek| or - |\endgreek| as required. |#1| must be a one-character control - sequence (as might be used after |`|). -\code - |\def\grdelimiter#1{ - | \begingroup \uccode`~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup - | \def~{\begingreek \let~\endgreek} - | }} \the\toksa - |} -\endcode - -%}}} define delims -\endcodefile -\enddocument -\bye -%}}} macros for greek - -% Local variables: -% fold-folded-p: t -% tex-macros-p: t -% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex deleted file mode 100644 index eebec3bdfac..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -% magrmac.tex 1.3 1995/03/29 -- Malvern Greek Macros -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex", -%%% version = "1.3", -%%% date = "1995/03/29", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, Malvern, Greek, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Macros for using Malvern Greek fonts. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on magrmac.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute magrmac.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%%} - -\message{1.3 1995/03/29} - -\newtoks\everygreek -\chardef\other=12 -\def\begingreek{% - \begingroup - \catcode`\~\other \catcode`\|\other \catcode`\"\other - \the\everygreek -} -\let\endgreek=\endgroup -\toksdef\toksa=0 -\begingroup \let\\=\toksa \catcode`\s=13 \catcode`\S=13 \\={\endgroup - \def\tmp{% - \catcode`\s\active \chardef s`c - \catcode`\S\active \chardef S`C - } -}\the\\ -\let\grlunatesigma=\tmp -\chardef\ninetytwo=92 -\begingroup \uccode`\~=`f \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup - \def\grvarphi{% - \catcode`\f\active \chardef~\ninetytwo - } -}} \the\toksa -\begingroup \catcode`\<=\active \catcode`\>=\active - \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active \toksa={\endgroup - \def\monotoniko{% - \catcode\lq\'\active \chardef'3 - \catcode\lq\`\active \chardef`3 - \catcode\lq\~\active \chardef~3 - \catcode\lq\<\active \let<\relax - \catcode\lq\>\active \let>\relax - \catcode\lq\|\active \let|\relax - } -}\the\toksa -\def\plutoniko{% - \catcode`\'\other \catcode`\`\other \catcode`\~\other - \catcode`\<\other \catcode`\>\other \catcode`\|\other -} -\def\grdelimiter#1{ - \begingroup \uccode`~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup - \def~{\begingreek \let~\endgreek} - }} \the\toksa -} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 5e746d36fa8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,604 +0,0 @@ -% magman.tex -- info about Malvern Greek. -%{{{ Malvern Greek manual -%{{{ preamble - -\errorcontextlines=1000 -\input pdccmlft -\input magrmac - -\font\notegr=ma55g9 -\font\bodygr=ma55g11 -\font\biggr=ma55g24 % used in sample -\font\gri=ma56g11 % used in sample - -\toksa=\expandafter{\STYbodyT} -\edef\STYbodyT{\the\toksa\noexpand\f{gr}{ma55g}} - -\bodyfonts - -\everygreek{\gr \baselineskip=14pt} - -\grdelimiter\* % * is already an active char -+\defverbatim\_+ % | is often used in examples - -\majorheadline{Typesetting Greek using Malvern fonts} - -%{{{ font tables - -%% Code to typeset a font table -- lifted from my testfont.tex - -\newcount\tableN -\newcount\hexcount -\def\hexdigit#1{\ifcase#1\relax 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or - 8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi} - -\def\ntablecr -{% - \cr - \noalign{\nointerlineskip} - \multispan2\hfill &\multispan{33}\hrulefill -} -\def\ntable -{ - \medskip - \begingroup \openup1\jot - \def\\{\char\tableN \global\advance\tableN 1} - \def\0##1{&\omit&\sevenrm##1} - \halign to \hsize - {% - \chartstrut\hss##\tabskip=0pt plus 10pt & - &\hss##\hss&##\vrule\cr - \lower 6.5pt\null - &\00\01\02\03\04\05\06\07\08\09\0A\0B\0C\0D\0E\0F - \ntablecr - \global\tableN=0 - \ntablelines - \crcr - } - \medbreak - \endgroup -} - -\def\ntablelines -{% - \ifnum\tableN<256 - \let\next\ntablecontinuation - \else - \let\next\relax - \fi - \next -} - -\newcount\ntabtmp - -\def\ntablecontinuation -{% - % Find out if none of this row are defined by making a horizontal - % list of all of them preceeded by a penalty of 1; if any of them - % are defined then \lastpenalty will be something other than 1: - \setbox0=\hbox{\penalty1 - \def~{\char\tableN \advance\tableN 1}% - ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\global\ntabtmp=\lastpenalty}% - % Now set the row in the table iff ntabtmp # 1: - \ifnum\ntabtmp=1 - \global\advance\tableN 16 \let\next=\ntablelines - \else - \let\next=\ntablecontinuationcontinuation - \fi - \next -} - -\def\ntablecontinuationcontinuation -{% - \cr - \noalign{\nointerlineskip \penalty5000 } - & \hexcount=\tableN \divide\hexcount16 \sevenrm\hexdigit\hexcount - &&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\& - \ntablecr - \ntablelines -} - -\def\chartstrut{\lower 0.25\baselineskip \vbox to \baselineskip{}} - -%}}} font tables -%{{{ two-column quotations - -\def\twocolgr{ - \smallskip - \beginthe{twocolgr} - \setbox0=\vbox\bgroup - \hsize=\bodywd \advance\hsize-\colsep \divide\hsize by 2 - \begingreek \strut \ignorespaces -} -\def\endtwocolgr{% - \par\endgreek \egroup - \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{ - \hrule\smallskip - \hbox to \bodywd{\rigidbalance{0}{2}{\ht\strutbox}{\hfil}} - \smallskip\hrule - } - \smallbreak - \endthe{twocolgr} -} -%}}} two-column quotations -%}}} preamble -%{{{ bibliography - -\def\TB{{\it TUGboat}} - -\counta=0 -\newtoks\bibliography -\newcount\bibcount - -\def\FAQnote -{% - \par {\bf Note on FAQs}\quad An FAQ is an electronic document, posted - regularly to a USENET newsgroup, usually in the form of a list of - answers to frequently asked questions. Many FAQs are available on - the archive site |pit-manager.mit.edu| (alias |rtfm.mit.edu|) - [18.172.1.27] in the directory |pub/usenet/news.answers|. The - reference gives the name of the compiler, the title, the - last-modified date (in lieu of an edition or version number) and - name under which the FAQ is archived appears in parentheses. - \par -} - -\def\bibdef#1#2% -{ - \expcs\edef{cite#1}% - {% - \noexpand\docite\noexpcs{cite#1}\noexpcs{refer#1}% - } - \toks0={#2} - \expcs\edef{refer#1}{\noexpand\bibitem{\expcs\noexpand{cite#1}} - \the\toks0} -} -\def\docite#1#2% -{% - \global\advance\bibcount1 - \global\bibliography=\expandafter - {\the\bibliography #2}% - \global\edef#1% - {[\the\bibcount]}#1% -} - -\bibdef{Allen} -{ - W. Sidney Allen, {\it Vox Graeca: A Guide to Pronunciation of Classical - Greek}, 3rd Ed.\ (Cambridge University Press, 1987), - pp.\thinspace177--179. -} - -\bibdef{KD} -{ - K.~J. Dryllerakis (|kd@doc.ic.ac.uk|), {\it Typesetting Greek Texts with - Greek\TeX}, Greek\TeX~3.1 (also known as KDGreek) (CTAN - |fonts/greek/kd|). -} - -\bibdef{FAQ} -{ - Nikolaos Fotis (ed.), {\it soc.culture.greek} FAQ -- - Linguistics ({\tt greek-\penalty\exhyphenpenalty faq\slash - linguistics}, 1993/03/06). -} - -\bibdef{Yannis} -{ - Yannis Haralambous and Klaus Thull, Typesetting Modern Greek with 128 - Character Codes, \TB\/ 10 (1989), pp.\thinspace354--359 (CTAN - |fonts/greek/yannis|). -} - -\bibdef{Harts} -{ - Horace Hart, {\it Hart's Rules for Compositors and Readers at the - University Press, Oxford}, 39th Edition, revised (Oxford - University Press, 1989), pp.\thinspace111--116. -} - -\bibdef{Levy} -{ - Silvio Levy, Using Greek Fonts with \TeX, \TB\/ 9 (1988), - pp.\thinspace20--24 (CTAN |fonts/greek/levy|). -} - -\bibdef{COD} -{ - {\it The Concise Oxford Dictionary of Current English}, 8th Ed. - (Oxford University Press, 1990), p.\thinspace1453. -} - -\def\bibitem#1% -{% - \smallskip - \indent \llap{#1\hskip1pc}\ignorespaces -} - - -%}}} bibliography - -\twosidedtrue - -\noheadlinetrue -\majorheadline{Typesetting Greek using Malvern fonts} -\leftline{\headingfonts \the\majorheadline} -\bigskip -\leftline{P. Damian Cugley} -\leftline{Oxford University Computing Laboratory} -\leftline{(|Damian.Cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk|)} -\leftline{April 1993} -\bigskip - -\noindent - Malvern is a sanserif font family, implemented in \MF. This - document describes Malvern encoding~G (the Greek alphabet). - -\section{Using Malvern G} - - Because most latin-alphabet languages require additional composite - letter glyphs to be properly typeset by \TeX, most Malvern fonts - will be used as the raw material for composite fonts. In contrast, - the Malvern Greek font can be used directly to typeset Greek, both - with the old accent-and-breathing systems and the newer (post-1974) - one-accent system. It follows the conventions of Silvio Levy's - original |gr| family \citeLevy\ and K.~J. Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\ - (|kd| fonts) \citeKD. It is almost compatible with the reduced - Greek fonts (|rgr| and |mrgr| families) described by Yannis - Haralambous and Karl Thull \citeYannis. - -%{{{ typesetting - -\section{Macro file} - - The file |magrmac.tex| has some macros for setting texts in plain - \TeX. A future production release may instead work as an option or - extension of Greek\TeX, with the objective of making it possible to - switch an existing document to Malvern without much editing. - - Greek text is set within a \dfn{Greek mode}, delimited by macros - |\begingreek| and |\endgreek|. Each time Greek mode is entered, the - contents of the token register |\everygreek| is scanned first. - Since |magrmac| does {\it not} load a particular font by default, a - manuscript using |magrmac| will want to include an assignment like -\display - |\everygreek={\greekfont}|\cr - |\catcode`\*=\active \grdelimiter\*| -\enddisplay - where |\greekfont| has been bound to some Greek font or another such - as |ma55g12|. The macro |\grdelimiter| takes one parameter, an - active character (represented by a one-character control sequence), - and makes that character into a self-matching delimiter for Greek - mode (like |$|--|$| works for mathematics mode). Thus, `|*This is - Greek*|' produces `*This is Greek*'. - -\section{The alphabet} - - The letters are transliterated as - follows: -\table \hfil#\hfil&&\enspace\hfil#\hfil\cr - \gr a&\gr b&\gr g&\gr d&\gr e&\gr z&\gr h&\gr j&\gr i&\gr k&\gr - l&\gr m&\gr n&\gr x&\gr o&\gr p&\gr r&\gr ss&\gr c&\gr t&\gr - u&\gr f&\gr v& \gr q&\gr y&\gr w\cr - \tt a&\tt b&\tt g&\tt d&\tt e&\tt z&\tt h&\tt j&\tt i&\tt k&\tt - l&\tt m&\tt n&\tt x&\tt o&\tt p&\tt r&\tt s&\tt c&\tt t&\tt u&\tt - f&\tt v& \tt q&\tt y&\tt w\cr -\noalign{\smallskip}% - \gr A&\gr B&\gr G&\gr D&\gr E&\gr Z&\gr H&\gr J&\gr I&\gr K&\gr - L&\gr M&\gr N&\gr X&\gr O&\gr P&\gr R&\gr S&\gr C&\gr T&\gr - U&\gr F&\gr V& \gr Q&\gr Y&\gr W\cr - \tt A&\tt B&\tt G&\tt D&\tt E&\tt Z&\tt H&\tt J&\tt I&\tt K&\tt - L&\tt M&\tt N&\tt X&\tt O&\tt P&\tt R&\tt S&\tt C&\tt T&\tt U&\tt - F&\tt V& \tt Q&\tt Y&\tt W\cr -\endtable - The letter *C c* is \dfn{lunate sigma} (see below). The letter *V v* - is \dfn{digamma} (wau). I~put it next to *f* because I~don't know - where it belongs in the alphabet. - - A lower case sigma `*s@*' at the end of a word (or followed by - punctuation) is automatically changed to the final form `*s*' - through \TeX's ligature mechanism.\note{Occasionally \TeX's notion - of word boundaries causes the wrong glyph to appear. There are two - special invisible glyphs that can be used to control this in obscure - circumstances. The so-called \dfn{compound word mark} (or cwm) acts - as a word-boundary in the middle of a word. It has code~32, so - `|as^^`a|' produces `*as^^`a*', for example. The \dfn{null glyph} - is invisible, but, because it is not a boundary character, it can be - used to prevent a ligature with a following word boundary. It has - code 64, so `|as@|' produces `*as@*'.} - -\section{Composite letters} - - The marks that go above the letters are obtained with the - following characters, which go before the letter: -\table \gr#\hfil&\quad#\hfil&\quad #\hfil& \quad *#*\hfil\cr -\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1\jot}% - \omit Mark\hfil&\omit\quad Char\hfil& - Name&\omit\quad Name in \citeYannis\hfil\cr -\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule \vskip\jot} - <@& |<|& asper (rough, = h)& dase'ia\cr - >@& |>|& lenis (smooth)& yil'h\cr - "@& |"| (double quote)& - diaeresis& dialutik'a\cr - '@& |'| (quote)& - acute accent& >oxe'ia\cr - `@& |`|& grave accent& bare'ia\cr - \char126 @& |~|& circumflex& perispwm'enh\cr -\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule height 1pt\smallskip}% -\endtable - A breathing or diaeresis can be combined with an accent, thus - `|<~a|' for *<~a*, `|>'e|' for *>'e*. - - - The vowels *a*, *h* and *w* may have an iota beneath them, called - `subscript': *a|*, *h|*, *w|*. These are produced with a vertical - bar `_|_' after the letter in Greek mode: `_a|_' makes - *a|*, `_<a|_' makes `*<a|*', and so on. - - - As an example: `*>en >arq~h| >~hn <o l'ogos*' is generated with `_>en - >arq~h| >~hn <o l'ogos_'. - -% In old-style Greek, all vowels beginning a word require a breathing -% -- but *u* may only have an asper (rough). In diphthongs (*ai*, -% *ei*, *oi*, *ui*, *au*, *eu*, *hu*, *ou*, *wu*), breathings and -% accents stand over the second letter: *a<i*, *o>u*. Double *rr* -% used to be written *>r<r*. - -%\section{Apostrophe (sign of elision)} - -% The lenis is also used like an apostrophe, to mark the elision of -% vowels at the end of a word when the next word starts with a vowel. -% The Malvern-G fonts, like the Levy-derived fonts, also has a -% separate apostrophe glyph, which can be set with `|''|' (two quote -% characters) or `|'|' (one quote) at the end of a word. Thus you -% have a choice of `|d>|' or `|d'|' (*d>* or *d'*). - - -\section{Punctuation} - - Here's a table of correspondences for punctuation: -\table \hfil#\hfil&&\enspace\hfil#\hfil\cr - *.*&*,*&*;*&*:*&*!*&*?*&*''*&*((*&*))*\cr - |.|&|,|&|;|&|:|&|!|&|?|&|''|&|((|&|))|\cr -\endtable - The apostrophe is also generated by a single single-quote at the end - of a word: `*d'*' can be generated by `|d'|'. There are also - digits, parentheses, brackets, hyphen, dashes, slash, per cent sign, - asterisk, plus and equals signs. - -\section{One-accent Greek} - - The easiest way to write modern Greek is simply to use |'| for the - accent and otherwise to use |\begingreek|--|\endgreek| as before: - `*en arq'h hn o l'ogos*' is generated with `|en arq'h hn o l'ogos|'. - - Malvern also has glyphs for a symmetrical accent (*\char3*) and - composite letters (such as *\char3 a*, *"\char3u*). The macro - |\monotoniko|\note{This macro is so named for compatibility with the - |rgr|/|mrgr| macros \citeYannis. It might usefully go in - |\everygreek|.} in Greek mode makes |'| an active character, - expanding to the symmetrical accent. Then `|En'w|' produces - `*En\char3w*'. In fact, the other accent characters |`| and |~| are - also made to substitute `*\char3*', and |<|, |>| and _|_ expand to - the null glyph, so that a text with all the breathings and accents - and be hacked into almost-correct one-accent Greek.\note{Again, for - compatibility with the |rgr|/|mrgr| macros. Because monosyllables - should not have accents at all in one-accent Greek, a complete - conversion from old-style to new-style requires changes to the - manuscript anyway, so the usefulness of this feature is debatable!} - For example, `_>En~w|_' becomes `*\monotoniko >En~w|*'. - -\section{Variant glyphs} - - Sigma has a variant called lunate sigma, written *Cc*. These - letters can be obtained directly (produced by the character `|c|' in - the manuscript). So that a given text can be switched between the - two styles, there is also a macro |\grlunatesigma|, which redefines - `|s|' is as active character equivalent to `|c|'. Obviously this is - only useful when Greek mode is only used for plain texts, since it - prevents `|s|' from being used in control sequence names. - - Similarly, there are two ways to write lower case phi: *f* and - *\char92 * (`|f|' and glyph~92). There is no difference in meaning - between *f* and *\char92 *; the choice of one or the other is only - made on aesthetic grounds. The macro |\grvarphi| redefines `|f|' as - an active character equivalent to `*\char92 *', in effect replacing - *f* with *\char92 *. - - Normally these macros, if used, will go in |\everygreek|. - -%}}} typesetting -\iffalse -%{{{ background -\section{Background} - - This section is optional reading. - -\subsection{Development of the Levy-derived font families} - - Silvio Levy's |gr| fonts \citeLevy\ used the \TeX~2 ligature system - to make *s* become *s@* when followed by a letter, and had glyphs - for almost all the composite letters. - - Yannis Haralambous and Klaus Thull created a set of reduced - (128-glyph) fonts, for \TeX\ systems still unable to manage - 256-glyph fonts \citeYannis. These fonts (the |rgr| and |mrgr| - families) still used Levy's character programs. Because they could - not include glyphs for all the composite letters, many composite - letters had to be obtained with macros rather than ligatures. The - |mrgr| family is for new-style (one-accent) Greek. - - Finally K.~J. Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\ package (also called KDGreek) - \citeKD\ uses the Levy character programs again, but takes advantage - of the new ligature features of \TeX~3 to make *s@* become *s* - (without needing compound glyphs for every combination of *s@* with - a letter). The fonts are given names starting with |kd|. - Greek\TeX\ also includes format files for plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX, - transliteration programs and other useful things. - -\subsection{Designing Greek letters for Malvern} - - My Malvern-G encoding is intended to be `ligature-compatible' with - Levy's and Dryllerakis's, meaning that `|<'a|||' will produce - `*<'a|*' in each of them, even though this is glyph~141 in - |grreg10|, 201 in |kdgr10| and some random number in |ma55g10|. The - punctuation characters have the same encoding. - - Designing a sanserif Greek lower case alphabet (*alfabet*?) is tricky - because the lower case letters have a very cursive style, as if - hand-drawn with a brush by a scribe in a hurry -- which is pretty - much the opposite of most sanserif styles. I~made sketches (on - paper) of Greek letters forced into the same sorts of shapes as - other Malvern letters, and the results were uniformly horrid. The - original idea of Malvern was to make a humanist/geometric hybrid, so - I tried approaching it from the from the humanist end this time. - -%}}} background -\fi -%{{{ references - -\section{References} - - Since I don't speak a word of Greek -- the only word I know is - *barbaroi* and I don't know how to spell it -- I have relied on - reading between the lines of the documentation for other systems for - typesetting Greek, including Hart's Rules \citeHarts. - - CTAN is the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network, a collection of FTP - sites (such as |ftp.tex.ac.uk|, under directory |tex-archive|). - -\beginthe{bib} \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt - \the\bibliography - \par -\endthe{bib} - -%}}} postamble - -%{{{ samples - -\section{Examples of text in Malvern 55 and 56} - -\iffalse - This quotation is used by Haralambous and Thull \citeYannis\ as an - example of the old-style accent-and-breathing system: -%{{{ Popess Johanna - -\begin twocolgr - >En~w| <esp'eran tin`a >exantl'hsas t`a murol'ogi'a tou - >ekoim~ato <o Froum'entios >ep`i t~hs >'ammou t~hs paral'ias, - katab`as >ex o>uran~wn <o >ap'ostolos >eke~inos t~wn Sax'onwn - >'hnoixe di`a maqa'iras t`a st'hjh to~u koimwm'enou, - e>is'hgage to`us <iero`us dakt'ulous tou e>is t`hn >op`hn kai - >exag`wn t`hn kard`ian >eb'ujisen a>ut'hn e>is l'akkon pl'hrh - <'udatos, <'oper <hg'iasen prohgoum'enws. <H fl'egousa - >eke'inh kard'ia >'efrizen e>is t`o <'udwr <ws smap`is >ent`os - to~u thgan'iou, >afo~u d`e >ekr'uwsen, >'ejese p'alin a>ut`hn - <o <'agios e<is t`on t'opon ths ka`i kle'isas t`hn plhg`hn - >ep'estreyen e>is t`on >idik'on tou. - - >'Etuq'e pote, >anagn~wst'a mou, n`a >apokoimhj~h|s m`e - >anup'oforon b~hqa, koim'wmenos n`a <idr'wsh|s ka`i >exupn'hsas - n`a e<urej~h|s >iatreum'enos? >Agn~wn <'oti e>~isai - kal`a >ano'igeis mhqanik~ws t`o st'oma, <'ina plhr'wsh|s e>is - t`on >epikat'araton b~hqa t`on sun'hjh f'oron. >All`a - p'oshn a>isj'anesai qar'an, m`h e<ur'iskwn e>is t`on l'arugga - t`o >oqlhp`on jhr'ion! O<'utw <'ama >'hnoixe ka`i <o - Froum'entios to`us >ofjalmo'us, <htoim'asjn n`a prosf'erh| - e>is t`hn >aq'ariston >Iw'annan t`hn sun'hjh dakr'uwn - spond'hn, >all`a par`a p~asan prosdok'ian o<i >ofjalmo'i - tou e<ur'ejhsan xhro`i ka'i n`a progeumat'ish| m~allon >`h - n`a kla'ush| >h|sj'aneto >'orexin met`a polu'hmeron nhste'ian - <o kal`os Benedekt~inos. -\end twocolgr -\rightline{\csc{Emmanouil Ro\"{\i}dis}, `The Popess Johanna (1896)'} -\vskip 0pt plus \baselineskip - -%}}} Popess Johanna -\fi - - The following paragraph is set in 11-point Malvern~55 (11-point - Malvern has comprable x-height to 12-point Computer Modern). This - quotation is used as one of the examples in Levy's article - \citeLevy: -\twocolgr - >All' >ako'usontai, >enper e>~u dok~h|s l'egein. t'ode d'e sou - >ene'ohsa <'ama l'egontos, ka`i pr`os >emaut`on skop~w; e>i <'oti - m'alist'a me E>uj'ufrwn did'axeien, <ws o<i jeo`i <'apantes t`on - toio~uton j'anaton <hgo~untai >'adikon e>~inai, t'i m~allon >eg`w - mem'ajhka par' E>uj'ufronos, t'i pot' >est`in t`o <'osi'on te ka`i - t`o >an'osion? jeomis`es m`en g`ar to~uto t`o >'epgon, <ws - >'eoiken, e>'in >'an; >all`a g`ar o>u to'utw| >ef'anh >'arti - <wrism'ena t`o <'osion ka`i m'h; t`o g`ar jeomis`es >`on ka`i - jeofil`es >ef'anh. <wste to'utou m`en >af'ihm'i se, >~w E>uj'ufron; - e>i bo'ulei, p'antes a>ut`o <hge'isjwn jeo`i >'adikon ka`i p'antes - miso'untwn. >all' >~ara to~uto n~un >epanorj'wmeja >en t~w| l'ogw|, - <ws <`o m`en p'antes o<i jeo`i mis~wsin, >an'osi'on >estin, <`o d' - >`an fil~wsin, <`osion; <`o d' >`an o<i m`en fil~wsin, o<i d`e - mis~wsin, o>ud'etera >`h amf'otera? >~ar' o<'utw bo'ulei <hm~in - <wr'isjai n~un per`i to~u <os'iou ka`i to~u >anos'iou? -\endtwocolgr - \rightline{Plato, `Euthyphro'} -\vskip 1\medskipamount plus \baselineskip - - - This quotation (similarly stolen) is in Malvern~56 and has - |\grvarphi| and |\grlunatesigma| in effect: - -\twocolgr \gri \grvarphi \grlunatesigma - T`h stigm`h to'uth ni'wjw p'oso bar'u ''nai t`o must'hrio t~hs - xomol'oghshs. <Ws t'wra, kane`is d`en x'erei p~ws p'erasa t`a du`o - qr'onia mou st`o <'Agion >'Oros. O<i f'iloi mou jarro~un p`ws p~hga - n`a d~w buzantin`a kon'ismata >`h >ap`o mustikop'ajeia n`a z'hsw - mi`a perasm'enh >epoq'h. Ka`i t'wra, n'a, ntr'epomai n`a mil'hsw. - - P~ws n`a t`o p~w? Jumo~umai <'ena >anoixi'atiko deilin'o, po`u - kat'ebaina t`on Ta"'ugeto, mi`a xafnik`h j'uella m`e k'uklwse kont`a - sto'us Pentaulo'us. T'oso fober`os >anemos'ifounas, po`u >'epesa - katag~hs gi`a n`a m`hn gkremist~w. O<i >astrap`es m' >'exwsan - <olo~uje ki >'ekleisa t`a m'atia m`hn tuflwj~w, ka`i kat'aqama, - p'istoma, per'imena. <'Olo t`o pan'uyhlo boun`o >'etreme, ka`i du`o - >'elata d'ipla mou tsak'isthkan >ap' t`h m'esh ka`i br'onthxan - q'amou. >'Eniwja t`o jei'afi to~u kerauno~u st`on >a'era, ka`i - xafnik`a x'espase <h mp'ora, >'epesen <o >'anemos, ka`i qontr'es, - jerm'es st'ales broq`h qt'uphsan t`a dentr`a ka`i t`o q~wma. T`o - jum'ari, <h jro'umpa, t`o fask'omhlo, t`o flisko'uni, qtuphm'ena - >ap' t`o ner'o, t'inaxan t`is murwdi'es tous ki <'olh <h g~hs - m'urise. -\endtwocolgr -\rightline{\csc{Kazantzakis}, `Symposium'} -\vskip 0pt plus \baselineskip - -%}}} samples -\iffalse -%{{{ table - -*\ntable* -\smallskip \noindent - This is a working encoding, and will likely be different in future - versions. -%}}} table -\fi -%{{{ 24-pt sample - -\bigbreak -\moveleft\leftmargin \vbox{ \hsize=\bodywd -\hrule height 1pt \bigskip -\begingreek \biggr\baselineskip=30pt -\centerline{((ABGDEZHJIKLMNXOPRSCTUFVQYW))} -\centerline{](abgdezhjiklmnxoprss^^`ctuf\char92 vqyw)[} -\centerline{=0123456789---\%\char42 +/--''!,:;?.-} -\centerline{\char3 '@ `@ ~@ <@ <'@ <`@ <~@ >@ >'@ >`@ >~@ "@ "'@ "`@ "~@ - "\char3 @} -\endgreek -\medskip\hrule height 1pt -} -%}}} 24-pt sample -\bye -%}}} Malvern Greek manual - -% Local variables: -% fill-prefix: "\t" -% fill-column: 76 -% fold-folded-p: t -% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in deleted file mode 100644 index e1c797dcead..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ -# Makefile for the PDCMAC package -# Template for configure - -package = @package@ - -# directory source code is in: -srcdir = @srcdir@ - -# directory for TeX macro files: -texmf = @texmf@ -texdir = @texdir@ -docdir = @docdir@ - -# End of configuration section -######################################################################## - -TEX = tex </dev/null -DVIPS = dvips -FIG2EPSF = $(srcdir)/fig2epsf -ETAGS = $(srcdir)/dtxtags -INSTALL = @INSTALL@ -INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ -MKDIR = $(srcdir)/pmkdir $(MKDIRFLAGS) -MKDIRFLAGS = --mode=755 - -code_files = pdccode.tex pdccode2.tex - -# The macro files are divided according to whether they have their own -# DTX file, or come from pdcmisc.dtx or pdcsty.dtx -self_files = pdcfmt2.dtx pdcfsel.dtx magrmac.dtx pdcoput5.dtx \ - pdcadobe.dtx pdcl1maa.dtx maamac.dtx -misc_files = pdcmigr.tex pdcimth.tex pdchyex.tex pdccmsub.tex -sty_files = ma55lft.tex ma55doc.tex pdccmlft.tex pdccmdoc.tex\ - pdcpsdoc.tex pdcpslft.tex pdcdoc.def pdclft.def -macro_files = $(self_files:.dtx=.tex) $(misc_files) $(sty_files) - -misc_dtx = pdcmisc.dtx -sty_dtx = pdcsty.dtx -dtxfiles = $(self_files) $(sty_dtx) $(misc_dtx) pdccode.dtx -dvifiles = $(dtxfiles:.dtx=.dvi) pdcguide.dvi - -figures = oput01.eps oput02.eps -documents = pdcguide.tex magrman.tex copying.tex pdcmacvn.tex -config_files = makefile.in configure -miscscript = fig2epsf pmkdir pinstall dtxtags -miscdoc = 00readme.txt install.txt copying.txt version.txt - -distfiles = $(miscdoc) pdcguide.dvi pdcmondo.tex \ - $(code_files) $(dtxfiles) $(documents) $(config_files) \ - $(figures) $(figures:.eps=.fig) \ - $(miscscript) $(miscscript:=.1) - -######################################################################## -# Standard targets - -all: pdcguide.dvi $(macro_files) - -# Note. This target assumes either I can use GNU "install", or -# an "install" compatible with it, or the "pinstall" shellscript supplied. -install: all pdccode.dvi - test -d $(texdir) || $(MKDIR) $(texdir) - $(INSTALL_DATA) $(macro_files) $(texdir) - -test -d $(docdir) || $(MKDIR) $(docdir) - -$(INSTALL_DATA) $(dvifiles) $(figures) $(miscdoc) $(docdir) - -test -r news.txt && $(INSTALL_DATA) news.txt $(docdir) - -uninstall: - cd $(texdir); rm -f $(macro_files) - cd $(docdir) && rm -f $(dvifiles) $(figures) $(miscdoc) - -mostlyclean: - rm -f *.log *.ilg *.toc *.bak -clean: mostlyclean - rm -f *.dvi *.aux *.idx $(macro_files) .misc.flag .sty.flag -distclean: clean - rm -f makefile config.status TAGS -realclean: distclean - rm -f *.ind $(figures) version.txt - -dist: $(distfiles) - sed -n '/pdcmacv/s/.*[^0-9.]\([0-9.]*\)[^0-9.].*$$/$(package)-\1/p' \ - pdcmacvn.tex > .fn - rm -rf `cat .fn` - mkdir `cat .fn` - cp -p $(distfiles) `cat .fn` - -cp -p ChangeLog `cat .fn`/changes.txt - -cp -p news.txt `cat .fn`/news.txt - cd `cat .fn`; ls -Rl > contents.txt - tar -cf `cat .fn`.tar `cat .fn` && gzip -v9f `cat .fn`.tar - cd `cat .fn`; zip -9qrl ../`cat ../.fn`.zip * - rm -rf `cat .fn` .fn - -version.txt: $(dtxfiles) $(miscscript) pdcmacvn.tex - sed -e 's/\\def\\pdcmacversion{\([0-9]*\.[0-9]*\)}/* $(package) release \1 */' \ - -e 's/\\def\\pdcmacversion{\([0-9]*\.[0-9]*\)\.\([0-9]*\)}/* $(package) release \1, patch level \2 */' \ - pdcmacvn.tex > version.txt - date '+Version ID list generated %Y-%m-%d' >> version.txt - echo >> version.txt - ( grep -h 'rcs\$$Id' $(dtxfiles) | \ - sed -e 's/^.*: \(.*\) \$$.*$$/\1/' -e 's/,v/ =/' | sort; echo; \ - grep version= $(miscscript) configure | \ - sed -e 's/:version=/ = /' -e 's/"//g' | sort ) | \ - align_equals >> version.txt - -tagfiles = $(dtxfiles) -TAGS: $(tagfiles) $(srcdir)/dtxtags - $(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(tagfiles) - -######################################################################## -# Individual targets - -$(self_files) $(miscfiles): pdccode.tex -$(sty_files): pdccode2.tex - -pdcguide.dvi magrman.dvi: $(macro_files) -pdcguide.dvi: copying.tex pdcmacvn.tex - -pdcoput5.dvi pdcoput5.tex: $(figures) - -$(misc_files): .misc.flag -.misc.flag: $(misc_dtx) - $(TEX) $(misc_dtx) && touch .misc.flag - -$(sty_files): .sty.flag -.sty.flag: $(sty_dtx) - $(TEX) $(sty_dtx) && touch .sty.flag - -pdccode.dvi pdccode.tex: pdccode.dtx - $(TEX) pdccode.dtx - grep endinput tmp.tex && mv tmp.tex pdccode.tex - -pdcguide.ps: pdcguide.tex copying.tex $(macro_files) - echo '\let\usepsfonts! \input pdcguide' > tmp.tex - $(TEX) tmp - rm -f tmp.tex - $(DVIPS) $(DVIPSFLAGS) -o $@ tmp - -# A scratch file for doing tests: -tryit.dvi: tryit.tex ma55lft.tex pdcl1maa.tex - $(TEX) tryit - - -# rules for the configuration itself -makefile: makefile.in config.status - sh config.status makefile -config.status: $(srcdir)/configure - sh config.status --recheck --nocreate - -######################################################################## -# Implicit rules - -.SUFFIXES: .dtx .tex .dvi .ps .eps .fig -.dtx.tex: - $(TEX) $< -.tex.dvi: - $(TEX) $< -.dvi.ps: - $(DVIPS) $(DVIPSFLAGS) $< -o $@ -.fig.eps: - $(FIG2EPSF) $< > $@ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig deleted file mode 100644 index e4b75f258f0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig +++ /dev/null @@ -1,323 +0,0 @@ -#FIG 2.1 -80 2 -6 89 317 224 329 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 329 224 329 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 329 224 317 89 317 89 329 224 329 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 227 224 299 -6 89 287 224 299 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 299 224 299 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 299 224 287 89 287 89 299 224 299 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 272 224 284 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 284 224 284 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 284 224 272 89 272 89 284 224 284 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 257 224 269 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 269 224 269 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 269 224 257 89 257 89 269 224 269 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 242 224 254 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 254 224 254 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 254 224 242 89 242 89 254 224 254 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 227 224 239 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 239 224 239 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 239 224 227 89 227 89 239 224 239 9999 9999 --6 --6 -6 89 152 224 224 -6 89 212 224 224 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 224 224 224 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 224 224 212 89 212 89 224 224 224 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 197 224 209 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 209 224 209 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 209 224 197 89 197 89 209 224 209 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 182 224 194 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 194 224 194 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 194 224 182 89 182 89 194 224 194 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 167 224 179 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 179 224 179 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 179 224 167 89 167 89 179 224 179 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 152 224 164 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 164 224 164 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 164 224 152 89 152 89 164 224 164 9999 9999 --6 --6 -6 89 77 224 149 -6 89 137 224 149 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 149 224 149 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 149 224 137 89 137 89 149 224 149 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 122 224 134 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 134 224 134 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 134 224 122 89 122 89 134 224 134 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 107 224 119 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 119 224 119 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 119 224 107 89 107 89 119 224 119 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 92 224 104 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 104 224 104 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 104 224 92 89 92 89 104 224 104 9999 9999 --6 -6 89 77 224 89 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 89 224 89 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 224 89 224 77 89 77 89 89 224 89 9999 9999 --6 --6 -6 239 77 374 149 -6 239 137 374 149 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 149 374 149 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 149 374 137 239 137 239 149 374 149 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 122 374 134 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 134 374 134 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 134 374 122 239 122 239 134 374 134 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 107 374 119 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 119 374 119 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 119 374 107 239 107 239 119 374 119 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 92 374 104 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 104 374 104 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 104 374 92 239 92 239 104 374 104 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 77 374 89 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 89 374 89 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 89 374 77 239 77 239 89 374 89 9999 9999 --6 --6 -6 239 152 374 224 -6 239 212 374 224 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 224 374 224 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 224 374 212 239 212 239 224 374 224 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 197 374 209 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 209 374 209 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 209 374 197 239 197 239 209 374 209 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 182 374 194 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 194 374 194 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 194 374 182 239 182 239 194 374 194 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 167 374 179 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 179 374 179 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 179 374 167 239 167 239 179 374 179 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 152 374 164 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 164 374 164 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 164 374 152 239 152 239 164 374 164 9999 9999 --6 --6 -6 239 227 374 299 -6 239 287 374 299 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 299 374 299 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 299 374 287 239 287 239 299 374 299 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 272 374 284 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 284 374 284 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 284 374 272 239 272 239 284 374 284 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 257 374 269 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 269 374 269 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 269 374 257 239 257 239 269 374 269 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 242 374 254 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 254 374 254 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 254 374 242 239 242 239 254 374 254 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 227 374 239 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 239 374 239 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 239 374 227 239 227 239 239 374 239 9999 9999 --6 --6 -6 239 302 374 374 -6 239 362 374 374 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 374 374 374 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 374 374 362 239 362 239 374 374 374 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 347 374 359 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 359 374 359 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 359 374 347 239 347 239 359 374 359 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 332 374 344 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 344 374 344 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 344 374 332 239 332 239 344 374 344 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 317 374 329 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 329 374 329 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 329 374 317 239 317 239 329 374 329 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 302 374 314 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 314 374 314 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 314 374 302 239 302 239 314 374 314 9999 9999 --6 --6 -6 239 377 374 449 -6 239 437 374 449 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 449 374 449 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 449 374 437 239 437 239 449 374 449 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 422 374 434 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 434 374 434 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 434 374 422 239 422 239 434 374 434 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 407 374 419 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 419 374 419 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 419 374 407 239 407 239 419 374 419 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 392 374 404 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 404 374 404 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 404 374 392 239 392 239 404 374 404 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 377 374 389 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 389 374 389 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 389 374 377 239 377 239 389 374 389 9999 9999 --6 --6 -6 239 482 374 494 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 494 374 494 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 494 374 482 239 482 239 494 374 494 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 467 374 479 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 479 374 479 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 479 374 467 239 467 239 479 374 479 9999 9999 --6 -6 239 452 374 464 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 239 464 374 464 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 374 464 374 452 239 452 239 464 374 464 9999 9999 --6 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 59 449 59 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 524 449 524 9999 9999 -2 2 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 - 479 554 479 29 59 29 59 554 479 554 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 254 344 9999 9999 -2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 308 224 308 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 563 269 569 344 569 344 563 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 308 569 317 581 320 581 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 29 344 83 308 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 224 494 224 77 164 77 164 494 224 494 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 299 494 299 77 239 77 239 494 299 494 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 374 494 374 77 314 77 314 494 374 494 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0 - 449 59 449 47 89 47 89 59 449 59 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0 - 449 524 449 512 89 512 89 524 449 524 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 449 494 449 77 389 77 389 494 449 494 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 149 494 149 77 89 77 89 494 149 494 9999 9999 -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 36 113 326 caption -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 44 146 215 column 0 -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 44 311 218 column 1 -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 42 275 53 headline -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 37 359 515 footline -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 39 323 584 grid cell -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 48 8 371 separator -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 36 8 359 caption -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 54 104 419 illustration -4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 15 54 419 404 illustration diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig deleted file mode 100644 index fb7858b0c43..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig +++ /dev/null @@ -1,273 +0,0 @@ -#FIG 2.1 -80 2 -6 179 317 254 329 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 329 254 317 179 317 179 329 254 329 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 329 254 329 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 332 254 344 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 344 254 332 179 332 179 344 254 344 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 344 254 344 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 287 254 299 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 299 254 287 179 287 179 299 254 299 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 299 254 299 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 272 254 284 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 284 254 272 179 272 179 284 254 284 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 284 254 284 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 257 254 269 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 269 254 257 179 257 179 269 254 269 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 269 254 269 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 242 254 254 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 254 254 242 179 242 179 254 254 254 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 254 254 254 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 227 254 239 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 239 254 227 179 227 179 239 254 239 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 239 254 239 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 212 254 224 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 224 254 212 179 212 179 224 254 224 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 224 254 224 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 197 254 209 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 209 254 197 179 197 179 209 254 209 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 209 254 209 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 182 254 194 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 194 254 182 179 182 179 194 254 194 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 194 254 194 9999 9999 --6 -6 179 167 254 179 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 179 254 167 179 167 179 179 254 179 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 179 254 179 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 347 344 359 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 359 344 347 269 347 269 359 344 359 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 359 344 359 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 317 344 329 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 329 344 317 269 317 269 329 344 329 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 329 344 329 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 332 344 344 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 344 344 332 269 332 269 344 344 344 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 344 344 344 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 287 344 299 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 299 344 287 269 287 269 299 344 299 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 299 344 299 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 272 344 284 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 284 344 272 269 272 269 284 344 284 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 284 344 284 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 257 344 269 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 269 344 257 269 257 269 269 344 269 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 269 344 269 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 242 344 254 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 254 344 242 269 242 269 254 344 254 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 254 344 254 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 227 344 239 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 239 344 227 269 227 269 239 344 239 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 239 344 239 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 212 344 224 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 224 344 212 269 212 269 224 344 224 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 224 344 224 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 197 344 209 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 209 344 197 269 197 269 209 344 209 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 209 344 209 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 182 344 194 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 194 344 182 269 182 269 194 344 194 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 194 344 194 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 167 344 179 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 179 344 167 269 167 269 179 344 179 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 179 344 179 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 362 344 374 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 374 344 362 269 362 269 374 344 374 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 374 344 374 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 377 344 389 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 389 344 377 269 377 269 389 344 389 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 389 344 389 9999 9999 --6 -6 269 302 344 314 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 314 344 302 269 302 269 314 344 314 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 269 314 344 314 9999 9999 --6 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 59 434 59 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 89 524 434 524 9999 9999 -2 2 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 - 479 554 479 29 59 29 59 554 479 554 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 494 74 494 494 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 494 494 494 527 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 509 59 509 89 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 524 29 524 74 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 524 494 524 554 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 539 29 539 554 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 89 569 434 569 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 59 584 479 584 9999 9999 -2 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 -1 0 0 - 425 89 515 89 9999 9999 -2 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 -1 0 0 - 431 59 515 59 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 449 59 449 74 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 449 104 449 89 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 329 158 344 158 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 374 158 359 158 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0 - 434 524 434 512 89 512 89 524 434 524 9999 9999 -2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0 - 434 59 434 47 89 47 89 59 434 59 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 434 164 434 74 89 74 89 164 434 164 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 434 389 434 164 359 164 359 389 434 389 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 164 389 164 164 89 164 89 389 164 389 9999 9999 -2 2 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 - 254 389 254 164 179 164 179 389 254 389 9999 9999 -2 2 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 0 0 0 - 344 389 344 164 269 164 269 389 344 389 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 155 284 155 299 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 155 329 155 314 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 179 158 254 158 9999 9999 -2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000 - 365 164 365 389 9999 9999 -2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 170 164 170 389 9999 9999 -2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 179 308 254 308 9999 9999 -2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 260 164 260 389 9999 9999 -2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0 - 350 164 350 389 9999 9999 -2 2 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 0 0 0 - 89 389 89 494 434 494 434 389 89 389 9999 9999 -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 32 269 566 bodywd -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 36 269 581 paperwd -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 24 521 524 botmg -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 49 491 509 footlineskip -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 28 491 284 bodyht -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 32 536 284 paperht -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 53 506 74 headlineskip -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 24 521 53 topmg -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 30 449 86 topskip -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 350 155 colsep -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 269 119 topbox -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 269 464 botbox -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 32 269 518 footline -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 36 254 56 headline -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 37 218 266 column 0 -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 37 305 266 column 1 -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 28 125 221 leftbox -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 31 218 338 caption -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 14 215 374 illo -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 25 215 152 colwd -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 21 374 284 colht -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 33 407 251 rightbox -4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 29 152 308 capsep diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 443b766d82c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,609 +0,0 @@ -% pdcadobe.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcadobe.tex -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "PDCADOBE -- Formatting Macros", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 1.3 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:07:31 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX definitions file pdcadobe.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ pdcadobe -%{{{ preamble -\relax -\input pdccode - -\document -\rcs$Id: pdcadobe.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/30 16:07:31 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\codefile{pdcadobe.tex} -%}}} preamble -%{{{ introduction - -\author{P. Damian Cugley} -\title{PDCAdobe---Macros for using Adobe fonts} -\section{Introduction} - - This document describes |pdcadobe.tex|, a collection of macros - for using Adobe's Standard Roman character set, via DVIPS's - variation on the \TeX\ Text encoding. - -\notepar - You will need to use a different strategy if your PostScript - fonts adhere strictly to the \TeX\ Text conventions (the - conventions of Computer Modern Roman, described in {\it\TeX - book}\/ Appendix~F, and called OT1 by the \LaTeX~3 team), such - as the fonts generated with Fontinst. -\endnotepar - -\subsec{New text symbols} - - The new characters now available in text are: -$$\halign{\indent\tt\char`\\#1\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr - quotesingle& typewriter-style apostrophe ({\tt\char"0D })\cr - quotedouble& typewriter-style double apostrophe ({\tt"})\cr - asciicircum& ASCII circumflex\cr - asciitilde& ASCII tilde\cr -}$$ - - -\subsec{Use of the Symbol font} - - The assumption is that one of the resons for using PostScript - fonts is that, if you stick to the `Adobe~35', the resulting - PostScript files are much smaller because no font bitmaps need - to be downloaded. On this assumption, Adobe's Symbol font is - used whenever possible, even when the Computer Modern symbol is - arguably prettier. - - The Symbol font will need to have its own maths family, which by - convention this file expects to find defined as |\asyfam|. - -\subsec{Composite letters} - -\setbox0=\hbox{accent} -\edef\\{\vrule height\the\ht0 depth\the\dp0 width\the\wd0 \relax } - - Composite letters are those made from some base letter and a - {\it mark}, for example {\it\'e}, {\it\"u}.\footnote*{`Composite - letters' is a euphemism for what English speakers usually refer - to as `\\ed letters', since the word `\\' tends to provoke - lectures to the effect that composite letters are not considered - to be `\\ed' in many of the lanuages in which they are used.} - In the Adobe Standard Roman character set, and hence in - |afm2tfm|'s encoding, the composite letters of ISO 8859--1 are - included as separate glyphs. These glyphs are accessed using - ligatures between mark glyphs and base letters (so that |^^13e| - in the manuscript file produces `\'e'). Unfortunately, - exploiting this is tricky if we also want to allow for composite - glyphs {\it not} included in the PostScript fonts. - - The approach taken in these definitions is that \TeX's composite - letter commands (|\'|, |\"|, and friends) are left unchanged, so - that `|\'e|' works through \TeX's |\|\\ command. The magic - glyphs are available as commands with names like |\acuteglyph| - or via the Latin-1 special symbols, so that `|\acuteglyph e|' or - `|^^b4e|' (which might liik like `{\tt\char"13 e}' on the screen - if your computer uses Latin-1) produces `\'e' as a single glyph - (which might mean tha mark is better aligned). Finally, the - Latin-1 composite letters generate the single glyphs vial - ligatures, so that `|^^e9|' (which may well look like `{\tt\'e}' - on the screen) expands to `|\acuteglyph e|' and hence `\'e'. - -\subsec{About this document} - - The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in - |pdcadobe.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The - \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for - similar purposes.} which, when processed by plain \TeX, - generates a fresh copy of |pdcadobe.tex| in the current directory - in addition to the |dvi| file. This ensures that the printed - documentation and the code it describes are identical. The - |dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|. - -%}}} introduction -%{{{ File identification -\section{File identification} - - Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the - file. - -\code - \|\% pdcadobe.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for Adobe style fonts - | - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "Formatting macros for Adobe-style fonts. - |%%% This file was generated by running - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\} - | -\endcode -%}}} file id -%{{{ chardefs -\section{Characters available in all styles} - - The following characters are in the fonts generated by - |afm2tfm|, so are available in all styles. -\code - |\chardef\quotesingle="0D - |\chardef\quotedouble="22 - |\chardef\_="5F - |\chardef\asciicircum="80 - |\chardef\asciitilde="81 - |\chardef\cents="A2 - |\chardef\pounds="A3 - |\chardef\fractionslash="A4 - |\chardef\yen="A5 - |\chardef\florin="A6 - |\chardef\S="A7 - |\chardef\currency="A8 - |\chardef\lguillemet="AB - |\chardef\dag="B2 - |\chardef\ddag="B3 - |\chardef\gbdecimal="B4 - |\chardef\P="B6 - |\chardef\bullet="B7 - |\chardef\quotesinglebase="B8 - |\chardef\quotedblbase="B9 - |\chardef\rguillemet="BB - |\chardef\ellipsis="BC \def\dots{\ellipsis\thinspace} - |\chardef\permille="BD - |\chardef\orda="E3 - |\chardef\ordo="EB -\endcode - Some glyphs, like |\fractionslash| and |\gbdecimal| may well be - used in maths mode, but are defined using |\chardef| to allow - them to be used in text as well. - - The definition of |\dots| adds the thin space that is included - in plain \TeX's |\dots|, so that `|\dots,|' will have a thin - space between the third full stop and the comma. - -\subsec{Maths stuff} - - These symbols are available in maths mode, coming from the |\rm| - font (fam~0). -\code - |\mathchardef\backslash="205C - |\edef\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308} \let\{=\lbrace \mathcode`\{="407B - |\mathcode`\|="707C \mathchardef\mid="307C - |\edef\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309} \let\}=\rbrace \mathcode`\}="507D - |\mathchardef\sim="3081 - |\mathchardef\cdot="20B4 - |\mathchardef\bullet="20B7 - |\mathchardef\ldots="60BC -\endcode - There {\it are} extensible braces in the Adobe Symbol font, - which I~would have used for the |\lbrace| and |\rbrace| - commands. Unfortunately, the TFM file generated with |afm2tfm| - seems to lack the special information that makes extensible - characters work, so the |cmex10| glyphs must be used instead. - -\subsec{Marks for composite letters} - - Some common accented letters can be got by printing the accent - glyph before the letter glyph. However not all combinations - will work, so I~have left plain \TeX's definitions in place. - - For later reference, the glyphs used for the accents are given - names. -\code - |\chardef\graveglyph="12 - |\chardef\acuteglyph="13 - |\chardef\hookglyph="14 - |\chardef\breveglyph="15 - |\chardef\macronglyph="16 - |\chardef\ringglyph="17 - |\chardef\cedillaglyph="18 - |\chardef\circumglyph="5E - |\chardef\tildeglyph="7E - |\chardef\twodotsglyph="7F - |\chardef\dotglyph="C7 - |\chardef\hungarianglyph="CD - |\chardef\ogonekglyph="CE -\endcode - - - Some special letters and marks have been moved to new slots. -\code - |\chardef\AA="C8 \chardef\aa="98 - |\chardef\L="E8 \chardef\l="F8 - |\def\.#1{\accent\dotglyph #1} - |\def\H#1{\accent\hungarianglyph"CD #1} -\endcode - -%}}} chardefs -%{{{ adobe sy -\section{Adobe Symbol font characters} - - Most of Adobe's Symbol font's glyphs exist already in one of the - maths fonts. Nevertheless I~think it makes sense to use them - whenever possible, because if it so happens that none of the - glyphs in the maths fonts are used, the bitmaps for the fonts - may be omitted from the PostScript file, making it much smaller. - For these definitions to work, there must be a family |\asyfam| - and font nickname |\asy|. - -\code - |\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED - | \newfam\asyfam - |\fi -\endcode - -\subsec{Extracting the fam name} - -\code - |\edef\\{\ifcase\asyfam 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or - | 8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi - |} -\endcode - - Where plain \TeX's definition uses glyphs from the roman font, - I~have let the definition stand. -\code - |\mathchardef\forall="0\\22 - |\mathchardef\exists="0\\24 - |\mathchardef\suchthat="0\\27 - |\mathcode`*="2\\2A - |\mathcode`,="6\\2C - |\mathcode`-="2\\2D - |\mathcode`.="2\\2E - |\mathcode`/="2\\2F - |\mathcode`<="3\\3C - |\mathcode`>="3\\3E -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\cong="3\\40 - |\mathchardef\Alpha="0\\41 - |\mathchardef\Beta="0\\42 - |\mathchardef\Chi="0\\43 - |\mathchardef\Delta="0\\44 - |\mathchardef\Epsilon="0\\45 - |\mathchardef\Phi="0\\46 - |\mathchardef\Gamma="0\\47 - |\mathchardef\Eta="0\\48 - |\mathchardef\Iota="0\\49 - |\mathchardef\vartheta="0\\4A - |\mathchardef\Kappa="0\\4B - |\mathchardef\Lambda="0\\4C - |\mathchardef\Mu="0\\4D - |\mathchardef\Ni="0\\4E - |\mathchardef\Omicron="0\\4F -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\Pi="0\\50 - |\mathchardef\Theta="0\\51 - |\mathchardef\Rho="0\\52 - |\mathchardef\Sigma="0\\53 - |\mathchardef\Tau="0\\54 - |\mathchardef\varUpsilon="0\\55 - |\mathchardef\varsigma="0\\56 - |\mathchardef\Omega="0\\57 - |\mathchardef\Xi="0\\58 - |\mathchardef\Psi="0\\59 - |\mathchardef\Zeta="0\\5A -% - |\mathchardef\therefore="3\\5C -% - |\mathchardef\perp="3\\5E -% -\smallbreak -% - |\mathchardef\alpha="0\\61 - |\mathchardef\beta="0\\62 - |\mathchardef\chi="0\\63 - |\mathchardef\delta="0\\64 - |\mathchardef\epsilon="0\\65 - |\mathchardef\phi="0\\66 - |\mathchardef\gamma="0\\67 - |\mathchardef\eta="0\\68 - |\mathchardef\iota="0\\69 - |\mathchardef\varphi="0\\6A - |\mathchardef\kappa="0\\6B - |\mathchardef\lambda="0\\6C - |\mathchardef\mu="0\\6D - |\mathchardef\ni="0\\6E - |\mathchardef\omicron="0\\6F -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\pi="0\\70 - |\mathchardef\theta="0\\71 - |\mathchardef\rho="0\\72 - |\mathchardef\sigma="0\\73 - |\mathchardef\tau="0\\74 - |\mathchardef\upsilon="0\\75 - |\mathchardef\varpi="0\\76 - |\mathchardef\omega="0\\77 - |\mathchardef\xi="0\\78 - |\mathchardef\psi="0\\79 - |\mathchardef\zeta="0\\7A - |\mathchardef\sim="3\\7E -% -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\Upsilon="0\\A1 - |\mathcode`'="0\\A2 \mathchardef\minutes="0\\A2 - |\mathchardef\leq="3\\A3 \let\le=\leq - |\mathchardef\fractionslash="0\\A4 - |\mathchardef\infinity="0\\A5 -% - |\mathchardef\clubsuit="0\\A7 - |\mathchardef\diamondsuit="0\\A8 - |\mathchardef\heartsuit="0\\A9 - |\mathchardef\spadesuit="0\\AA - |\mathchardef\leftrightarrow="3\\AB - |\mathchardef\leftarrow="3\\AC \let\gets=\rightarrow - |\mathchardef\uparrow="3\\AD - |\mathchardef\rightarrow="3\\AE \let\to=\rightarrow - |\mathchardef\downarrow="3\\AF -\smallskip - |\mathchardef\degrees="0\\B0 - |\mathchardef\pm="2\\B1 - |\mathchardef\seconds="0\\B2 - |\mathchardef\geq="3\\B3 \let\ge=\geq - |\mathchardef\times="2\\B4 - |\mathchardef\propto="3\\B5 - |\mathchardef\partial="0\\B6 -% - |\mathchardef\div="2\\B8 - |\mathchardef\neq="3\\B9 \let\ne=\neq - |\mathchardef\equiv="3\\BA - |\mathchardef\approx="3\\BB - |\mathchardef\ldots="6\\BC - |\edef\arrowvert{\delimiter"0\\BD33C } - |\mathchardef\relbar"3\\BE - |\edef\crlf{\noexpand\mathexbox\\BF} -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\aleph="0\\C0 - |\mathchardef\Im="0\\C1 - |\mathchardef\Re="0\\C2 - |\mathchardef\wp="0\\C3 - |\mathchardef\otimes="2\\C4 - |\mathchardef\oplus="2\\C5 - |\mathchardef\emptyset="0\\C6 - |\mathchardef\cap="2\\C7 - |\mathchardef\cup="2\\C8 - |\mathchardef\supset="3\\C9 - |\mathchardef\supseteq="3\\CA - |\mathchardef\nsubset="3\\CB - |\mathchardef\subset="3\\CC - |\mathchardef\subseteq="3\\CD - |\mathchardef\in="3\\CE - |\mathchardef\nin="3\\CF -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\angle="0\\D0 - |\mathchardef\nabla="0\\D1 - |\edef\registered{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D2} - |\edef\copyright{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D3} - |\edef\trademark{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D4} - |\mathchardef\prod="1\\D5 - |\edef\sqrt{\radical"\\D6370 } - |\mathchardef\cdot="2\\D7 - |\mathchardef\neg="0\\D8 \let\lnot=\neg - |\mathchardef\wedge="3\\D9 \let\land=\wedge - |\mathchardef\vee="3\\DA \let\lor=\vee - |\mathchardef\Leftrightarrow="3\\DB - |\mathchardef\Leftarrow="3\\DC - |\mathchardef\Uparrow="3\\DD - |\mathchardef\Rightarrow="3\\DE - |\mathchardef\Downarrow="3\\DF -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\diamond="3\\E0 - |\edef\langle{\delimiter"4\\E130A } - |\mathchardef\sum="1\\E5 - |\edef\rangle{\delimiter"5\\F130B } -\endcode - (I haven't bothered redefining those delimiters based on parts of - large delimiters.) - -%}}} adobe sy -%{{{ ISO 8859-1 support -\section{ISO 8859--1 input} - - ISO~8859--1 (Latin-1) is the de facto standard character - encoding in a large numebr of countries, and so we shall try to - make a reasonable number of Latin-1 characters available. - -\subsec{Symbols} - - Those characters whose code is the same as the code of the - corresponding glyph are left alone (with catcode~12). For - example, |^^a3| (pounds sterling) is left alone. - - Those that have an equivalent |\chardef| (or |\mathchardef|) - name are defined with |\let| (for example, |^^a4| is |\let| to - |\currency|). Those with an equivalent standard ligature use - that ligature. These conventions hopefully insulate these - definitions against changes in the encoding. - - The characters that represent marks for composite - letters\footnote*{This phrase is used on the grounds that the - word {\it accent} tends to provoke lectures on ways in which - many composite letters do {\it not} represent accents in the - languages in which they are used.} will form ligatures with the - following letter---one may write `{\tt\char"7F u\char"18 c}' to - get `\"u\c c'. - - I don't use |\declareactivechar| on these because they would not - work properly in verbatim text with catcode~12. (Extending - verbatim text to include Latin-1 will take a few definitions - along the same lines as |\ttlq| etc.). -\code - |\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~ - |\catcode`^^a1\active \def^^a1{!`} -% A2 -% A3 - |\catcode`^^a4\active \let^^a4=\currency -% A5 -% A6 XXX -% A7 - |\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\twodotsglyph - |\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright - |\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda -% AB - |\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot - |\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\- - |\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered - |\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\macronglyph -\smallbreak - |\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees - |\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm - |\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2} - |\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3} - |\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\acuteglyph - |\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu -% B6 - |\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal - |\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\cedillaglyph - |\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1} - |\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo -% BB - |\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14} - |\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12} - |\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34} - |\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`} -\smallbreak - |\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times - |\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div -\endcode - -\subsec{Composite letters} - - The composite letters acer accessed via ligatures so that they - are immune to some possible changes in encoding. -\code - |\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\graveglyph A} - |\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\acuteglyph A} - |\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\circumglyph A} - |\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\tildeglyph A} - |\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\twodotsglyph A} - |\catcode`^^c5\active \def^^c5{\ringglyph A} - |\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE - |\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\cedillaglyph C} - |\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\graveglyph E} - |\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\acuteglyph E} - |\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\circumglyph E} - |\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\twodotsglyph E} - |\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\graveglyph I} - |\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\acuteglyph I} - |\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\circumglyph I} - |\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\twodotsglyph I} -\smallbreak -% |\catcode`^^d0\active \chardef^^d0="?? % DH - |\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\tildeglyph N} - |\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\graveglyph O} - |\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\acuteglyph O} - |\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\circumglyph O} - |\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\tildeglyph O} - |\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\twodotsglyph O} - |\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O - |\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\graveglyph U} - |\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\acuteglyph U} - |\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\circumglyph U} - |\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\twodotsglyph U} - |\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\acuteglyph Y} -% |\catcode`^^de\active \def^^de{TH} - |\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss -\smallbreak - |\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\acuteglyph a} - |\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\graveglyph a} - |\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\circumglyph a} - |\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\tildeglyph a} - |\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\twodotsglyph a} - |\catcode`^^e5\active \def^^e5{\ringglyph a} - |\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae - |\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\cedillaglyph c} - |\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\graveglyph e} - |\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\acuteglyph e} - |\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\circumglyph e} - |\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\twodotsglyph e} - |\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\graveglyph i} - |\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\acuteglyph i} - |\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\circumglyph i} - |\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\twodotsglyph i} -\smallbreak -% |\catcode`^^f0\active \def^^f0{dh} - |\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\tildeglyph n} - |\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\graveglyph o} - |\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\acuteglyph o} - |\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\circumglyph o} - |\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\tildeglyph o} - |\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\twodotsglyph o} - |\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o - |\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\graveglyph u} - |\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\acuteglyph u} - |\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\circumglyph u} - |\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\twodotsglyph u} - |\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\acuteglyph y} -% |\catcode`^^fe\active \def^^fe{th} - |\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\twodotsglyph y} -\endcode - -%}}} ISO 8859-1 support -%{{{ other hacks -\section{Modifications to other PDCMAC macros} - - - For typewriter text, less drastic revision of the string is - necessary. -\code - |\def\ttminus{--{}} - |\let\ttcircum=\asciicircum - |\let\tttilde=\asciitilde -\endcode - Note that ASCII quote and backquote characters are still got - from accents because a `neutral' quotation mark is not adequate - for computer listings where both sorts of `quote mark' might be - appear, with different meanings. - - -%}}} other hacks -\endcodefile -\enddocument -\bye -%}}} pdcadobe.dtx - -%Local variables: -%fill-prefix: "\t" -%fold-folded-p: t -%End: - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 909cec7dfd2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,300 +0,0 @@ -% pdcadobe.tex 1.3 1995/03/30 -- macros for Adobe style fonts - -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex", -%%% version = "1.3", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Formatting macros for Adobe-style fonts. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcadobe.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcadobe.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } - -\message{1.3 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\chardef\quotesingle="0D -\chardef\quotedouble="22 -\chardef\_="5F -\chardef\asciicircum="80 -\chardef\asciitilde="81 -\chardef\cents="A2 -\chardef\pounds="A3 -\chardef\fractionslash="A4 -\chardef\yen="A5 -\chardef\florin="A6 -\chardef\S="A7 -\chardef\currency="A8 -\chardef\lguillemet="AB -\chardef\dag="B2 -\chardef\ddag="B3 -\chardef\gbdecimal="B4 -\chardef\P="B6 -\chardef\bullet="B7 -\chardef\quotesinglebase="B8 -\chardef\quotedblbase="B9 -\chardef\rguillemet="BB -\chardef\ellipsis="BC \def\dots{\ellipsis\thinspace} -\chardef\permille="BD -\chardef\orda="E3 -\chardef\ordo="EB -\mathchardef\backslash="205C -\edef\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308} \let\{=\lbrace \mathcode`\{="407B -\mathcode`\|="707C \mathchardef\mid="307C -\edef\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309} \let\}=\rbrace \mathcode`\}="507D -\mathchardef\sim="3081 -\mathchardef\cdot="20B4 -\mathchardef\bullet="20B7 -\mathchardef\ldots="60BC -\chardef\graveglyph="12 -\chardef\acuteglyph="13 -\chardef\hookglyph="14 -\chardef\breveglyph="15 -\chardef\macronglyph="16 -\chardef\ringglyph="17 -\chardef\cedillaglyph="18 -\chardef\circumglyph="5E -\chardef\tildeglyph="7E -\chardef\twodotsglyph="7F -\chardef\dotglyph="C7 -\chardef\hungarianglyph="CD -\chardef\ogonekglyph="CE -\chardef\AA="C8 \chardef\aa="98 -\chardef\L="E8 \chardef\l="F8 -\def\.#1{\accent\dotglyph #1} -\def\H#1{\accent\hungarianglyph"CD #1} -\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED - \newfam\asyfam -\fi -\edef\\{\ifcase\asyfam 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or - 8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi -} -\mathchardef\forall="0\\22 -\mathchardef\exists="0\\24 -\mathchardef\suchthat="0\\27 -\mathcode`*="2\\2A -\mathcode`,="6\\2C -\mathcode`-="2\\2D -\mathcode`.="2\\2E -\mathcode`/="2\\2F -\mathcode`<="3\\3C -\mathcode`>="3\\3E -\mathchardef\cong="3\\40 -\mathchardef\Alpha="0\\41 -\mathchardef\Beta="0\\42 -\mathchardef\Chi="0\\43 -\mathchardef\Delta="0\\44 -\mathchardef\Epsilon="0\\45 -\mathchardef\Phi="0\\46 -\mathchardef\Gamma="0\\47 -\mathchardef\Eta="0\\48 -\mathchardef\Iota="0\\49 -\mathchardef\vartheta="0\\4A -\mathchardef\Kappa="0\\4B -\mathchardef\Lambda="0\\4C -\mathchardef\Mu="0\\4D -\mathchardef\Ni="0\\4E -\mathchardef\Omicron="0\\4F -\mathchardef\Pi="0\\50 -\mathchardef\Theta="0\\51 -\mathchardef\Rho="0\\52 -\mathchardef\Sigma="0\\53 -\mathchardef\Tau="0\\54 -\mathchardef\varUpsilon="0\\55 -\mathchardef\varsigma="0\\56 -\mathchardef\Omega="0\\57 -\mathchardef\Xi="0\\58 -\mathchardef\Psi="0\\59 -\mathchardef\Zeta="0\\5A -\mathchardef\therefore="3\\5C -\mathchardef\perp="3\\5E -\mathchardef\alpha="0\\61 -\mathchardef\beta="0\\62 -\mathchardef\chi="0\\63 -\mathchardef\delta="0\\64 -\mathchardef\epsilon="0\\65 -\mathchardef\phi="0\\66 -\mathchardef\gamma="0\\67 -\mathchardef\eta="0\\68 -\mathchardef\iota="0\\69 -\mathchardef\varphi="0\\6A -\mathchardef\kappa="0\\6B -\mathchardef\lambda="0\\6C -\mathchardef\mu="0\\6D -\mathchardef\ni="0\\6E -\mathchardef\omicron="0\\6F -\mathchardef\pi="0\\70 -\mathchardef\theta="0\\71 -\mathchardef\rho="0\\72 -\mathchardef\sigma="0\\73 -\mathchardef\tau="0\\74 -\mathchardef\upsilon="0\\75 -\mathchardef\varpi="0\\76 -\mathchardef\omega="0\\77 -\mathchardef\xi="0\\78 -\mathchardef\psi="0\\79 -\mathchardef\zeta="0\\7A -\mathchardef\sim="3\\7E -\mathchardef\Upsilon="0\\A1 -\mathcode`'="0\\A2 \mathchardef\minutes="0\\A2 -\mathchardef\leq="3\\A3 \let\le=\leq -\mathchardef\fractionslash="0\\A4 -\mathchardef\infinity="0\\A5 -\mathchardef\clubsuit="0\\A7 -\mathchardef\diamondsuit="0\\A8 -\mathchardef\heartsuit="0\\A9 -\mathchardef\spadesuit="0\\AA -\mathchardef\leftrightarrow="3\\AB -\mathchardef\leftarrow="3\\AC \let\gets=\rightarrow -\mathchardef\uparrow="3\\AD -\mathchardef\rightarrow="3\\AE \let\to=\rightarrow -\mathchardef\downarrow="3\\AF -\mathchardef\degrees="0\\B0 -\mathchardef\pm="2\\B1 -\mathchardef\seconds="0\\B2 -\mathchardef\geq="3\\B3 \let\ge=\geq -\mathchardef\times="2\\B4 -\mathchardef\propto="3\\B5 -\mathchardef\partial="0\\B6 -\mathchardef\div="2\\B8 -\mathchardef\neq="3\\B9 \let\ne=\neq -\mathchardef\equiv="3\\BA -\mathchardef\approx="3\\BB -\mathchardef\ldots="6\\BC -\edef\arrowvert{\delimiter"0\\BD33C } -\mathchardef\relbar"3\\BE -\edef\crlf{\noexpand\mathexbox\\BF} -\mathchardef\aleph="0\\C0 -\mathchardef\Im="0\\C1 -\mathchardef\Re="0\\C2 -\mathchardef\wp="0\\C3 -\mathchardef\otimes="2\\C4 -\mathchardef\oplus="2\\C5 -\mathchardef\emptyset="0\\C6 -\mathchardef\cap="2\\C7 -\mathchardef\cup="2\\C8 -\mathchardef\supset="3\\C9 -\mathchardef\supseteq="3\\CA -\mathchardef\nsubset="3\\CB -\mathchardef\subset="3\\CC -\mathchardef\subseteq="3\\CD -\mathchardef\in="3\\CE -\mathchardef\nin="3\\CF -\mathchardef\angle="0\\D0 -\mathchardef\nabla="0\\D1 -\edef\registered{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D2} -\edef\copyright{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D3} -\edef\trademark{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D4} -\mathchardef\prod="1\\D5 -\edef\sqrt{\radical"\\D6370 } -\mathchardef\cdot="2\\D7 -\mathchardef\neg="0\\D8 \let\lnot=\neg -\mathchardef\wedge="3\\D9 \let\land=\wedge -\mathchardef\vee="3\\DA \let\lor=\vee -\mathchardef\Leftrightarrow="3\\DB -\mathchardef\Leftarrow="3\\DC -\mathchardef\Uparrow="3\\DD -\mathchardef\Rightarrow="3\\DE -\mathchardef\Downarrow="3\\DF -\mathchardef\diamond="3\\E0 -\edef\langle{\delimiter"4\\E130A } -\mathchardef\sum="1\\E5 -\edef\rangle{\delimiter"5\\F130B } -\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~ -\catcode`^^a1\active \def^^a1{!`} -\catcode`^^a4\active \let^^a4=\currency -\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\twodotsglyph -\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright -\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda -\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot -\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\- -\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered -\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\macronglyph -\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees -\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm -\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2} -\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3} -\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\acuteglyph -\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu -\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal -\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\cedillaglyph -\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1} -\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo -\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14} -\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12} -\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34} -\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`} -\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times -\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div -\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\graveglyph A} -\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\acuteglyph A} -\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\circumglyph A} -\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\tildeglyph A} -\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\twodotsglyph A} -\catcode`^^c5\active \def^^c5{\ringglyph A} -\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE -\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\cedillaglyph C} -\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\graveglyph E} -\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\acuteglyph E} -\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\circumglyph E} -\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\twodotsglyph E} -\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\graveglyph I} -\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\acuteglyph I} -\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\circumglyph I} -\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\twodotsglyph I} -\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\tildeglyph N} -\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\graveglyph O} -\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\acuteglyph O} -\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\circumglyph O} -\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\tildeglyph O} -\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\twodotsglyph O} -\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O -\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\graveglyph U} -\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\acuteglyph U} -\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\circumglyph U} -\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\twodotsglyph U} -\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\acuteglyph Y} -\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss -\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\acuteglyph a} -\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\graveglyph a} -\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\circumglyph a} -\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\tildeglyph a} -\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\twodotsglyph a} -\catcode`^^e5\active \def^^e5{\ringglyph a} -\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae -\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\cedillaglyph c} -\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\graveglyph e} -\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\acuteglyph e} -\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\circumglyph e} -\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\twodotsglyph e} -\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\graveglyph i} -\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\acuteglyph i} -\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\circumglyph i} -\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\twodotsglyph i} -\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\tildeglyph n} -\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\graveglyph o} -\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\acuteglyph o} -\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\circumglyph o} -\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\tildeglyph o} -\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\twodotsglyph o} -\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o -\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\graveglyph u} -\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\acuteglyph u} -\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\circumglyph u} -\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\twodotsglyph u} -\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\acuteglyph y} -\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\twodotsglyph y} -\def\ttminus{--{}} -\let\ttcircum=\asciicircum -\let\tttilde=\asciitilde diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 843a8c96361..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ -% pdccmdoc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "pdccmdoc.tex", -%%% version = "1.2", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in -%%% Computer Modern fonts. -%%% This macro file was generated by running plain -%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex, -%%% pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def", -%%%} - -\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\input pdcimth -\input pdcmigr -\input pdcfmt2 -\input pdchyex -\input pdcoput5 -\input pdcfsel -\input pdccmsub -\autoloadfonts -\def\STYheadingT{% - \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}% -} -\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17 -\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt} - {small}{tiny} -\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt} - {subheading}{small} -\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}% - \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}% - \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}% -} -\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt -\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt -\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny} -\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt} -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000 -\bodyfonts -{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 } -\def\PS{PostScript} -\input pdcdoc.def -\inputifexists{pdccmdoc.cfg} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 905b7d04627..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ -% pdccmlft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "pdccmlft.tex", -%%% version = "1.2", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in -%%% Computer Modern fonts. -%%% This macro file was generated by running plain -%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex, -%%% pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def", -%%%} - -\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\input pdcimth -\input pdcmigr -\input pdcfmt2 -\input pdchyex -\input pdcoput5 -\input pdcfsel -\input pdccmsub -\autoloadfonts -\def\STYheadingT{% - \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}% -} -\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17 -\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt} - {small}{tiny} -\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt} - {subheading}{small} -\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}% - \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}% - \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}% -} -\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt -\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt -\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny} -\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt} -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000 -\bodyfonts -{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 } -\def\PS{PostScript} -\input pdclft.def -\inputifexists{pdccmlft.cfg} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a2712d5c445..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ -% pdcmisc.dtx 1.4 1995/03/30 -- CM subs for PS glyphs -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex", -%%% version = "1.4", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Macros for simulating some PostScript characters -%%% using glyphs form the Computer Modern family. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } - -\message{1.4 1995/03/30} - -\dimendef\dimena=0 -\def\pounds{{\it\char36 }} -\def\yen{{% - \ooalign{% - \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr - \hfil Y\hfil - }% -}} -\def\cents{\leavevmode\hbox{\rm\rlap/c}} -\def\currency{{% - \ooalign{% - \hskip-0.1em - \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip-0.1em\crcr - \hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil - }% -}} -\def\florin{{\it f\/}} -\def\circledletter#1#2{{% - \ooalign{% - \hfil\kern#1\raise0.00ex \hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr - \mathhexbox20D% - }% -}} -\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R} -\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C} -\def\lguillemet{% - \leavevmode - \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}% -} -\def\rguillemet{% - \leavevmode - \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}% -} -\def\permille{{% - \setbox0 \hbox{/}% - \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/% - \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}% -}} -\def\gbdecimal{\mathhexbox201} -\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}} -\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}} -\let\sc=\relax -\let\csc=\relax -\let\mc=\relax diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 2261d583f4e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,881 +0,0 @@ -% pdccode.dtx -- documentation & source for pdccode.tex -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "PDCCODE -- Documented TeX Macros", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 1.6 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:08:32 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX definitions file pdccode.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both a copy of the -%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ pdccode -%{{{ preamble - -\relax -\input pdccode -\document -\rcs$Id: pdccode.dtx,v 1.6 1995/03/30 16:08:32 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\codefile{tmp.tex} - -\defverbatim\" - -%}}} preamble -%{{{ introduction - -\author{P. Damian Cugley} -\title{PDCCODE---Documented \TeX\ Macros} -\section{Introduction} - - PDCCODE is a simpler and less featureful system than the - \LaTeX~2e Docstrip package, but uses the same file suffix - `|dtx|'. Lines between |\code| and |\endcode| markers are - written to a file (set with the |\codefile| command), as well as - being printed `verbatim' in document. Thus one \TeX\ pass - generates both the macro file(s) and a |dvi| file. - - This document---generated from |pdccode.dtx|---is a |dtx| file - for PDCCODE itself, the file of macros used by my |dtx| files. - It cannot be used to generate |pdccode.tex| directly (\TeX\ - might choke halfway through overwriting |pdccode.tex| with a new - version, leaving no |pdccode.tex| to generate |pdccode.tex| - with). Instead it produces its copy as `|tmp.tex|', and - `|tmp.tex|' can be compared to the supplied |pdccode.tex|. - -\subsec{How to read this document} - - The |dtx| files are programs (in \TeX's macro language) that - generate new programs (the macro files that will be used in - documents). The macros described in {\it this} file are used - when generating macro files. So, for example, the |\rcs| and - |\fileversion| macros used to extract identification information - from the |dtx| file are not defined in any of the generated - macro files. - -\subsec{Background} - - For some time I~have been using a collection of macro files to - typeset various types of document with \TeX. After using them - in Malvern\footnote*{Malvern is a sanserif font family - implemented in METAFONT. The current version is release $1.2$.} - releases I have discovered that they had been merged with the - Unix\TeX\ macros directory. Originally I~had never intended - that these files be used by anyone but me---they were full of - hacks and messy code and definitions I~don't use anymore. Since - then I~thought of tidying up the macros enough that I'm not - embarassed by them, but the task of doing this {\it and} - documenting their use was daunting. - - After installing \LaTeX~2e on my new computer, I~decided to have - a go at adapting the idea of `documented \TeX\ macros' files to - plain \TeX. This way I~could clean up the macros and document - them in a systematic fashion. - - The \LaTeX\ Docstrip/Doc-option approach evolved through several - different models and so is a complex format. Docstrip (a - program written in \TeX's macro language) was used to strip - comments from |doc| files making |sty| files, and the \LaTeX\ - Doc-option separately extracted \LaTeX\ code from comments in - |doc| files to make printed documentation. Both Doc and - Docstrip required the user to type in file names whenever they - ran---which made them useless for batch processing. So separate - driver files (with suffixes |drv| and |ins|) were added to - distributions. Finally, the |doc| files, which used to be - usable as |sty| files (just a little slower because of the - comments) were have been changed to be documents instead (making - |drv| files redundant, once the |ltxdoc.cfg| configuration file - was added to the conventions) and given a new suffix |dtx|. - - The system I~use---called PDCCODE---is simpler and faster, but - omits indexes, special change-log commands, and all the features - that come with \LaTeX\ formatting. It doesn't have Docstrip's - {\it options}\/ feature, which allows several largely-similar - files to be generated from the same source.\footnote\dag{I do - have an experimental version |pdccode2.tex| which does this but - I~am not particularly happy with it yet.} It doesn't print - statistics at the end, or do checksums, or even print comforting - lines of asterisks and percent signs in the log file. - - My |dtx| files use a single macro file |pdccode.tex| which - defines a `code mode' where lines are written to the macro file - as well as appearing in the printed documentation. One pass - generates both the macro file and the documentation in |dvi| - form. The |pdccode.tex| file also includes enough layout - commands to typeset the comments. -%}}} -%{{{ using pdccode -\section{Summary of using PDCCODE} - - These commands are explained in more detail below. - -\subsec{A skeleton code file} - - A code file using |pdccode.tex| will look something like this: -$$\it -\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr - "%" name "--" one line description\cr -\noalign{\smallskip} - "%%%@TeX-document-file {"\cr - header comments for the document\cr - "%%%}"\cr -\noalign{\smallskip} - "\relax"\cr - "\input pdccode"\cr - "\document"\cr - "\rcs$" RCS identification string "$\endrcs"\cr - "\codefile{" file name "}"\cr - "\author{" author name "}"\cr - "\title{" title for the document "}"\cr -\noalign{\smallbreak} - "\section{Introduction}"\cr - introduction\cr -\noalign{\smallbreak} - "\section{File identification}"\cr - "\code"\cr - " \|\% " file name "\fileversion~\filedate~--" one line desc\cr - " |"\cr - " |%%%@TeX-definition-file {"\cr - " " header comments for macro file\cr - " |%%%}"\cr - " |"\cr - " \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}"\cr - " |"\cr - "\endcode"\cr -\noalign{\smallbreak}% - definitions and commentary\cr -\noalign{\smallbreak}% - "\endcodefile"\cr - "\enddocument"\cr - "\bye"\cr -}$$ - -\subsec{Commands in code sections} - - Code sections start with |\code| and end with |\endcode|. Before - the first |\code| you must do |\codefile{|\<file name>|}| to - specify the file. - - Vertical mode material may be used between lines (e.g., - |\smallbreaks|). Unexpanded code lines are introduced with "|", - expanded lines with "\|". In expanded lines, use "\{", "\}", - "\\", "\%", "\~" for those characters, "~" for a single space. - -\subsec{Commands in commentary} - - Most of the commentary will be typeset using the conventions of - plain \TeX. - - |\author{|\<text>|}| (must precede |\title|) - - |\title{|\<heading>|}| - - |\section{|\<heading>|}| - - |\subsec{|\<heading>|}| - - |\noindenttrue| - - |\footnote| - - |\defverbatim|\<one-character control sequence> - - |$|\<number>|\mm$| |$|\<number>|\em$| |$|\<number>|\pt$| - |$|\<number>|\inch$| - - |\<|\<name>|>| |\cs{|\<name>|}| - |\arg{|\<argument name>|}| - - |\TeX| |\LaTeX| |\LaTeX~2e| - - |\notepar| \<paragraph> |\endnotepar| - - -%}}} using pdccode -%{{{ file identification -\section{File identification} - - Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the - file. -\code \catcode`\"=12 - \|\% pdccode.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- self-documenting TeX macros - | - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "Macros for documented TeX macros (DTX files). - |%%% This file was generated by running - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\} - | -\endcode -%}}} file id - -\bigskip\noindent - We start by making a nickname for a scratch register. This is - |\toks@| in plain \TeX; this definition gives it a name I~can - use without catcode hackery. -\code - |\toksdef\toksa=0 -\endcode - -%{{{ rcs support - -\section{RCS Support} - - RCS (Revision Control System) is a free source code control - system which is available from the Free Software Foundation. - It inserts keyword-value pairs enclosed in dollar signs into the - source code. This command extracts the file's version, date, - author and locker (if there is one). It is used like this: -$$\centerline{\vbox{\tt\def~{\char32 \ignorespaces} - \halign{#\hfil\cr - \cs{rcs}\$Id:~\<name>,v~\<version>~\<date>~\<ignored>\quad\cr - \hfill~\<author>~\<ignored>~{\rm[}\<locker>~{\rm]}\$\cs{endrcs}\cr -}}} $$ - The \<locker> field is non-empty iff the file is `locked' - (meaning it has been edited and the changes are not checked in - yet). The |\filename| macro is defined, even though it will - almost certainly be identical to |\jobname|. -\code - |\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8$#9\endrcs{ - | \def\filename{#2} - | \def\fileversion{#3} - | \def\filedate{#4} - | \def\fileauthor{#6} - | \def\filelocker{#8} - |} -\endcode - -%}}} rcs support -%{{{ verbatim text -\section{Verbatim text} - - Verbatim text is text that is printed identically to the - characters in the manuscript file. In the code sections, a - vertical bar is used to make lines for the code file. In the - documentation, the vertical bar is used as a self-matching - verbatim mode character. - - These definitions should be the same as the corresponding code - in |pdcfmt2.dtx|. - -\subsec{Lists of active characters} - - The verbatim text macros need to know if any characters have - been made special apart from the usual ones. This command tells - the verbatim macros that |#1| is an active char; in addition to - setting its catcode, this makes sure that the character will be - re-catcoded appropriately when in verbatim mode. |#1| should be - a something that will work after `|`|'; usually this means a - one-character control sequence. -\code - |\def\declareactivechar#1{% - | \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}% - | \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }% - | \catcode`#1\active - |} -\endcode - - Two list macros in the style of |\dospecials| are defined. The - first is for characters that must be set to catcode~12, such as - `|\|', `|{|', `|}|', `|_|', `|$|', `|#|', `|&|', and `|%|'. The - other is for a few characters that are given catcode~13, such as - `|`|', `|'|', `|~|', `|^|' and SP. -\code - |\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%} - |\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ } -\smallbreak - |\chardef\other=12 -\endcode - -\subsec{Setting up verbatim mode} - - This is a macro common to various verbatim text modes. The - default spacing of whatever font is used, without any - adjustments of spacefactor for punctuation. The characters - `|`|', `|'|', `|~|', and `|^|' produce slightly lowered glyphs. -\code - |\newtoks\everyverbatim -\smallbreak - |\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup - | \def\setupverbatim{% - | \frenchspacing - | \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font - | \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains - | \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives - | \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq - | \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum - | \the\everyverbatim - | } - |}\the\toksa -\endcode - - Here are the definitions for the munged glyphs. These are only - necessary in CM-Typewriter-like fonts; using something - like Courier, these definitions could probably be omitted. - - The names `rq' and `lq' are based on the use of |\lq| and |\rq| - in plain \TeX. An alternative definition for |\ttrq| would be - |\chardef\ttrq=13|, producing `{\tt\char13 }'. -\code - |\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }} - |\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }} - |\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }} - |\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }} -\endcode - This makes the difference between |`'^~| and - {\tt`'\char`\^\char`\~}.\footnote*{It turns out that on some - \TeX\ systems, the CMTT font has been hacked to have an - ASCII-style reverse-apostrohe-cum-grave-accent as character~96 - and a matching apostrophe-cum-acute-accent as charcter~39, - thereby correcting the defects that my definitions of |\ttlq| - and |\ttrq| address. But such modified fonts are - nonstandard---they should {\it not} be called CMTT---and should - be replaced.} - -\subsec{Defining a self-matching character for verbatim text} - - A macro for defining a self-matching verbatim character (I~got - the idea of a macro for declaring verbatim characters from the - \LaTeX~2e documentation macros). |#1| must be a one-character - control sequence. If it isn't active already, then - |\declareactivechar| is applied to it first. -\code - |\def\defverbatim#1{% - | \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi - | \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup - | \def~{% - | \leavevmode - | \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim - | \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup - | }% - | }}\the\toksa - |} -\endcode - Note that there must be a font called |\tt| for it to switch to. - (The catcode of |#1| is set to 13 after calling |\setupverbatim| - because |#1| will be included in |\verbatimplains|.) - - Finally, we define vertical bar as the conventional - self-matching verbatim-mode character. -\code - |\defverbatim\| -\smallbreak - |\hyphenchar\tentt=-1 -\endcode - Both |\defverbatim| and |\defineactivechar| have local scope. - -%}}} verbatim text -%{{{ code sections -%{{{ intro -\section{Code sections} - - The markers |\code| \dots |\endcode| mark code to be written to - the definition file. Each line starts with either "|" or "\|" - and finishes with the end of the line in the manuscript file. - - Lines that start with "|" are written out as-is; no macro - expansion is allowed. This is how the vast majority of lines - are done. - - Lines starting "\|" are expanded. This is so that things like - the current version ID (extracted from the RCS identification - line or set with |\def|) may be included in the code file. - Within such an expanded line, the following macros are defined: - $$\halign{\indent#\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr - |\%|& |%|& per cent sign& - |\{|& |{|& left brace& - |\}|& |}|& right brace\cr - |\\|& |\|& backslash& - |~|& \tt\char32 & space& - |\~|& |~|& tilde\cr - } - $$ - (This list is probably incomplete.) -%}}} intro -%{{{ code file name - -\subsec{Setting the codefile name} - - Before the first code section, the |\codefile{|\<file name>|}| - command specifies the code file. The last code section should - be followed by |\endcodefile|. Only one code file may be open - at a time. -\code - |\newwrite\CODEwrite -\smallbreak - |\def\codefile#1{ - | \ifeof\CODEwrite\else \endcodefile \fi - | \def\thecodefile{#1} \openout\CODEwrite=#1 - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endcodefile{ - | \message{Code written on \thecodefile.} - | \closeout\CODEwrite - |} -\endcode -%}}} code file name -%{{{ code sections - -\subsec{Code sections} - - Switching to `code mode' is easy, because most of the work is - really done by the "|" and "\|" commands. - -\code - |\def\code{ - | \smallskip - | \begingroup - | \let|\CODEline \let\|\CODElinex - | \let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash - | \def~{ } \let\~\CODEtilde - | \the\everycode - | \obeylines - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endcode{ - | \smallbreak - | \endgroup - |} -\endcode -%}}} code sections -%{{{ code lines -\subsec{Code lines} - - This is the definition for unexpanded code lines. -\code - |\def\CODEline{% - | \begingroup % matched by \CODElinei - | \setupverbatim \catcode`\|\other - | \CODElinei - |} -\endcode - - In |\CODElinei|, We must redefine the characters (such as |`|) - that are active within verbatim text to expand to their - catcode-12 equivalents when they are written to the code file - currectly. - - Since one of these is |^|, we temporarily give |@| the meaning - of |^| so that we may safely change the catcode of |^|. -\code - |\begingroup\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active - | \catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=\active - | \catcode\lq\@@M=\active \toksa={\endgroup % - | \def\CODElinei#1@@M{% - | \begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq % - | \let^\CODEcircum \let~ \CODEtilde% - | \edef\tmp{#1}% - | \write\CODEwrite\expandafter{\tmp}% - | \endgroup % - | \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par % - | \endgroup % matches \CODEline - | }% - |}\the\toksa -\endcode - - The definition for |\CODElinex| (expanded code lines) is much - simpler: -\code - |\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=13 \toksa={\endgroup % - | \def\CODElinex#1^^M{% - | \edef\tmp{\write\CODEwrite{#1}}\tmp % - | {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}% - | }% - |} \the\toksa -\endcode -%}}} code lines -%{{{ catcode hacks -\subsec{Macros for making category-12 characters} - - For characters that are active in verbatim mode (like |`|), or - which must be specially generated in expanded code lines (such - as braces generated with {\tt\cs{\char123 }}), we have a - `|\CODE|-' macro that generates an explicit character token with - catcode~12. - -\code - |\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=\other /toksa={/endgroup - | /def/CODEbslash{\} - |}/the/toksa -\smallbreak - |\begingroup\catcode`\^=\other \toksa={\endgroup - | \def\CODEcircum{^} - |}\the\toksa -\smallbreak - |\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup - | \def\CODEtilde{~} - |}\the\toksa -\smallbreak - |\begingroup\catcode`\%=\other \toksa={\endgroup - | \def\%{%} - |}\the\toksa -\smallbreak - |\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup - | \def\CODEtilde{~} - |}\the\toksa -\smallbreak - |\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2 - | \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other - | \toksa=[\endgroup - | \def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}] - |]\the\toksa -\endcode -%}}} catcode hacks -%{{{ customization -\subsec{Customization} - - The token list register |\everycode| is expanded at the start of - every code section, the token list register |\everycodeline| at - the start of every code line. The default definitions select - typewriter font for the code listings, with each line numbered. -\code - |\newtoks\everycode - |\newtoks\everycodeline -\smallbreak - |\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt } -\smallbreak - |\newcount\lineno - |\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1 - | \scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}% - | \mark\expandafter{\the\lineno}} -\endcode -%}}} customization -%}}} code sections -%{{{ formating -%{{{ intro -\section{Layout} - - The PDCCODE macros include enough basic formatting commands to - make a simple document---since this file needs to be - self-contained. The formatting is fairly primitive, so that - |pdccode.tex| will not be excessively long. - - The text is set in the default plain \TeX\ fonts: 10-point - Computer Modern Roman. Titles are in CM Sans Serif Bold - Extended, headings in CMSS Demibold Condensed, and subheadings - in CMSS Italic: all of these are standard fonts which should be - available on all \TeX\ systems. - - The line width is wide enough that code lines do not need to be - printed in a reduced font (which looks silly). - - the first tokenm of a document is |\relax| and everything except - the initial |\input| and final |\bye| in the document is - enclosed in |\document|\dots|\enddocument|. This is so that - documents using the PDCCODE conventions can be embedded within a - another document which by redefining these tokens. -\code - |\let\document\relax \let\enddocument\relax -\endcode - - I have to set some \TeX~3 parameters because we don't seem to - have definitions for them in the local version of |plain.tex|. -\code - |\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2 \errorcontextlines10000 -\endcode - -%}}} intro -%{{{ layout -\subsec{Layout} - - The text width is wide enough for 72-character code lines. -\code - |\parindent=2em \hsize=36\fontdimen6\tentt \advance\hsize\parindent -\endcode - A largish left margin is used set---perhaps readers will find it - useful for writing comments. -\code - |\hoffset=210mm \advance\hoffset-\hsize \advance\hoffset-25mm - |\newdimen\leftmargin \leftmargin=\hoffset \advance\leftmargin-25mm - |\advance\hoffset-1in -\endcode - - The vertical margins are set so that if the file is formatted - for A4 ($297\mm$) paper and fed into a driver which thinks it is - formatted for American Letter ($11\inch$) paper no information - will be lost. We allow for $7\mm$ unprintable area at the edges - of paper (this is reasonable for a laser printer), and for the - headline being $24\pt + 6\pt - 10\pt = 20\pt$ above the top of - the text. (The $6\pt$ allows for the height of the headline, - which is in 7-pt type.) -\code - |\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset-11in - |\advance\voffset7mm \advance\voffset20pt - |\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip - |\advance\voffset-1in -\endcode - - We use ragged-right (ranged-left) printing. (Readability - studies have indicated that ragged-right printing is, if - anything, easier to read than with both sides aligned.) To do - this we remove the stretch and shrink components of the font we - use, and make the right margin stretchable. -\code - |\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt } - |\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf -\smallbreak - |\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt \adjdemerits=0 \tolerance=500 - |\parfillskip=0pt plus 0.8\hsize -\endcode -%}}} layout -%{{{ title and headline -\subsec{Title and headline} - - The author and title info are printed at the top of the first - page---in lieu of a separate title page---and the title goes in - the headline of subsequent pages, followed by the version ID and - date as extracted from the RCS identification string. If the - file locker is non-empty (i.e., the file is being edited), an - `e' is appended to the version ID in the headline. -\code - |\def\author#1{\def\theauthor{#1}} \author{P. Damian Cugley} -\smallbreak - |\font\titlefont=cmssbx10 scaled \magstep3 -\smallbreak - |\def\title#1{ - | \vglue2\baselineskip - | \begingroup \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000 \titlefont - | #1\smallskip - | \endgroup - | \leftline{Version \fileversion, - | last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate} - | \ifx\filelocker\empty\else - | \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today} - | \fi - | \medskip - | \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule - | \medskip - | \rightline{\theauthor} - | \bigskip - | \headline{\hfil\global\headline{% - | \sevenbf \hskip-\leftmargin \themarks \hfil #1 - | \fileversion - | \ifx\filelocker\empty - | \space\mungedate\filedate - | \else - | e\space\today - | \fi - | }} - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\themarks{% - | \ifx\firstmark\empty\else - | \firstmark - | \ifx\firstmark\botmark \else --\botmark \fi - | \fi - |} -\endcode - - Some macros for printing the date. The |\mungedate| macro - converts from RCS's format (using slashes) to ISO format (using - short dashes). -\code - |\def\today{\mungedate{\number\year/\twodigits\month/\twodigits\day}} - |\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1} - |\def\mungedate#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`/="7B #1 $} -\endcode - -%}}} title and author -%{{{ sectioning -\subsec{Sectioning} - - The sectioning commands do no more than generate numbered - headings---there are no tables of contents or marks required. -\code - |\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt - |\font\subsecfont=cmssi10 -\smallbreak - |\newcount\seccount - |\newcount\subseccount -\smallbreak - |\def\section#1{% - | \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0 - | \bigbreak - | \begingroup - | \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000 - | \rightskip=0pt plus 2em - | \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}#1 - | \medskip - | \endgroup - | \noindenttrue - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\subsec#1{% - | \advance\subseccount1 - | \medbreak - | \begingroup - | \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000 - | \rightskip=0pt plus 2em - | \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.% - | \number\subseccount.\enspace}#1 - | \nobreak\smallskip - | \endgroup - | \noindenttrue - |} -\endcode - - Here's a simple hack to remove the indentation of the first - paragraph following a section heading. -\code - |\newif\ifnoindent -\smallbreak - |\everypar{% - | \ifnoindent - | {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse - | \fi - |} -\endcode - -%}}} sectioning -%{{{ footnotes -\subsec{Footnotes} - - Plain \TeX's footnote command is adjusted to use a new parameter - to specify the value of |\rightskip| in footnotes.\footnote*{The - default definition sets |\rightskip| to $0\pt$, which is - moderately disastrous given that spaces cannot stretch or - shrink.} It was the trickiness involved in changing definitions - like this that persuaded me to not use `|@|' characters in macro - files. -\code - |\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip -\smallbreak - |\catcode`@=11 - |\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup - | \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty - | \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes - | \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM - | \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip - | \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm - | \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t} - |\catcode`@=11 -\endcode - This definition is a drop-in replacement for the one in {\it\TeX - book} Appendix~B (p.\thinspace363 in my copy). - -%}}} footnotes -%{{{ abbrevs -\subsec{Miscellaneous abbreviations} - - The |\<| macro for writing the names of syntactic entities (as - \<foo>) is like in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~E. The |\cs| macro - prints a control sequence name; I use this where the easier - dodge of writing "|\foo|" won't work (e.g., in the argument to - another macro). Similarly |\arg| places its argument in - typewriter-style braces. The |\pt| macro works in maths mode. -\code - |\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}} - |\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}} - |\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}} - |\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} \def\em{\,{\rm em}} \def\mm{\,{\rm mm}} - |\def\inch{''} -\endcode - - To make a version of the \LaTeX\ logo that should work - acceptably with a range of fonts ({\it\LaTeX}, {\bf\LaTeX}, - {\subsecfont\LaTeX}), I~first define a macro for raising letters - until they are flush with the prevailing cap height. I also - loosen up the `{\it\TeX}\/' logo (so that it also works with - sanserif fonts) and make it set the spacefactor to 1000 (to - override \TeX's assumption that a full stop following a capital - $X$ isn't the end of a sentence). -\code - |\def\flushtop#1{% - | \leavevmode - | \begingroup - | \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}% - | \dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0 - | \raise\dimen0 \box0 - | \endgroup - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em \lower0.5ex \hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 } - |\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.1em \flushtop{a}\TeX} -\endcode - - Occasional paragraphs are written in italics and marked with - `note'. -\notepar - The command says `notepar' not just `note' because in my macro - files I~use \/|\note| for numbered footnotes (\/{\rm \TeX book}, - Exercise~15.12).\footnote*{Footnotes in |dtx| files are produced - with the plain |\footnote| command.} - - Notes may occasionally be more than one paragraph long. -\endnotepar -\code - |\def\notepar{ - | \smallskip - | \begingroup - | \leftskip2\parindent \advance\rightskip\parindent minus \parindent - | \noindent\kern-\parindent{\bf Note}\quad\it - | \ignorespaces - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endnotepar{ - | \smallbreak - | \endgroup - |} -\endcode -%}}} abbrevs -%}}} formatting - -\bigskip\noindent - The file is finished with an |\endinput| command; this can be - used by other prgorams to check that this file hasn't been - truncated by \TeX\ coming to a halt part-way through processing - the |dtx| file. -\code - |\endinput -\endcode -\endcodefile -\enddocument -\bye -%}}} pdccode - -%Local variables: -%fill-prefix: " " -%fold-folded-p: t -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex deleted file mode 100644 index aaeb25e3ea9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,263 +0,0 @@ -% pdccode.tex 1.6 1995/03/30 -- self-documenting TeX macros - -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex", -%%% version = "1.6", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Macros for documented TeX macros (DTX files). -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdccode.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdccode.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } - -\message{1.6 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\toksdef\toksa=0 -\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8$#9\endrcs{ - \def\filename{#2} - \def\fileversion{#3} - \def\filedate{#4} - \def\fileauthor{#6} - \def\filelocker{#8} -} -\def\declareactivechar#1{% - \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}% - \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }% - \catcode`#1\active -} -\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%} -\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ } -\chardef\other=12 -\newtoks\everyverbatim -\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup - \def\setupverbatim{% - \frenchspacing - \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font - \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains - \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives - \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq - \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum - \the\everyverbatim - } -}\the\toksa -\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }} -\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }} -\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }} -\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }} -\def\defverbatim#1{% - \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi - \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup - \def~{% - \leavevmode - \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim - \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup - }% - }}\the\toksa -} -\defverbatim\| -\hyphenchar\tentt=-1 -\newwrite\CODEwrite -\def\codefile#1{ - \ifeof\CODEwrite\else \endcodefile \fi - \def\thecodefile{#1} \openout\CODEwrite=#1 -} -\def\endcodefile{ - \message{Code written on \thecodefile.} - \closeout\CODEwrite -} -\def\code{ - \smallskip - \begingroup - \let|\CODEline \let\|\CODElinex - \let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash - \def~{ } \let\~\CODEtilde - \the\everycode - \obeylines -} -\def\endcode{ - \smallbreak - \endgroup -} -\def\CODEline{% - \begingroup % matched by \CODElinei - \setupverbatim \catcode`\|\other - \CODElinei -} -\begingroup\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active - \catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=\active - \catcode\lq\@@M=\active \toksa={\endgroup % - \def\CODElinei#1@@M{% - \begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq % - \let^\CODEcircum \let~ \CODEtilde% - \edef\tmp{#1}% - \write\CODEwrite\expandafter{\tmp}% - \endgroup % - \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par % - \endgroup % matches \CODEline - }% -}\the\toksa -\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=13 \toksa={\endgroup % - \def\CODElinex#1^^M{% - \edef\tmp{\write\CODEwrite{#1}}\tmp % - {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}% - }% -} \the\toksa -\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=\other /toksa={/endgroup - /def/CODEbslash{\} -}/the/toksa -\begingroup\catcode`\^=\other \toksa={\endgroup - \def\CODEcircum{^} -}\the\toksa -\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup - \def\CODEtilde{~} -}\the\toksa -\begingroup\catcode`\%=\other \toksa={\endgroup - \def\%{%} -}\the\toksa -\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup - \def\CODEtilde{~} -}\the\toksa -\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2 - \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other - \toksa=[\endgroup - \def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}] -]\the\toksa -\newtoks\everycode -\newtoks\everycodeline -\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt } -\newcount\lineno -\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1 - \scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}% - \mark\expandafter{\the\lineno}} -\let\document\relax \let\enddocument\relax -\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2 \errorcontextlines10000 -\parindent=2em \hsize=36\fontdimen6\tentt \advance\hsize\parindent -\hoffset=210mm \advance\hoffset-\hsize \advance\hoffset-25mm -\newdimen\leftmargin \leftmargin=\hoffset \advance\leftmargin-25mm -\advance\hoffset-1in -\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset-11in -\advance\voffset7mm \advance\voffset20pt -\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip -\advance\voffset-1in -\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt } -\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt \adjdemerits=0 \tolerance=500 -\parfillskip=0pt plus 0.8\hsize -\def\author#1{\def\theauthor{#1}} \author{P. Damian Cugley} -\font\titlefont=cmssbx10 scaled \magstep3 -\def\title#1{ - \vglue2\baselineskip - \begingroup \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000 \titlefont - #1\smallskip - \endgroup - \leftline{Version \fileversion, - last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate} - \ifx\filelocker\empty\else - \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today} - \fi - \medskip - \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule - \medskip - \rightline{\theauthor} - \bigskip - \headline{\hfil\global\headline{% - \sevenbf \hskip-\leftmargin \themarks \hfil #1 - \fileversion - \ifx\filelocker\empty - \space\mungedate\filedate - \else - e\space\today - \fi - }} -} -\def\themarks{% - \ifx\firstmark\empty\else - \firstmark - \ifx\firstmark\botmark \else --\botmark \fi - \fi -} -\def\today{\mungedate{\number\year/\twodigits\month/\twodigits\day}} -\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1} -\def\mungedate#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`/="7B #1 $} -\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt -\font\subsecfont=cmssi10 -\newcount\seccount -\newcount\subseccount -\def\section#1{% - \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0 - \bigbreak - \begingroup - \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000 - \rightskip=0pt plus 2em - \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}#1 - \medskip - \endgroup - \noindenttrue -} -\def\subsec#1{% - \advance\subseccount1 - \medbreak - \begingroup - \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000 - \rightskip=0pt plus 2em - \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.% - \number\subseccount.\enspace}#1 - \nobreak\smallskip - \endgroup - \noindenttrue -} -\newif\ifnoindent -\everypar{% - \ifnoindent - {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse - \fi -} -\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip -\catcode`@=11 -\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup - \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty - \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes - \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM - \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip - \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm - \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t} -\catcode`@=11 -\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}} -\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}} -\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}} -\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} \def\em{\,{\rm em}} \def\mm{\,{\rm mm}} -\def\inch{''} -\def\flushtop#1{% - \leavevmode - \begingroup - \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}% - \dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0 - \raise\dimen0 \box0 - \endgroup -} -\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em \lower0.5ex \hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 } -\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.1em \flushtop{a}\TeX} -\def\notepar{ - \smallskip - \begingroup - \leftskip2\parindent \advance\rightskip\parindent minus \parindent - \noindent\kern-\parindent{\bf Note}\quad\it - \ignorespaces -} -\def\endnotepar{ - \smallbreak - \endgroup -} -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 62bb283ff3f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,292 +0,0 @@ -%{{{ pdccode.tex -- used to make self-documenting TeX code -%{{{ rcs - -%%% version: $Revision: 1.2 $ - -% A simpler and less featureful system than the LaTeX "doc" package is used. -% Lines between \code and \endcode are printed to a file -% set with the \codefile{xx} command. They are also listed -% "verbatim" - -\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endrcs{ - \def\filename{#2} - \def\fileversion{#3} - \def\filedate{#4} - \def\fileauthor{#6} -} - -\rcs$Id: pdccode.tex,v 1.2 1994/12/03 16:26:00 pdc Exp pdc $\endrcs -\message{\fileversion\space<\fileauthor\space\filedate>} -%}}} rcs -%{{{ misc macros - -\errorcontextlines10000 -\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname} -\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand} - -%}}} misc macros -%{{{ verbatim text - -%% Define verbatim text using |...| -% This is used in the commentary - -% Tell the verbatim macros that #1 is an active char; this -% makes sure that the character will be catcoded appropriately -% when in verbatim mode. #1 should be a somethign that will -% wortk after "`". -\def\declareactivechar#1{% - \toks0=\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}% - \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toks0 }% - \catcode`#1=13 -} - -\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%} % \{}_$#&% -\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ } % `'~^<space> - -% \setupverbatim -- makes almost all special characters catcode 12 -% except for ` ' ~ ^, which produce slightly lowered glyphs -\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toks0={\egroup - \def\setupverbatim{% - \frenchspacing - \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font - \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1=12 }\verbatimplains - \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1=13 }\verbatimactives - \let`=\ttlq \let'=\ttrq - \let~=\tttilde \let^=\ttcircum - \the\everyverbatim - \hyphenchar\font=-1 - } -}\the\toks0 - -\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }} -\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }} -\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }} -\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }} - -\newtoks\everyverbatim % expanded at start of every verbatim text - - -% Define #1 as a self-matching verbatim character. -% #1 must be a one-char control-sequence -\def\defverbatim#1{% - \declareactivechar#1 - \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toks0={\endgroup - \def~{% - \leavevmode - \begingroup % matched by closing char - \tt - \setupverbatim - \catcode`#1=13 \let~=\endgroup - }% - }}\the\toks0 -} - -\declareactivechar\| \defverbatim\| -%}}} verbatim text -%{{{ writing code sections - -% \docodefiles is \do{xx}\do{yy} for a set of file identifiers -% Each file identifier xx has \ifxx, \xxfalse, \xxtrue, \xxwrite -% I am greatly hampered by the fact that \newwrite and \newif are \outer! -\def\docodefiles{} - -\def\codefile#1#2{ - \toks0=\expandafter{\docodefiles\do{#1}} - \edef\docodefiles{\the\toks0 } - \expcs\CODEnewwrite{#1write} - \CODEnewif{#1} \csname#1true\endcsname - \expcs\openout{#1write}=#2 - \expcs\def{filename#1}{#2} -} -\catcode`@=11 -\def\CODEnewwrite#1{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n #1} -\catcode`@=12 -\def\CODEnewif#1{% - \expcs\edef{#1true}{\let\noexpcs{if#1}\noexpand\iftrue} - \expcs\edef{#1false}{\let\noexpcs{if#1}\noexpand\iffalse} - \csname#1false\endcsname -} - -\def\allfilesfalse{\begingroup - \def\do##1{\global\csname##1false\endcsname}\docodefiles - \endgroup -} -\def\allfilestrue{\begingroup - \def\do##1{\global\csname##1true\endcsname}\docodefiles - \endgroup -} - - -\def\endcodefile#1{ - \expcs\closeout{#1write} - \csname #1false\endcsname - \message{Code written to \csname filename#1\endcsname.} -} - -\def\code{ - \smallskip - \begingroup - \let|\CODEline % code line without expansion - \let\|\CODElinex % code line with expansion - \let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash \def~{ } - \the\everycode - \obeylines -} -\def\endcode{ - \smallbreak - \endgroup -} -\def\CODEline{% - \begingroup - \setupverbatim - \catcode`\|=12 - \CODElinei -} - - -% In \CODFElinei, We must redefine the characters that are active -% within verbatim text to expand to their catcode-12 equivalents when -% they are written to the code file. Since one of these is ^, we -% temporarily give @ the meaning of ^ so that we may safely munge the -% catcode of ^. - -\begingroup \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 - \catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=13 - \catcode\lq\@@M=13 \toks0={\endgroup% - \def\CODElinei#1@@M{% - \begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq \let^\CODEcircum \let~\CODEtilde % - \edef\tmp{{#1}}% - \def\do##1{\csname if##1\endcsname % - \expcs\write{##1write}\tmp \fi % - }\docodefiles % - \endgroup - \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par % - \endgroup % - }% - \def\CODElinex#1@@M{% - \def\do##1{\csname if##1\endcsname % - \edef\filename{\csname filename##1\endcsname} % - \edef\tmp{{#1}} % - \expcs\write{##1write}\tmp \fi % - }\docodefiles % - \def\filename{\<filename>}% - {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}% - }% -}\the\toks0 - -% Make macros which expand to various special characters, with catcode 12: -\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=12 /toks0={/endgroup - /def/CODEbslash{\} -}/the/toks0 -\begingroup\catcode`\^=12 \toks0={\endgroup - \def\CODEcircum{^} -}\the\toks0 -\begingroup\catcode`\~=12 \toks0={\endgroup - \def\CODEtilde{~} -}\the\toks0 -\begingroup\catcode`\%=12 \toks0={\endgroup - \def\%{%} -}\the\toks0 -\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2 \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12 \toks0=[\endgroup - \def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}] -]\the\toks0 -\newtoks\everycode -\newtoks\everycodeline - -\def\filenamesanssuffix{\expandafter\CODEsanssuffix\filename.\CODEsanssuffix} -\def\CODEsanssuffix#1.#2\CODEsanssuffix{#1} -%}}} writing code sections -%{{{ layout - - -\newcount\seccount -\newcount\subseccount -\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt -\font\subsecfont=cmssi10 - -\def\section#1{% - \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0 - \bigbreak - \begingroup - \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000 - \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em - \number\seccount. #1 - \medskip - \endgroup -} - -\def\subsec#1{% - \advance\subseccount1 - \medbreak - \begingroup - \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000 - \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em - \number\seccount.\number\subseccount. #1 - \nobreak\smallskip - \endgroup -} - -\def\notepar{ - \smallskip - \begingroup - \narrower\noindent\hang - {\bf Note}\quad\it - \ignorespaces -} -\def\endnotepar{ - \smallbreak - \endgroup -} - -% Leave a largish right margin; eventually marginalia will go -% there. Allow enough line length for 80-character code lines. This -% makes the text lines a bit longer than I'd like but I don't want to -% have to resort to having code lines in a smaller font. -\hsize=40em \advance\hsize\parindent - -% (297mm-11in) is the strip of paper lost if printed on USA -% letter paper; allow another bit for some laserprinters that -% can't print to the edge of the paper. -\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset by -11in \advance\voffset by 0.25in -\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip -\advance\voffset-1in - -\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt } -\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf - -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt -\tolerance=500 -\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2 - -%}}} layout -%{{{ abbrevs - -\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}} -\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}} -\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}} -\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} -\def\flushtop#1{% - \leavevmode - {% - \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}% - \dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0 - \raise\dimen0 \box0 - }% -} -\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X} -\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.167em\flushtop{a}\TeX} - -%}}} abbrev -\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip -\catcode`@=11 -\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup - \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty - \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes - \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM - \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip - \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm - \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t} -\catcode`@=11 - - -%}}} pdccode.tex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def deleted file mode 100644 index 0061070fd79..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ -% pdcdoc.def 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "pdcdoc.def", -%%% version = "1.2", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Sectioning macros for style files. -%%% This macro file was generated by running plain -%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "" -%%%} - -\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm -\botmg=\topmg -\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip -\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi -\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi -\setpaper{210mm}{297mm} -\setnkgrid{4}{3} -\colrule=0pt -\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep -\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt - \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi} -\everyfootnote={\notefonts} -\everylinenum={\smallfonts} -\everylinenum={\smallfonts} -\everytag={\bf} -\newcount\partno -\def\thepartno{% - \ifcase\partno O\or I\or II\or III\or IV\or V\else - \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\partno}% - \fi -} -\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno \newcount\subsubsecno -\def\thesecno{% - \n{% - \number\secno - \ifnum\subsecno>0 - .\number\subsecno - \ifnum\subsubsecno>0 - .\number\subsubsecno - \fi - \fi - }% -} -\newtoks\majorheadline -\expandafter\majorheadline - \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}} -\def\part#1{% - \global\advance\partno1 - \newpageheading{2\baselineskip}{\headingfonts} - {}{\thepartno.\quad#1} - \TOCwrite\TOCentrypart{\thepartno}{#1} -} -\newcount\sectionpenalty -\def\sectionheading#1{ - \par - \vskip 0pt plus 0.3\vsize - \penalty\sectionpenalty \sectionpenalty-200 - \vskip 1\bigskipamount plus -0.3\vsize - \begingroup \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin - \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt - \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=500 - \interlinepenalty=100 - \headingfonts \nointerlineskip - \hbox{\hskip-\leftmargin - \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \leftmargin - \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \hsize} - #1\par - \nobreak\smallskip - \endgroup - \global\noindenttrue -} -\newtoks\sectiontoks -\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue -\def\section#1{ - \ifsecno - \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0 \global\subsubsecno0 - \fi - \toks0={#1} - \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\ifsecno\S\thesecno\space\fi\the\toks0 }} - \edef\tmp{\ifsecno\noexpand\S\the\secno\space\fi} - \global\sectiontoks\expandafter{\tmp#1} - \sectionheading{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi #1} - \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\the\sectiontoks}} - \TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1} -} -\def\subsec#1{% - \ifsecno \global\advance\subsecno1 \global\subsubsecno0 \fi - \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts}{} - {\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1} - \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1} -} -\def\subsubsec#1{% - \ifsecno \global\advance\subsubsecno+1 \fi - \doheading\smallskipamount{\rm}{}{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1} - \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1} -} -\newif\ifnoheadline -\newif\iftwosided -\footline={% - \ifnoheadline - \global\noheadlinefalse - \hfil\bodyfonts\n\folio\hfil - \else - \hfil - \fi -} -\headline={% - \ifnoheadline - \hfil - \else - \bodyfonts - \iftwosided - \ifodd\pageno - \hfil - \expandafter\firstoftwo\botmark\quad - {\bf\n\folio}% - \else - {\bf\n\folio}\quad - \the\majorheadline - \hfil - \fi - \else - \the\majorheadline - \hfil - \expandafter\secondoftwo\topmark\quad - {\bf\n\folio}% - \fi - \fi -} -\def\firstoftwo#1#2{#1} -\def\secondoftwo#1{} -\newwrite\TOCfile -\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc -\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{% - \begingroup\def\n{\string\n} - \def\tmp{#3}% - \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}} - \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup -} -\def\TOCtrim#1:->{} -\def\TOCentrypart#1#2#3{ - \smallskip - \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0\leftmargin - \moveleft\leftmargin\hbox to\dimen0{\strut\bf #1. #2\hfil} - \smallskip -} -\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{ - \smallskip\noindent\llap{#1\kern1pc}% - {\bf \ignorespaces #2\quad\rm \n{#3}}\par -} -\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{ - \ifvmode \noindent \else \quad \fi - {#1}~{\ignorespaces #2} -} -\def\TOCentrysubsubsec#1#2#3{} -\def\frontmatter{ - \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput} - \write\TOCfile{\folio} - \closeout\TOCfile - \vfill\supereject - \ifvoid\partialpage\else \null\vfill\eject \fi - \beginthe{frontmatter} - \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \noheadlinetrue - \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{} -} -\def\endfrontmatter{ - \section{Contents} - \input\jobname.toc - \vfill\supereject - \endthe{frontmatter} -} -\def\titlepage{ - \vfill\eject - \beginthe{titlepage} - \noheadlinetrue - \def\splittitlepage{ - \iftwosided \vfill\eject\null\vfill \else \vfill \fi - } -} -\def\endtitlepage{ - \eject - \endthe{titlepage} -} -\def\abstract{ - \smallskip - \beginthe{abstract} - \setbox\parbox\hbox to \gridwd{\subheadingfonts Abstract\hfil} - \noindenttrue \bodyfonts -} -\def\endabstract{ - \smallskip - \endthe{abstract} -} -\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} -\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}} -\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-% - {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}} -\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}} -\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 } -\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup - \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}} -} \the\toks0 -\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}} -\def\|{% - \relax\ifmmode - \Vert - \else - \begingroup - \ttb \setupverbatim - \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup - \fi -} -\def\inputifexists#1{% - \openin15=#1 - \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi - \closein15 -} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 6d8c5c78af2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1194 +0,0 @@ -% pdcfmt2.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcfmt2.tex -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "PDCFMT2 -- Formatting Macros", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 2.4 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/04/06 11:55:16 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX definitions file pdcfmt2.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ pdcfmt2 -%{{{ preamble - -\relax -\input pdccode -\document -\rcs$Id: pdcfmt2.dtx,v 2.4 1995/04/06 11:55:16 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\def\example{ - \smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip - \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0-1pc \divide\dimen0 2 - \halign to \hsize\bgroup\vtop{\tt\def~{\hfil\break} \def\\{\char`\\\relax} \hsize=\dimen0 ##}\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil& - \vtop{\hsize=\dimen0 ##}\tabskip=0pt\cr -} -\def\endexample{ - \crcr\egroup - \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\smallskip -} - -\codefile{pdcfmt2.tex} -%}}} preamble -%{{{ introduction - -\author{P. Damian Cugley} -\title{PDCFMT2---Formatting Macros} -\section{Introduction} - - This document describes |pdcfmt2.tex|, a collection of - formatting macros for plain \TeX\ documents. For example, it - defines commands for making bulleted lists, verbatim text, and - generic headings. For longer documents, a higher-level `style - file' like |pdccmdoc.tex| will define commands to start sections - and generate a table of contents and so on. - - The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in - |pdcfmt2.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The - \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for - similar purposes.} which, when processed by plain \TeX, - generates a fresh copy of |pdcfmt2.tex| in the current directory - in addition to the |dvi| file. This ensures that the printed - documentation and the code it describes are identical. The - |dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|. - - The name of the macros file ends in `-|2|' to prevent confusion - with |pdcfmt.tex| version 1.1.10, with which it is slightly - incompatible. - -%}}} introduction -%{{{ File identification -\section{File identification} - - Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the - file. - -\code - \|\% pdcfmt2.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for formatting - | - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "Formatting macros for plain TeX documents. - |%%% This file was generated by running - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\} - | -\endcode - -%}}} getting started -%{{{ internal - -\section{Internal definitions} - - Most internal control sequence names will start with `|FMT|'. - Here are a few miscellaneous definitions used to save a token - here or there. - - I will often use |\toksa| to create definitions containing - characters with unusual catcodes. The idiom is -$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr - |\begingroup| \<assignments> |\toksa={\endgroup|\cr - \quad\<definitions>\cr - |} \the\toksa|\cr -}$$ - When |\toksa| is expanded, it closes the group (undoing the - \<assignments>) but then scans the \<definition> using the - catcodes set by \<assignments>. (In extreme cases, the - definition of |\toksa| might be enclosed in |\uppercase|, to get - strange characters into a definiton.) - - The advantage of this idiom over using |\gdef| in a group is - that the definitions need not be global. Avoiding global - assignments makes it more likely that the document will be - embeddable in other documents. - - Using |\toksa| instead of |\toks0| is more robust when using - |\uppercase|, because digits are be given |\uccode| values by - |maamac.tex|. -\code - |\toksdef\toksa=0 - |\chardef\other=12 -\endcode - -%}}} internal -%{{{ verbatim text - -\section{Verbatim text} - - `Verbatim' text means text designed to match the ASCII - characters in the manuscript file as closely as possible. It - kis most often used in computer manuals, where commands typed to - a computer or the contents of text files are to be presented. - Within verbatim text, most of \TeX's special characters are - temporarily disabled. - -\subsec{Lists of active chararcters} - - The verbatim text macros need to know if any characters have - been made special apart from the usual ones. This command tells - the verbatim macros that |#1| is an active char; in addition to - setting its catcode, this makes sure that the character will be - re-catcoded appropriately when in verbatim mode. |#1| should be - a something that will work after `|`|'; usually this means a - one-character control sequence. -\code - |\def\declareactivechar#1{% - | \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}% - | \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }% - | \catcode`#1\active - |} -\endcode - - Two list macros in the style of |\dospecials| are defined. The - first is for characters that must be set to catcode~12, such as - `|\|', `|{|', `|}|', `|_|', `|$|', `|#|', `|&|', and `|%|'. The - other is for a few characters that are given catcode~13, such as - `|`|', `|'|', `|~|', `|^|' and SP. -\code - |\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%} - |\def\verbatimactives{\do\-\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ } -\smallbreak - |\chardef\other=12 -\endcode - -\subsec{Setting up verbatim mode} - - This is a macro common to various verbatim text modes. The - default spacing of whatever font is used, without any - adjustments of spacefactor for punctuation. The characters - `|`|', `|'|', `|~|', and `|^|' are produce slightly lowered - glyphs. -\code - |\newtoks\everyverbatim -\smallbreak - |\bgroup \catcode`\-=13\catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup - | \def\setupverbatim{% - | \frenchspacing - | \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font - | \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains - | \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives - | \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq - | \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum \let-\ttminus - | \the\everyverbatim - | } - |}\the\toksa -\endcode - - Here are the definitions for the munged glyphs. These are only - necessary in CM Typewriter; when using a PostScript font, - different definitions would be necessary. - - The names `rq' and `lq' are based on the use of |\lq| and |\rq| - in plain \TeX. An alternative definition for |\ttrq| would be - |\chardef\ttrq="0D|, producing `{\tt\char"0D }'. -\code - |\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }} - |\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }} - |\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }} - |\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }} - |\def\ttminus{-} -\endcode - This makes the difference between |`'^~| and - {\tt`'\char`\^\char`\~}. - - The macro |\ttminus| is included because it is needed for - PostScript font support. - -\subsec{Defining a self-matching character for verbatim text} - - A macro for defining a self-matching verbatim character (I~got - the idea of a macro for declaring verbatim characters from the - \LaTeX~2e documentation macros). |#1| must be a one-character - control sequence. If it isn't active already, then - |\declareactivechar| is applied to it first. -\code - |\def\defverbatim#1{% - | \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi - | \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup - | \def~{% - | \leavevmode - | \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim - | \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup - | }% - | }}\the\toksa - |} -\endcode - Note that there must be a font called |\tt| for it to switch to. - (The catcode of |#1| is set to 13 after calling |\setupverbatim| - because |#1| will be included in |\verbatimplains|.) - - Finally, we define vertical bar as the conventional - self-matching verbatim-mode character. -\code - |\defverbatim\| -\endcode - Both |\defverbatim| and |\defineactivechar| have local scope. - -\subsec{List a file verbatim} - - This does something similar to the |lines| environment (see - below), except here an external file is read in verbatim (see - {\it\TeX book} Appendix~D, Section~3). The - |\startlinenumbering| macro may be put in the |\everylisting| - token register to create a listing with numbered lines. -\code - |\newtoks\everylisting -\smallbreak - |\def\listfile#1{ - | \medskip - | \begingroup - | \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt - | \def\par{\null\endgraf}\obeylines - | \setupverbatim \maketabstab - | \tt \the\everylisting - | \input#1 - | \endgroup - | \medskip\noindent\ignorespaces - |} -\endcode - This macro redefines character |^^I| (horizontal tab) to produce - the equivalent of eight spaces. This isn't quite the same as - what HTs are used for with UNIX files, but it works adequately - if all your tabs are at the start of the line (i.e., if tabs are - used only for indentation, not to make tables). -\code - |{\catcode`\^^I=\active - | \gdef\maketabstab{\catcode`\^^I\active \def^^I{\hskip 4em}} - |} -\endcode - -%}}} verbatim text -%{{{ everypar - -\section{Everypar hacks} - -\subsec{Parameters} - - The following may be set by higher-level macros to change the - apearance of the next paragraph. - - If the flag |\ifnoindent| is set, then the indentation of the - next paragraph will be removed (by deleting the box added by - \TeX's |\indent| primitive). Thus |\noindenttrue| works like - |\noindent|, except that there may be blank lines between - |\noindenttrue| and the paragraph it affects. -\code - |\newif\ifnoindent -\endcode - This flag is reset globally once it has had its effect. - - If the box |\parbox| is non-void, then its value is typeset in - the left margin of the next paragraph. (At present this does an - implicit |\noindenttrue| but later versions may allow the next - paragraph to be indented.) The righthand edge of the parbox - will be distance |\parboxsep| from the left edge of the text - area. -\code - |\newbox\parbox - |\newdimen\parboxsep \parboxsep=1pc -\endcode - -\subsec{Setting \cs{everypar}} -\code - |\everypar={% - | \ifvoid\parbox - | \ifnoindent {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse \fi - | \else - | {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse - | \dp\parbox=0pt - | \hbox to 0pt{\hss \box\parbox \hskip\parboxsep}% - | \fi - |} -\endcode -%}}} everypar -%{{{ environment intrinsics - -\section{Environment infrastructure} - - An environment is a structure used to typeset textual elements - consisting of several \TeX\ paragraphs (usually embedded within - one conceptual paragraph). It is a concept like \LaTeX\ - environments, but with the syntax changed to be more - plain-\TeX-like. - - Since environments have one argument that may span many lines in - the file we use more verbose brackets than |{|--|}| to make it - easier to spot where they begin and end. This is a structure in - a document looking like this: - $$ -\vbox{\halign{#\hfil\cr - |\|\<name>\<args>\cr - \quad\dots\cr - |\end|\<name>\cr -}} - $$ - - A new environment is defined by defining macros called - |\|\<name> and |\end|\<name>. Within the |\|\<name> and - |\end|\<name> macros, calls to |\beginthe| and |\endthe| are - used to check that environments are nested properly. -\code - |\def\beginthe#1{% - | \begingroup\def\PDCFMTblockname{#1}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endthe#1{% - | \def\tmp{#1}% - | \ifx\tmp\PDCFMTblockname - | \endgroup - | \else - | \errmessage{You should have said \string\endthe{\blockname}}% - | \fi - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{A generic end-of-environment macro} - - This macro does a |\smallskip| (if there is not already a larger - skip on the current list), and sets the `noindent' flag so that - the following \TeX\ paragraph is not indented. -\code - |\def\PDCFMTendenv#1{ - | \smallskip - | \endthe{#1} - | \global\noindenttrue - |} -\endcode - - Where an environment describes text that should be indented, - usually |\parindent| should be used (for consistency). If - |\parindent| is zero we still want to indent the text, and we - use |\envindent| to describe how much to indent it by. -\code - |\newdimen\envindent \envindent=1pc -\smallskip - |\def\PDCFMTindent{% - | \ifdim\parindent>0pt - | \parindent - | \else - | \envindent - | \fi - |} -\endcode - -%}}} environment intrinsics -%{{{ quotations - -\section{Quotations} - - This is a simple environment, with the left margin indented and - the first paragraph in the quotetd text not indented. -\example - It is ... who said~ - \\quotation~ - \indent Shookum hip rallo dyne.~ - \\endquotation~ - Indeed, it burgle gurgler. -& - It is interesting to remember the words of - Spencone Tipeth, who said - \smallskip\leftskip\parindent \noindent - Shookum hip rallo - dyne.\smallskip\leftskip0pt \noindent Indeed, it burgle gurgler. -\endexample -The token - register |\everyquotation| might be used to arrange for all - quotations to be in smaller type with - $$\hbox{|\everyquotation={\smallfonts}|}$$ -\code - |\newtoks\everyquotation -\smallbreak - |\def\quotation{ - | \smallskip - | \beginthe{quotation} - | \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent - | \noindenttrue - | \the\everyquotation - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endquotation{\PDCFMTendenv{quotation}} -\endcode - The differences from using |{\narrower|\dots|\par}| (apart from - how it looks in the source file) include (a)~the right margin - isn't indented; (b)~it indents by |\envindent| if there is no - |\parindent| and (c)~it is preceeded and followed by a - smallskip. -%}}} quotations -%{{{ textlists (bullets + numbered) - -\section{Textlists---bulleted or numbered lists} - - Here's a generic list-of-items environment, used to implemented - bulleted and numbered lists. Each item is started with the - convenient |\\| macro (and so may contain more than one - paragraph). It is called a `textlist' to distinguish it from - other meanings of the word `list'. Usually textlists will be - generated with higher-level macros like |\bullets| and - |\numbered|. - -\subsec{A generic textlist environment} - - The token register |\everytextlist| is expanded at the start - of every textlist. The level of nesting is recorded in - |\textlistdepth| (a to-level list is depth~0, a list inside - that is depth~1, and so on). The flag |\ifnumbered| controls - whether items are numbered (using |\numberfordepth|) or - bulleted (using |\bulletfordepth|). -\code - |\newtoks\everytextlist - |\newif\ifnumbered - |\newcount\textlistdepth \textlistdepth=-1 - |\newcount\textlistcount -\smallbreak - |\def\textlist{% - | \par - | \beginthe{textlist} - | \advance\textlistdepth 1 - | \textlistcount0 - | \def\\{ - | \smallskip\noindent - | \advance\textlistcount1 - | \llap{% - | \ifnumbered - | \numberfordepth\textlistdepth\textlistcount - | \else - | \bulletfordepth\textlistdepth - | \fi\enspace}% - | \ignorespaces - | } - | \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent - | \the\everytextlist - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endtextlist{\PDCFMTendenv{textlist}} -\endcode - -\subsec{Bulleted lists} - - This describes a bulleted list, where each paragraph is indented - and preceeded by a mark in the margin. -\example - I would like to make...~\\bullets~\\\\ this point; and~\\\\ that - point~\\endbullets~And so on and so forth. -& I would like to make the following very important and relevant - itemized points:\smallskip\item{$\bullet$}this point; - and\smallskip\item{$\bullet$}that - point\smallskip\noindent And so on and so forth. -\endexample -Bullets environments may - be nested, in which case different marks are used. The sign is - chosen with |\bulletfordepth|. -\code - |\newtoks\everybullets -\smallbreak - |\def\bullets{\textlist \numberedfalse \the\everybullets} - |\let\endbullets=\endtextlist -\smallbreak - |\def\bulletfordepth#1{% - | \ifcase#1 $\bullet$\or --\or $\circ$\else $\cdot$\fi - |} -\endcode - - -\subsec{Numbered lists} - - The numbered list is similar. The style of numbering changes - with the listing depth; you can change this by redefining - |\numberfordepth|. - $$ -\centerline{\vbox{\halign{#\hfil&\qquad\hfil# &&\hfil# \cr - Depth 0&1.&2.&3.&\dots\cr - Depth 1&(1)&(2)&(3)&\dots\cr - Depth 2&({\it a\/})&({\it b\/})&({\it c\/})&\dots\cr - Depth 3+&(i)&(ii)&(iii)&\dots\cr -}}} - $$ - There is also a token regieter |\everynumbered| for any extra - customization. This is read after |\everytextlist|. -\code - |\newtoks\everynumbered -\smallbreak - |\def\numbered{\textlist \numberedtrue \the\everynumbered} - |\let\endnumbered=\endtextlist -\smallbreak - |\def\numberfordepth#1#2{% - | \ifcase#1 \n{\number#2}.\or (\n{\number#2})\or - | ({\it\alphabetletter#2\/})\else (\romannumeral#2)\fi - |} -\endcode - It turns out that sometimes it is useful to be able to impose a - format on numbers generated by formatting macros. For example, - I~occasionally find it useful to force all numbers to be - generated in maths mode. To do this, all numbers generated by - macros are enclosed in |\n{|--|}|. By default, |\n| is - equivalent to |\relax|. -\code - |\let\n\relax -\endcode - -\subsec{Picking a letter of the alphabet} - - This macro behaves as much like the primitives |\number| and - |\romannumeral| as it can: it expands entirely within \TeX's - mouth, and so may be used in |\edef|s and the like. It produces - |???| or |!!!| if its argument is not in the range 1--26. - The macro is defined so as to reduce the number of tokesn to be - skipped when |#1| is less than 6. -\code - |\def\alphabetletter#1{% - | \ifcase#1 ??? \or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\else - | \xxxalphabetletter#1\fi - |} - |\def\xxxalphabetletter#1{% - | \ifcase#1 \or\or\or\or\or\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or - | k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or - | v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else !!!\fi - |} -\endcode - -%}}} textlists (bullets + numbered) -%{{{ tagged list - -\section{Tagged lists} - - In other words, description lists. Each paragraph starts with - the `tag' set either in the left margin or sticking in to the - current line if it is too long to fit. The tag for each - paragraph is introduced with `|\\|\arg{\<text>}'. - - The maximum width of tag labels (including the 1\thinspace en - space that goes between label and text) in is stored in - |\tagmaxwidth|. If there is not room, then the label is run on - in to the paragraph and separated from the text by a quad space. -\code - |\newdimen\tagmaxwidth -\endcode - As well as giving a new definition to the |\\| macro, the - |\tagged| command mast choose a value for |\tagmaxwidth|. If - there is a large left margin (signalled by giving |\leftmargin| - a positive value) then tags will go in there; otherwise the text - will be indented and the amount of indentation used as the - maximum label width. -\code - |\newtoks\everytagged -\smallbreak - |\def\tagged{% - | \par - | \beginthe{tagged} - | \let\\\TAG - | \ifdim\leftmargin=0pt - | \tagmaxwidth\PDCFMTindent - | \else - | \tagmaxwidth\leftmargin - | \fi - | \the\everytagged - | \ifdim\tagmaxwidth>\leftmargin - | \leftskip\tagmaxwidth \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin - | \fi - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endtagged{\PDCFMTendenv{tagged}} -\endcode - The adjustment to |\leftmargin| comes after scanning - |\everytagged| so that it is possible to adjust |\tagmaxwidth| - inside |\everytagged|. - - Trickery with |\futurelet| and |\aftergroup| (like that used in - plain \TeX's |\footnote| command) is used to allow catcode - changes in \<text> to work. This allows macros that generate - `verbatim' text to work. -\code - |\newtoks\everytag -\smallbreak - |\def\TAG{% - | \smallskip\noindent - | \setbox0=\hbox\bgroup % matched by \TAGfinish - | \the\everytag\ignorespaces - | \futurelet\next\TAGtest - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TAGtest{% - | \ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next - | \let\next\TAGgotbrace - | \else - | \let\next\TAGnobrace - | \fi \next - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TAGgotbrace{% - | \bgroup\aftergroup\TAGfinish - | \let\next - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TAGnobrace#1{% - | #1\TAGfinish - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TAGfinish{% - | \unskip\hskip0.5em\egroup % matches \TAG - | \ifdim \wd0 < \tagmaxwidth - | \wd0=\tagmaxwidth - | \llap{\box0}% - | \else - | \hskip-\tagmaxwidth - | \unhbox0 \unskip\quad - | \fi - | \ignorespaces - |} -\endcode - It might be interesting to generalize these macros so that new - macros with an argument scanned this way may be created more - easily. -%}}} tagged list -%{{{ lines - -\section{Lines environment (for program listings etc)} - - In the |lines| environment, each line in the manuscript file - becomes a new paragraph (i.e., a separate line on the printed - page). A |%| at the end of a line may be used to split a file - line in to several logical lines. In addition, the |lines| - environment is bracketed by horizontal rules. The effect is - similar to that produced by the |\beginlines|--|\endlines| - macros in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~E. - -\code - |\newtoks\everylines -\smallbreak - |\def\lines{ - | \par - | \beginthe{lines} - | \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip - | \obeylines - | \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt - | \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil - | \the\everylines - | \nobreak - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endlines{ - | \nobreak\smallskip - | \endthe{lines} - | \hrule\smallskip - | \global\noindenttrue - |} -\endcode - - For longer listings it may be nice to have the lines numbered - for later reference. The following two macros may be put in - |\everylines| to enable line numbering---the first starts from~1 - in each listing environment, the other continues the numbering - from where it left off. - - The line number is kept in |\linenumber| (which may be adjusted - by the user). Only every 5th line is numbered. The number of - lines until the next printed one is held in |\PDCFMTcount|. - Both these are always set globally (which means lines - environments cannot be nested!). -\code - |\newcount\linenumber - |\newcount\PDCFMTcount -\smallbreak - |\def\startlinenumbering{% - | \global\linenumber=0 \global\PDCFMTcount=5 - | \everypar{\numberthisline}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\continuelinenumbering{% - | \everypar{\numberthisline}% - |} -\endcode - - The |\numberthisline| macro is invoked at the beginning of every - paragraph. It increments |\linenumber|, and writes the line - number of every fifth line in the right margin. By default it - uses the same font as used in subscripts; this can be changed by - changing the token register |\everylinenum|. -\code - |\newtoks\everylinenum \everylinenum{\the\scriptfont0 } -\smallbreak - |\def\numberthisline{% - | \strut - | \global\advance\linenumber1 \global\advance\PDCFMTcount-1 - | \ifnum\PDCFMTcount>0 \else - | \global\advance\PDCFMTcount 5 - | \rlap{\the\everylinenum \kern\hsize\kern1em \the\linenumber}% - | \fi - |}% -\endcode - - Within the lines environment it can be useful to indicate where - lines have been skipped. This macro also adjusts the - |\linenumber| macro. -\code - |\def\linesskipped#1{% - | \strut \hskip20pt $\vdots$ \hskip20pt - | {\rm(\it #1 lines omitted\rm)}\par - | \advance\linenumber#1\relax - |} -\endcode - -%}}} lines -%{{{ display, table - -\section{Displays, Tables -- wrapper about \cs{halign}} - - The |display| environment does a generic (meaning not - necessarily mathematical) display, in a manner similar to the - |\begindisplay|--|\enddisplay| macros in {\it\TeX book} - Appendix~E. As with Knuth's macro, assignments may follow on - the same line as |\display|, and |\cr| and |&| may be used to - split the display into rows and columns. -\code - |\outer\def\display{\obeylines\startdisplay} - |\bgroup\obeylines \toksa={\egroup % - | \def\startdisplay#1^^M{% - | \catcode`\^^M=5 $$ #1 % matched by \enddisplay - | \displayindent\PDCFMTindent % - | \halign\bgroup##\hfil&&\quad##\hfil\cr % - | } % - |}\the\toksa % -\smallbreak - |\def\enddisplay{\crcr\egroup$$} -\endcode - - The |table| environment is similar, ecept that what follows - |\table| is an arbitrary |\halign| specification. -\code - |\def\table{% - | $$ % matching $$ is in \endtable - | \displayindent\PDCFMTindent - | \halign \bgroup - |} -\smallbreak - |\let\endtable=\enddisplay -\endcode - -\notepar - Both the {\tt table} and {\tt display} environments must go - within paragraphs. That is, there should not be blank lines - before |\table|, or after |\endtable| unless the table ends the - paragraph. -\endnotepar -%}}} display, table -%{{{ ebnf - -\section{(E)BNF} - - BNF is Bakus-Naur Formalism; EBNF is Extended BNF. The same - environment does either format. The style I~happen to like, has - non-terminal sumbols written like \<this>, and terminal symbols - enclosed in `--'. Optional text is enclosed in brackets (I~like - to put spaces between the brackets and the enclosed text for - clarity) and repeatable text in braces. - - In the manuscript file, each production is a separate paragraph. - The macro |\>| goes between the left hand side and right hand - side of a production; by default, it expands to `$::=$'. - Alternatives are separated by |\\|; by default this expands to a - bar `$\mid$'. If the terminal symbols happen to be keyboard - characters, use the verbatim text character {\tt\char`\|} which - adds quotation marks around the text it produces. For example, - the following expression - $$ - \hbox{\<foo>\enspace$::=$\enspace`|f|' `|o|' `|o|' $\mid$ - \<bar> [ \<mumble> `{\bf munge}' ].} - $$ - may be produced with - $$ - \defverbatim\~ - \hbox{~\<foo> \> |f| |o| |o| \\ \<bar> [ \<mumble> `{\bf munge}' ].~} - $$ - Braces are produced with |\{| and |\}|. - -\code - |\newtoks\everybnf -\smallbreak - |\def\bnf{ - | \nobreak\smallskip - | \beginthe{bnf} - | \advance\leftskip2\parindent \parindent=-\parindent - | \parskip0pt plus 1pt - | \rightskip=1\rightskip plus 3em - | \def\\{$\mid$} - | \def\>{\unskip\enspace$::=$\enspace\ignorespaces} - | \def|{`\begingroup\tt\setupverbatim\catcode`\|=13 - | \def|{\endgroup'}} - | \def\{{$\lbrace$} \def\}{$\rbrace$} - | \the\everybnf - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endbnf{ - | \smallskip - | \endthe{bnf} - | \global\noindenttrue - |} -\endcode - - The macro |\<| is based on the one in Appendix~E of the {\it\TeX - book}. For example, |\<foo>| produces `\<foo>'. -\code - |\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle${\it#1\/}$\rangle$}} -\endcode - The difference is that the name is in italics: \<name> not - $\langle$name$\rangle$. - -\notepar - This macro is not intened for be used to generate character - names like Return and Tab; I suggest just saying `Return' and - `Tab' for these. - - There is a style of RFC-822 email addresses written in the form - `\/|Damian Cugley <pdc@alleged.co.uk>|'. I suggest that when - presenting email addresses in printed documents this be rendered - as something like `\/{\rm Damian Cugley (|pdc@alleged.co.uk|)}'. -\endnotepar -%}}} ebnf -%{{{ headings - -\section{Headings} - - Here are some macros for making headings for sections of a - document. There are two styles of layout supported by these - heading macros: the usual style~$N$, with headings above the - first paragraph of the section, and the `tab-indexed' style~$T$, - with headings in the left margin, aligned with the first line of - the paragraph. - - -\subsec{The left margin parameter} - For style~$T$ headings, this is the size of the extra margin at - the left side of the page (so $({\it hoffset}+1\,{\rm in})-{\it - leftmargin}$ is the margin between the left edge of headings and - the edge of the paper). Set this parameter to $0\pt$ for - style~$N$. - -\code - |\newdimen\leftmargin -\endcode - - -\subsec{Headings that don't start a new page} - - This macro is intended to be used by higher-level macro with - names like |\section|, which take care of numbering section - headings and so on. - $$ - \hbox{\tt\cs{doheading}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<style>}% - \arg{\<coda>}\arg{\<text>}} - $$ - Where \<skip> is the skip to put before the heading (for - example, a \<dimendef token> like like |\medskipamount| or - |\bigskipamount|, or a \<dimen> enclosed in braces); \<style> is - tokens to insert before the \<text> (such as assignments that - select the font); \<coda> is tokens that follow the \<text> - (which might produce a rule under the heading, for example; - usually this is empty); and \<text> is the text of the heading - supplied by the user. -\code - |\newskip\headingtemp - |\def\doheading#1#2#3#4{ - | \ifdim\lastskip<#1\relax \removelastskip \vskip#1\relax \fi - | \ifdim \leftmargin>0pt -\endcode - If the left margin is greater than zero then we generaten a - style~$T$ heading. This is done by putting the text in - |\parbox|, which will be used by the |\everypar|. -\code - | \global\setbox\parbox=\vtop{% - | \hsize=\leftmargin \advance\hsize-\parboxsep - | \parindent=0pt - | \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 3em - | \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000 - | \strut#2#4#3 - | } - | \else -\endcode - Otherwise we typeset the heading as a separate paragraph. -\code - | \begingroup - | \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil - | \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize - | \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000 - | \strut#2#4#3 - | \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip - | \par - | \endgroup -\endcode - The vertical space between the heading and the following text is - calculated from the difference in baselineskips between the - fonts used in the heading and those used in body text, plus $\it - smallskipamount$. -\code - | \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip - | \ifdim\headingtemp>0pt \nobreak \vskip 1.0\headingtemp \fi - | \smallskip - | \noindenttrue - | \fi - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Headings that start a new page} - - Major divisions of a book start on a nw page. The parameters to - the macro are similar to those for |\doheading|: - $$ - \hbox{\tt\cs{newpageheading}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<style>}% - \arg{\<coda>}\arg{\<text>}} - $$ - Where here the \<skip> is the extra space at the top of the page. - -\code - |\def\newpageheading#1#2#3#4{ - | \vfill\supereject % ensure no insertions still floating - | \null\vskip#1\relax - | \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{ - | \advance\hsize\leftmargin - | \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil - | \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize - | \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000 - | #2\strut#4#3 - | \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip - | \par - | } - | \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip - | \advance\headingtemp\smallskipamount - | \vskip \headingtemp - | \noindenttrue - | \def\tmp{#4} - | \message{*\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp. } - |} -\endcode -%}}} headings -%{{{ footnotes -\section{Footnotes} - - We define a new command |\note| that replaces use of the - |\footnote| command. This takes one parameter---the text of the - footnote---and supplies automatically-numbered footnote markers. - - The |\newcount| command implicitly sets the counter to~0. - -\code - |\newcount\notecount -\smallskip - |\def\note{% - | \global\advance\notecount+1 - | \footnote{\number\notecount}% - |} -\endcode - - We add a parameter for the indentation of footnote paragraphs. -\code - |\newdimen\footnoteparindent - |\footnoteparindent=\parindent -\endcode - - Now we modify the definition of |\footnote| in plain~\TeX\ (see - TeXbook p.\thinspace363). It has the same function as - plain~\TeX's |\footnote|, but uses extra parameters - (|\everyfootnote|, |\footnotetextmark|), and handles the case - ${\it parindent}=0\pt$. -\code - |\newtoks\everyfootnote -\smallbreak - |\catcode`\@=11 - |\def\footnote#1{\let\@sf\empty - | \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi - | \footnotetextmark{#1}\@sf\vfootnote{#1}} -\smallbreak - |\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup % matched by \@foot - | \interlinepenalty=\interfootnotelinepenalty - | \parindent=\footnoteparindent - | \leftskip=0pt - | \the\everyfootnote - | \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox - | \floatingpenalty=20000 - | \indent\footstrut - | \ifdim\parindent>1em - | \llap{\footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace}% - | \else - | \footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace - | \fi - | \futurelet\next\fo@t - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\@foot{\smallskip\egroup} -\smallskip - |\catcode`\@=12 -\endcode - These two parameters control the formatting of the footnote - marker in the text and in the note itself. They take one - parameter, a \<number>. The default definitions simply use a - superscript in maths mode. -\code - |\def\footnotetextmark#1{$^{#1}$} - |\def\footnotenotemark#1{$^{#1}$} -\endcode -%}}} footnotes -%{{{ in-paragraph commands - -\section{Miscellaneous in-paragraph commands} - - -\subsec{Writing the current date} - -\let\n=\relax -\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}} -\def\monthname#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or - May\or June\or July\or August\or - September\or October\or November\or December% - \fi -} - - We define a macro |\today| that prints today's date. I used to - have the option of the abbreviated date but decided this was an - unnecessary complication. The format `\today' is usual - in non-American countries, and is recommended by {\it Hart's - Rules}\footnote*{Horace Hart, {\it Hart's Rules for Compositors - and Readers at the University Press, Oxford}, 39th~ed., - completely revised (Oxford University Press, 1990), - p.\thinspace19.} and Strunk \& - White.\footnote\dag{William Strunk jun., and E.~B. White, {\it - The Elements of Style}, 3rd~ed.\ (Macmillan, 1979), - p.\thinspace3. The American format is given first but followed - by the observation that the day--month--year format is `an - excellent way to write that date; the figures are separated by a - word, and are, for that reason, quickly grasped'.} -\code - |\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}} -\smallbreak - |\def\monthname#1{% - | \ifcase#1\or - | January\or February\or March\or April\or - | May\or June\or July\or August\or - | September\or October\or November\or December% - | \fi - |} -\endcode - Redefine the |\monthname| macro if you want different names for - the months. - - -\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day} -\def\twodigits#1{% - \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1% -} - - Here's a definition for the date in ISO~8601/BS~4795 - format,\footnote\ddag{{\it The Oxford Writers' Dictionary} - (Oxford University Press, 1990), under `date'. I~have not read - the relevant standards.} which puts the year first, giving - `\isodate': -\code - |\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day} -\smallbreak - |\def\twodigits#1{% - | \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1% - |} -\endcode - - -\subsec{Raising things} - - The |\flushtop| macro prints its argument in a box raised so - that the its top is aligned with the top of a letter X in the - current font. -\code - |\def\flushtop#1{% - | \leavevmode - | \begingroup - | \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox2\hbox{X}% - | \dimen0\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0 - | \raise\dimen0\box0 - | \endgroup - |} -\endcode - This allows us to define a fairly generic version of the \LaTeX\ - logo: -\code - |\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{a}} - |\def\LaTeX{\La\TeX} -\endcode - I have not given a definition for the \LaTeX~2e logo, since - I~think that `|\LaTeX~2e|' (or `|\LaTeX2e|' if you prefer) is - adequate, whereas Addison--Wesley think it should be `|\LaTeX| - |\kern0.05em| |2$| |_{\textstyle| |\varepsilon}| |$|' in regular - text and something involving bold maths in boldface. SImilarly, - I do not include macros for Bib\TeX, Sli\TeX, AMS-\TeX, and so - on; the |texlogos.sty| file from the Eplain package has - definitions for these. - -\def\superiorletter#1{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam - \vphantom{t}\smash{#1}}} - - Here's a variation which raises a scriptstyle letter so that - its {\it x}-height matches the cap-height of the body text, - thus making `M\superiorletter{\b c\kern0.1ex }Donald' and - `1\superiorletter{\b a}', `1\superiorletter{\b o}', - `1\superiorletter{er}', `2\superiorletter{\`eme}', - `1\superiorletter{st}', `2\superiorletter{nd}', - `3\superiorletter{rd}' and `659\superiorletter{th}' (which I - prefer to $659^{\rm th}$). -\code - |\def\superiorletter#1{% - | \flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \vphantom{x}\smash{#1}}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\Mc{M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b{c}}} -\endcode - - -%}}} in-paragraph commands -\endcodefile -\enddocument -\bye -%}}} pdcfmt2 - -%Local variables: -%fill-prefix: " " -%fold-folded-p: t -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a7d81d4b601..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,398 +0,0 @@ -% pdcfmt2.tex 2.4 1995/04/06 -- macros for formatting - -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex", -%%% version = "2.4", -%%% date = "1995/04/06", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Formatting macros for plain TeX documents. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcfmt2.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcfmt2.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } - -\message{2.4 <pdc 1995/04/06>} - -\toksdef\toksa=0 -\chardef\other=12 -\def\declareactivechar#1{% - \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}% - \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }% - \catcode`#1\active -} -\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%} -\def\verbatimactives{\do\-\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ } -\chardef\other=12 -\newtoks\everyverbatim -\bgroup \catcode`\-=13\catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup - \def\setupverbatim{% - \frenchspacing - \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font - \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains - \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives - \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq - \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum \let-\ttminus - \the\everyverbatim - } -}\the\toksa -\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }} -\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }} -\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }} -\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }} -\def\ttminus{-} -\def\defverbatim#1{% - \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi - \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup - \def~{% - \leavevmode - \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim - \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup - }% - }}\the\toksa -} -\defverbatim\| -\newtoks\everylisting -\def\listfile#1{ - \medskip - \begingroup - \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt - \def\par{\null\endgraf}\obeylines - \setupverbatim \maketabstab - \tt \the\everylisting - \input#1 - \endgroup - \medskip\noindent\ignorespaces -} -{\catcode`\^^I=\active - \gdef\maketabstab{\catcode`\^^I\active \def^^I{\hskip 4em}} -} -\newif\ifnoindent -\newbox\parbox -\newdimen\parboxsep \parboxsep=1pc -\everypar={% - \ifvoid\parbox - \ifnoindent {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse \fi - \else - {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse - \dp\parbox=0pt - \hbox to 0pt{\hss \box\parbox \hskip\parboxsep}% - \fi -} -\def\beginthe#1{% - \begingroup\def\PDCFMTblockname{#1}% -} -\def\endthe#1{% - \def\tmp{#1}% - \ifx\tmp\PDCFMTblockname - \endgroup - \else - \errmessage{You should have said \string\endthe{\blockname}}% - \fi -} -\def\PDCFMTendenv#1{ - \smallskip - \endthe{#1} - \global\noindenttrue -} -\newdimen\envindent \envindent=1pc -\def\PDCFMTindent{% - \ifdim\parindent>0pt - \parindent - \else - \envindent - \fi -} -\newtoks\everyquotation -\def\quotation{ - \smallskip - \beginthe{quotation} - \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent - \noindenttrue - \the\everyquotation -} -\def\endquotation{\PDCFMTendenv{quotation}} -\newtoks\everytextlist -\newif\ifnumbered -\newcount\textlistdepth \textlistdepth=-1 -\newcount\textlistcount -\def\textlist{% - \par - \beginthe{textlist} - \advance\textlistdepth 1 - \textlistcount0 - \def\\{ - \smallskip\noindent - \advance\textlistcount1 - \llap{% - \ifnumbered - \numberfordepth\textlistdepth\textlistcount - \else - \bulletfordepth\textlistdepth - \fi\enspace}% - \ignorespaces - } - \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent - \the\everytextlist -} -\def\endtextlist{\PDCFMTendenv{textlist}} -\newtoks\everybullets -\def\bullets{\textlist \numberedfalse \the\everybullets} -\let\endbullets=\endtextlist -\def\bulletfordepth#1{% - \ifcase#1 $\bullet$\or --\or $\circ$\else $\cdot$\fi -} -\newtoks\everynumbered -\def\numbered{\textlist \numberedtrue \the\everynumbered} -\let\endnumbered=\endtextlist -\def\numberfordepth#1#2{% - \ifcase#1 \n{\number#2}.\or (\n{\number#2})\or - ({\it\alphabetletter#2\/})\else (\romannumeral#2)\fi -} -\let\n\relax -\def\alphabetletter#1{% - \ifcase#1 ??? \or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\else - \xxxalphabetletter#1\fi -} -\def\xxxalphabetletter#1{% - \ifcase#1 \or\or\or\or\or\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or - k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or - v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else !!!\fi -} -\newdimen\tagmaxwidth -\newtoks\everytagged -\def\tagged{% - \par - \beginthe{tagged} - \let\\\TAG - \ifdim\leftmargin=0pt - \tagmaxwidth\PDCFMTindent - \else - \tagmaxwidth\leftmargin - \fi - \the\everytagged - \ifdim\tagmaxwidth>\leftmargin - \leftskip\tagmaxwidth \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin - \fi -} -\def\endtagged{\PDCFMTendenv{tagged}} -\newtoks\everytag -\def\TAG{% - \smallskip\noindent - \setbox0=\hbox\bgroup % matched by \TAGfinish - \the\everytag\ignorespaces - \futurelet\next\TAGtest -} -\def\TAGtest{% - \ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next - \let\next\TAGgotbrace - \else - \let\next\TAGnobrace - \fi \next -} -\def\TAGgotbrace{% - \bgroup\aftergroup\TAGfinish - \let\next -} -\def\TAGnobrace#1{% - #1\TAGfinish -} -\def\TAGfinish{% - \unskip\hskip0.5em\egroup % matches \TAG - \ifdim \wd0 < \tagmaxwidth - \wd0=\tagmaxwidth - \llap{\box0}% - \else - \hskip-\tagmaxwidth - \unhbox0 \unskip\quad - \fi - \ignorespaces -} -\newtoks\everylines -\def\lines{ - \par - \beginthe{lines} - \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip - \obeylines - \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt - \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil - \the\everylines - \nobreak -} -\def\endlines{ - \nobreak\smallskip - \endthe{lines} - \hrule\smallskip - \global\noindenttrue -} -\newcount\linenumber -\newcount\PDCFMTcount -\def\startlinenumbering{% - \global\linenumber=0 \global\PDCFMTcount=5 - \everypar{\numberthisline}% -} -\def\continuelinenumbering{% - \everypar{\numberthisline}% -} -\newtoks\everylinenum \everylinenum{\the\scriptfont0 } -\def\numberthisline{% - \strut - \global\advance\linenumber1 \global\advance\PDCFMTcount-1 - \ifnum\PDCFMTcount>0 \else - \global\advance\PDCFMTcount 5 - \rlap{\the\everylinenum \kern\hsize\kern1em \the\linenumber}% - \fi -}% -\def\linesskipped#1{% - \strut \hskip20pt $\vdots$ \hskip20pt - {\rm(\it #1 lines omitted\rm)}\par - \advance\linenumber#1\relax -} -\outer\def\display{\obeylines\startdisplay} -\bgroup\obeylines \toksa={\egroup % - \def\startdisplay#1^^M{% - \catcode`\^^M=5 $$ #1 % matched by \enddisplay - \displayindent\PDCFMTindent % - \halign\bgroup##\hfil&&\quad##\hfil\cr % - } % -}\the\toksa % -\def\enddisplay{\crcr\egroup$$} -\def\table{% - $$ % matching $$ is in \endtable - \displayindent\PDCFMTindent - \halign \bgroup -} -\let\endtable=\enddisplay -\newtoks\everybnf -\def\bnf{ - \nobreak\smallskip - \beginthe{bnf} - \advance\leftskip2\parindent \parindent=-\parindent - \parskip0pt plus 1pt - \rightskip=1\rightskip plus 3em - \def\\{$\mid$} - \def\>{\unskip\enspace$::=$\enspace\ignorespaces} - \def|{`\begingroup\tt\setupverbatim\catcode`\|=13 - \def|{\endgroup'}} - \def\{{$\lbrace$} \def\}{$\rbrace$} - \the\everybnf -} -\def\endbnf{ - \smallskip - \endthe{bnf} - \global\noindenttrue -} -\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle${\it#1\/}$\rangle$}} -\newdimen\leftmargin -\newskip\headingtemp -\def\doheading#1#2#3#4{ - \ifdim\lastskip<#1\relax \removelastskip \vskip#1\relax \fi - \ifdim \leftmargin>0pt - \global\setbox\parbox=\vtop{% - \hsize=\leftmargin \advance\hsize-\parboxsep - \parindent=0pt - \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 3em - \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000 - \strut#2#4#3 - } - \else - \begingroup - \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil - \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize - \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000 - \strut#2#4#3 - \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip - \par - \endgroup - \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip - \ifdim\headingtemp>0pt \nobreak \vskip 1.0\headingtemp \fi - \smallskip - \noindenttrue - \fi -} -\def\newpageheading#1#2#3#4{ - \vfill\supereject % ensure no insertions still floating - \null\vskip#1\relax - \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{ - \advance\hsize\leftmargin - \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil - \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize - \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000 - #2\strut#4#3 - \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip - \par - } - \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip - \advance\headingtemp\smallskipamount - \vskip \headingtemp - \noindenttrue - \def\tmp{#4} - \message{*\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp. } -} -\newcount\notecount -\def\note{% - \global\advance\notecount+1 - \footnote{\number\notecount}% -} -\newdimen\footnoteparindent -\footnoteparindent=\parindent -\newtoks\everyfootnote -\catcode`\@=11 -\def\footnote#1{\let\@sf\empty - \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi - \footnotetextmark{#1}\@sf\vfootnote{#1}} -\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup % matched by \@foot - \interlinepenalty=\interfootnotelinepenalty - \parindent=\footnoteparindent - \leftskip=0pt - \the\everyfootnote - \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox - \floatingpenalty=20000 - \indent\footstrut - \ifdim\parindent>1em - \llap{\footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace}% - \else - \footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace - \fi - \futurelet\next\fo@t -} -\def\@foot{\smallskip\egroup} -\catcode`\@=12 -\def\footnotetextmark#1{$^{#1}$} -\def\footnotenotemark#1{$^{#1}$} -\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}} -\def\monthname#1{% - \ifcase#1\or - January\or February\or March\or April\or - May\or June\or July\or August\or - September\or October\or November\or December% - \fi -} -\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day} -\def\twodigits#1{% - \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1% -} -\def\flushtop#1{% - \leavevmode - \begingroup - \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox2\hbox{X}% - \dimen0\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0 - \raise\dimen0\box0 - \endgroup -} -\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{a}} -\def\LaTeX{\La\TeX} -\def\superiorletter#1{% - \flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \vphantom{x}\smash{#1}}% -} -\def\Mc{M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b{c}}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index a7010f20a09..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,607 +0,0 @@ -% pdcfsel.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcfsel.tex -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "PDCFSEL, a font selection scheme for TeX", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 3.5 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/28 19:05:54 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and defines pdcfsel.tex, -%%% a file of definitions for managing font selection in -%%% documents based on the plain TeX macros. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ pdcfsel -%{{{ premable - -\relax -\input pdccode - -\document -\rcs$Id: pdcfsel.dtx,v 3.5 1995/03/28 19:05:54 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\codefile{pdcfsel.tex} - -%}}} premable -%{{{ intro - -\author{P. Damian Cugley} -\title{PDCFSEL, a font-selection scheme for \TeX} -\section{Introduction} - - This document describes PDCFSEL, a file of font selection macros - designed to be used with documents using the plain \TeX\ format - (rather than \LaTeX, for example). - - The PDCFSEL macros perform a similar function to the so-called - New Font Selection Scheme~2 (used in \LaTeX~2e). PDCFSEL uses a - simpler model of font selection, and so is a smaller - package---about 110~lines of code---which is just as well as a - copy of it will probably need to be included with documents - using it. The description of which fonts are used in a document - can be relatively compact, despite not using any special - database files. - -\subsec{Organizing fonts into fontsets} - - We can arrange the fonts used in an imaginary \TeX\ document in - a table like so (with an asterisk marking fonts that have to be - scaled to fit): - $$\def\*{{\rm*}} -\vbox{\halign{\strut#\hfil&\quad\vrule#&&\quad\tt#\hfil\cr - && |\rm|&|\it|&|\bf|&|\bi|&|\mi|&|\sy|\cr -\noalign{\nointerlineskip}\omit& height \jot\cr -\noalign{\hrule}\omit& height 1\jot\cr -\noalign{\nointerlineskip}% - body text&& cmr10& cmti10& cmbx10& cmbxti10& cmmi10& cmsy10\cr - footnotes&& cmr8& cmti8& cmbx8& cmbxti10\*& cmmi8& cmsy8\cr - script&& cmr7& cmti7& cmbx7& cmbxti10\*& cmmi7& cmsy7\cr - scriptscript&& cmr5& cmti7\*& cmbx5& cmbxti10\*& cmmi5& cmsy5\cr -\noalign{\nointerlineskip}\omit& height\jot depth\jot&\multispan6\dotfill\cr -\noalign{\nointerlineskip}% - heading&& cmss12& cmssi12& -&-&-&-\cr - subheading&& cmss10& cmssi10& -&-&-&-\cr -}} - $$ - The column headings are {\it font nicknames}. These nicknames - are used as described in the {\it\TeX book} to switch between - fonts in the same row. Each has a corresponding {\it fam} - used in maths mode, with symbolic names like |\itfam| and - |\bffam| (we define $\hbox{|\rmfam|}=0 $ for consistency). - I~have added nicknames |\mi| and |\sy| for maths italic and - maths symbol respectively. - - Each row of the table is a {\it fontset}. Plain \TeX\ defines a - single fontset (which is like the `body text' row of this - table); in Appendix~E, Knuth discusses formats that switch - between different fontsets with macros like |\ninepoint| and - |\eightpoint|. \LaTeX~2.09 uses many fontsets, called - |\normalsize|, |\large|, and so on. (NFSS~2 uses a more complex - system, where size, weight, and slant may be changed - independently of each other.) - - In this table, subheadings and body text have different fontsets - in the above, even though the fonts are the same size. Also, - there are no |\sf| fonts; the headings are printed in sanserif - by using a fontset with |\rm| mapped on to a sanserif font. - This is more logical and flexible than the \LaTeX\ approach. - - We can call font families which allow this table to work tidily - `regular', and families (like Computer Modern) that require - exceptions `irregular'. The above table has one exception - (|\it| in scriptscript must use a scaled font); the CM Bold - Extended Text Italic fonts can be described as regular if we - think of the `body text' entry as being `|cmbxti10 at 10pt|', so - that the fonts in that column are scaled fonts without - exception. To make font specification compact, we want to take - advantage of regular families as much as possible, while not - making it difficult to include exceptions. - -\subsec{Introduction to using PCDFSEL} - - PDCFSEL uses no databases of font families, and loads no fonts - by default. This makes it more flexible, but also requires - document designers to write a `mini-database' of those fonts - used in the document. The above scheme might be defined as - follows: -\smallskip -\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr - |\input pdcfsel|\cr -\noalign{\smallbreak}% - |\newfam\bifam|\cr -\noalign{\smallbreak}% - |\def\texttemplate{%|\cr - | \m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}\m{bf}{cmbx}\@\m{bi}{cmbxti10}%|\cr - | \M{mi}{cmmi}\M{sy}{cmsy}%|\cr - |}|\cr - |\loadfont\scriptscriptit{cmti7 at 5pt }|\cr - |\xfontset{scriptscript}\texttemplate{5}|\cr - |\xfontset{script}\texttemplate{7}|\cr - |\fontset{note}\texttemplate{8}{10pt}{scriptscript}{scriptscript}|\cr - |\fontset{body}\texttemplate{10}{12pt}{script}{scriptscript}|\cr -\noalign{\smallbreak}% - |\def\headingtemplate{%|\cr - | \f{rm}{cmss}\f{it}{cmssi}%|\cr - |}|\cr - |\fontset{subheading}\headingtemplate{10}{12pt}{subheading}{subheading}|\cr - |\fontset{heading}\headingtemplate{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}|\cr -\noalign{\smallbreak}% - |\bodyfonts|\cr -} -\smallbreak -\noindent - This defines commands |\bodyfonts|, |\notefonts|, - |\headingfonts| and |\subheadingfonts| which switch between - fontsets. (The {\it script} and {\it scriptscript} fontsets, - which are defined with |\xfontset|, are used only in maths - mode and don't need `-|fonts|' commands.) These -|fonts| - commands are not usually used directly in documents; - |\notefonts| will be used in some |\footnote| command, - |\headingfonts| in some heading-generating command, and so on. - - Changes of fontset are accompanied by changes in parameters like - |\baselineskip| and pseudo-parameters like |\smallskipamount|, - and give definitions to the {\it maths font tables} - |\textfont\rmfam|, \dots, |\scriptscriptfont\syfam| (for those - fonts that will be used in maths mode). - - We want font nickname commands to be efficient, because they - are expected to be more common than changes between rows in - the table. In this implementation, after an invocation of - |\bodyfonts|, the macro |\rm| expands to exactly `|\fam\rmfam - \bodyrm|'. - -\subsec{How the rest of this document is organized} - - The remainder of this document is a description of all of - |pdcfsel.tex|, including more details of how the commands it - defines are used. - - Running this document (|pdcfsel.dtx|) through plain \TeX\ - creates the definitions file (|pdcfsel.tex|) in addition to - the usual |dvi| and |log| files. This way the macros and - their documentation may be kept together in one file. The - definition lines are numbered. - - The definitions start with macros for loading individual - fonts, followed by the macros used to group fonts into - fontsets. -%}}} intro -%{{{ getting started - -\section{Getting started} - -\subsec{File identification} - - We start with some comments indentifying the file. -\code - |% pdcfsel.tex -- macros for loading fonts -*-tex-*- - | - |%%%@TeX-document-file { - |%%% title = "PDC Font Selection Scheme", - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex", - \|\%\%\% version \space\space\space= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% Date \space\space\space\space\space\space= "\filedate", - \|\%\%\% creator\space\space\space\space= "\filename", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% abstract = "A file of definitions for managing font - |%%% selection in documents based on the plain - |%%% TeX macros. - |%%% This file was generated by running - |%%% plain TeX on pdcfsel.dtx.", - |%%% dependencies = "" - |%%%} - | - \|\string\message\{\fileversion\space\string<% - \fileauthor\space\filedate\string>\} -\endcode - -\subsec{Private names} - - Macros internal to FSEL all have names starting `|\FSEL|'. - -\subsec{Macros for edefs} - - These save typing |\expandafter| a lot. The expression - `|\expcs|\<token>\arg{\<tokens>}', creates a csname from - \<tokens> and applies \<token> to the result. In the body of an - |\edef|, The expression `|\noexpcs|\arg{\<tokens>}' converts - \<tokens> to a csname without expanding the result. -\code - |\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname} - |\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand} -\endcode -%}}} getting started -%{{{ selecting demand-loading - -\section{Selecting auto-loading mode} - - The flag |\ifFSELautoload| is true, fonts are auto-loaded when - they first used instead of all at the start. This is useful - when not all the fonts described by the fontsets will be - needed. The flag is set with the user command - |\autoloadfonts|. - - When demand-loading, the fonts used - are written to a file named after the document with a |.fnt| - suffix. This checklist might - be used to decide which fonts need to be sent with the - document if it is being sent to someone to compile on a - different \TeX\ system. -\code - |\newif\ifFSELautoload - |\def\autoloadfonts{ - | \FSELautoloadtrue - | \csname newwrite\endcsname \FSELfile - | \immediate\openout\FSELfile=\jobname.fnt - |} -\endcode -%}}} selecting demand-loading -%{{{ making csname for one font - -\section{How to set up the csname for one font} - - The macro |\loadfont| is used to load individual fonts, defining - a control sequence name (csname) which may be used later to - switch to that font. When not demand-loading fonts, this is - just like |\global\font| followed by expanding the - |\everyloadfont| macro. - - If the csname is already defined, then this command does - nothing. This is so that irregularities in the font scheme for - the document can be allowed for. Parameter |#1| is the csname, - for example `|\bodyrm|', and |#2| is the external name, for - example `|cmr10|' or `|cmr10 at 12pt|'. -\code - |\def\loadfont#1#2{% - | \ifx#1\relax - | \FSELloadfont#1{#2}% - | \else\ifx#1\UNDEFINED - | \FSELloadfont#1{#2}% - | \fi\fi - |} -\endcode - (We have to compare |#1| against both |\relax|, which is - produced by |\csname|--|\endcsname|, and a completely undefined - csname.) The macro |\FSELloadfont| doesa the actual work of - loading the font. -\code - |\def\FSELloadfont#1#2{% - | \ifFSELautoload -\endcode -\begingroup \leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip4\fontdimen6\tentt -\noindent{\it Demand-loading}. We don't load the font, instead we - define a csname as a macro. When expanded this new macro will - (a)~write the font name to the |fnt| file; (b)~define the macro - |\subfont| to load |cmr10| instead (in case \TeX\ stops with a - `font not loadable' message); (c)~load the font for real (this - overwrites the macro); (d)~call |\everyloadfont| for per-font - customization and (e)~switch to the new font. -\par\endgroup -\code - | \edef#1{% - | \write\FSELfile{#2}% - | \def\noexpand\subfont{\global\font\noexpand#1cmr10 }% - | \global\font\noexpand#1#2\relax - | \noexpand\everyloadfont\noexpand#1{#2}% - | \noexpand#1% - | }% - | \else -\endcode -\leftline{\hskip4\fontdimen6\tentt \indent{\it Immediate loading}.} -\code - | \global\font#1#2\relax \everyloadfont#1{#2}% - | \fi - |} -\endcode - - The macro |\everyloadfont| is expanded immediately after - actually loading a font. (The definition used is that one - current when the font is actually loaded, not the one current - when |\loadfont| was executed.) Its |#1| parameter is always a - \<fontdef token>, i.e., it can be to used as a parameter to - |\fontdimen1|. The |#2| parameter is the external name of the - font. -\code - |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{} -\endcode - For example, in a document with a ragged-right margin, this - might be used to suppress the stretch and - shrink of interword spaces by being defined as follows - $$ -\vbox{\halign{#\hfil\cr - |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{%|\cr - | \fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt|\cr - |}|\cr -}} - $$ -%}}} making csname for one font -%{{{ making a fontset - -\section{How to set up a fontset} - - Now that we know how to define individual font csnames, we - need the mechanism for grouping them in to fontsets. A - fontset is defined by a template macro which says what font - nicknames are defined and gives part of the external font - name. The template macro takes no parameters and expands to - a list each of whose elements are of the form - $$ -\vbox{\halign{$#$\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr - \<type> \arg{\<nickname>} \arg{\<partial name>}& - or\cr - \cs{@} \<type> \arg{\<nickname>} \arg{\<external name>}& - for a scaled font.\cr -}} - $$ - where a \<type> is one of the control sequences |\f|, |\m| or - |\M|, and \<nickname> is the two- or three-letter nickname - used for the font (without any leading backslash), for example - |rm|, |it|, |bf|. There must be a font fam called - |\|\<nickname>|fam| (|\rmfam|, |\itfam| etc.\ are already - defined). - - If there is no |\@|, then the \<partial name> is a font name - sans the size specification, such as |cmr|. The size in - points will be appended to this (|cmr| + $10\pt$ = |cmr10|). - If |\@| is included then the \<external name> is the complete - font name, such as |cmr10| or |ptmr|. This will be followed - by `{\tt\char32 at\char32 10pt\char32 }', say. - - The \<type> specifies how much support for mathematics this font - requires. This is because maths mode requires that all fonts - that might be used in a formula be loaded (because the font - tables |\textfont|, |\scriptfont| and |\scriptscriptfont| must - be set). The code |\f| means that the font is not used in - maths, |\m| means that |\textfont| and |\scriptfont| will be set - correctly for this fam, and |\M| means that |\scriptscriptfont| - will also be set. In these cases there must be a corresponding - token ending in `-|fam|' that expands to the fam number. - - The fontset name is a sequence of \<letter>s, like `|body|', - `|note|', `|script|', `|heading|'. This is turned into a - fontset selection macro by adding `|\|' to the front and - `|fonts|' to the end (e.g., |\bodyfonts|). The csnames for - loaded fonts are formed from the fontset name + the nickname - (e.g., |\bodyrm|). - -\subsec{Defining the csnames for a fontset} - - The macro |\xfontset| defines all the csnames for the fonts in a - fontset, without defining a `-|fonts|' macro. This is used to - define a fontset that is never selected in its own right (e.g., - its fonts are used only as subscripts and superscripts), and - also used internally by the |\fontset| command. Its arguments - are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the csname of a template macro, - and |#3| a \<number> that specifies the font size (sans the - `|pt|'). -\code - |\def\xfontset#1#2#3{ - | \def\f##1##2{\expcs\loadfont{#1##1}{##2#3}} - | \let\m=\f \let\M=\f - | \def\@##1##2##3{\expcs\loadfont{#1##2}{##3 at #3pt }} - | #2 - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Defining a complete fontset} - - The user command |\fontset| is used to define a complete - fontset. Its parameters are - |#1| (a string of letters) is the fontset name, - |#2| (a csname) is a template macro, - |#3| (a \<number>) is size in points, - |#4| (a \<skip>) is baseline skip, - |#5| (a fontset name) is the scriptstyle fontset, and - |#6| (a fontset name) is the scriptscriptstyle fontset. -\code - |% Set up a fontset -- define \#1fonts - |\def\fontset#1#2#3#4#5#6{% - | \xfontset{#1}{#2}{#3}% -\endcode -\begingroup\leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip2\fontdimen6\tentt -\noindent - Now to define the |\#1fonts| macro. When demand-loading, this - macro will call |\#1mathfonts| (to ensure the fonts needed for - maths are loaded). Then it will call |\FSELnicknames| to - define |\rm|, |\it|, etc., and to define |\textfont\rmfam|, etc. - Finally it will set the baseline skip and related parameters and - switch to the new |\rm| font. -\par\endgroup -\code - | \expcs\edef{#1fonts}{% - | \ifFSELautoload \noexpcs{#1mathsfonts}\fi - | \noexpand\FSELnicknames{#1}{#5}{#6}\noexpand#2% - | \noexpand\setbaselineskip{#4}% - | \noexpand\rm - | }% -\endcode -\begingroup\leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip2\fontdimen6\tentt -\noindent - If we are demand-loading, we must define |\#1mathsfonts| as well. -\par\endgroup -\code - | \ifFSELautoload - | \expcs\def{#1mathsfonts}{\FSELloadmaths{#1}{#5}{#6}#2}% - | \fi - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Setting font nicknames} - - |\FSELnicknames| - gives definitions to |\f|, |\m| and |\M| so that expanding the - template macro defines |\rm| and the like. If the fontset name - is |ffff|, and a nickname |xx| is introduced with |\f|, the - macro |\xx| is defined to |\ffffxx|. If it is introduced with - |\m|, then the font table entries |\textfont\xxfam| and |\scriptfont\xxfam| are also - set, and |\xx| expands to `|\fam\xxfam \ffffxx|'. If it is - introduced with |\M| then |\scriptscriptfont\xxfam| is also set. - - The parameters are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the fontset name - for scriptstyle, and |#3| the fontset name for - scriptscriptstyle. The implicit fourth parameter is the - template macro. -\code - |\def\FSELnicknames#1#2#3{% - | \let\@\relax - | \def\f##1##2{% - | \expcs\edef{##1}{\noexpcs{#1##1}}% - | }% - | \def\m##1##2{% - | \expcs\textfont{##1fam}\csname#1##1\endcsname - | \expcs\scriptfont{##1fam}\csname#2##1\endcsname - | \expcs\edef{##1}{% - | \fam\expcs\noexpand{##1fam}% - | \expcs\noexpand{#1##1}% - | }% - | }% - | \def\M##1{% - | \expcs\scriptscriptfont{##1fam}\csname#3##1\endcsname - | \m{##1}% - | }% - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Setting the baseline skip} - The second helper macro, |\setbaselineskip|, sets - |\baselineskip| and a bunch of related paramaters and - pseudo-parameters like |\smallskipamount|. It takes one - parameter, a \<skip>. -\notepar - My definitions for the skips that go before and after displays - put less white\-space around displays than is set in plain \TeX. - This can be changed by redefining this macro in a style file. -\endnotepar -\code - |\def\setbaselineskip#1{% - | \baselineskip#1\relax \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip - | \jot0.25\baselineskip - | \smallskipamount 0.25\baselineskip plus 0.083\baselineskip - | minus 0.083\baselineskip - | \medskipamount 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.167\baselineskip - | minus 0.167\baselineskip - | \bigskipamount 1\baselineskip plus 0.333\baselineskip - | minus 0.333\baselineskip - | \abovedisplayskip\medskipamount - | \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip - | \advance\abovedisplayshortskip-1\abovedisplayskip - | \belowdisplayskip\medskipamount - | \belowdisplayshortskip\smallskipamount - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Loading maths fonts} - Finally, we need to force the fonts used in maths at a given - size to be loaded. for |\f| fonts this does nothing; for |\m| - fonts it loads the text and script fonts; for |\M| fonts it also - loads the scriptscript font. - - This is done the first time this fontset is selected, even if no - formulas are used (rather than trying to do something - complicated like use |\everymath|\dots). Because this macro - only needs to be used once for each fontset, it finishes by - redefining |\#1mathfonts| to be the same as |\relax|. - - Its parameters are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the fontset name - for scriptstyle, and |#3| the fontset name for scriptscriptstyle. -\code - |\def\FSELloadmaths#1#2#3{% - | \let\@\relax \def\f##1##2{}% - | \def\m##1##2{\csname#1##1\endcsname \csname#2##1\endcsname}% - | \def\M##1{\csname#3##1\endcsname \m{##1}}% - | \global\expcs\let{#1mathsfonts}\relax - |} -\endcode - -%}}} making a fontset -%{{{ finishing up - -\section{Finishing up} - - We define |\rmfam|, |\mifam| and |\syfam| as aliases for the - numbers $0$, $1$ and $2$. This is so that the maths fonts may - be included in the font templates without any special - arrangements. The names |\itfam|, |\bffam|, |\ttfam|, and |\slfam| are set in |plain.tex|. -\code - |\chardef\rmfam=0 \chardef\mifam=1 \chardef\syfam=2 -\endcode - Note that we do not include an alias for the the maths - extension font's fam number. This is because there is only - one maths extension font---|cmex10|---used for all sizes, so it - does not belong in any fontset. - -\section{Summary of user commands} - - The following lists the user commands provided by FSEL. A - \<fontset name> is a sequence of letters like |note|; - \<points> is a \TeX\ \<number> representing size in points - (without any final |pt|); an \<external name> is the external - name for a font (e.g., `|cmr12|'). - -\medskip\hrule\medskip - -\begingroup \parindent=0pt - - |\autoloadfonts| - - |\loadfont|\<csname>\arg{\<external name>} - - |\xfontset|\arg{\<fontset name>}\<csname>\arg{\<points>} - - |\fontset|\arg{\<fontset - name>}\<csname>\arg{\<points>}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<fontset - name>}\arg{\<fontset name>} - - |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{| \dots\ |}| - - |\def\setbaselineskip#1{| \dots\ |}| - -\medskip\hrule\medskip - -\endgroup - -%}}} finishing up -%{{{ bugs - -\section{Bugs} - - FSEL clobbers the macros |\f|, |\m|, |\M| and |\@|. -%}}} bugs -\endcodefile -\enddocument -\bye - -%}}} pdcfsel - -%Local variables: -%fold-folded-p: t -%fill-prefix: " " -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 3b68aada1ab..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ -% pdcfsel.tex -- macros for loading fonts -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "PDC Font Selection Scheme", -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex", -%%% version = "3.5", -%%% Date = "1995/03/28", -%%% creator = "pdcfsel.dtx", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "A file of definitions for managing font -%%% selection in documents based on the plain -%%% TeX macros. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcfsel.dtx.", -%%% dependencies = "" -%%%} - -\message{3.5 <pdc 1995/03/28>} -\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname} -\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand} -\newif\ifFSELautoload -\def\autoloadfonts{ - \FSELautoloadtrue - \csname newwrite\endcsname \FSELfile - \immediate\openout\FSELfile=\jobname.fnt -} -\def\loadfont#1#2{% - \ifx#1\relax - \FSELloadfont#1{#2}% - \else\ifx#1\UNDEFINED - \FSELloadfont#1{#2}% - \fi\fi -} -\def\FSELloadfont#1#2{% - \ifFSELautoload - \edef#1{% - \write\FSELfile{#2}% - \def\noexpand\subfont{\global\font\noexpand#1cmr10 }% - \global\font\noexpand#1#2\relax - \noexpand\everyloadfont\noexpand#1{#2}% - \noexpand#1% - }% - \else - \global\font#1#2\relax \everyloadfont#1{#2}% - \fi -} -\def\everyloadfont#1#2{} -\def\xfontset#1#2#3{ - \def\f##1##2{\expcs\loadfont{#1##1}{##2#3}} - \let\m=\f \let\M=\f - \def\@##1##2##3{\expcs\loadfont{#1##2}{##3 at #3pt }} - #2 -} -% Set up a fontset -- define \#1fonts -\def\fontset#1#2#3#4#5#6{% - \xfontset{#1}{#2}{#3}% - \expcs\edef{#1fonts}{% - \ifFSELautoload \noexpcs{#1mathsfonts}\fi - \noexpand\FSELnicknames{#1}{#5}{#6}\noexpand#2% - \noexpand\setbaselineskip{#4}% - \noexpand\rm - }% - \ifFSELautoload - \expcs\def{#1mathsfonts}{\FSELloadmaths{#1}{#5}{#6}#2}% - \fi -} -\def\FSELnicknames#1#2#3{% - \let\@\relax - \def\f##1##2{% - \expcs\edef{##1}{\noexpcs{#1##1}}% - }% - \def\m##1##2{% - \expcs\textfont{##1fam}\csname#1##1\endcsname - \expcs\scriptfont{##1fam}\csname#2##1\endcsname - \expcs\edef{##1}{% - \fam\expcs\noexpand{##1fam}% - \expcs\noexpand{#1##1}% - }% - }% - \def\M##1{% - \expcs\scriptscriptfont{##1fam}\csname#3##1\endcsname - \m{##1}% - }% -} -\def\setbaselineskip#1{% - \baselineskip#1\relax \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip - \jot0.25\baselineskip - \smallskipamount 0.25\baselineskip plus 0.083\baselineskip - minus 0.083\baselineskip - \medskipamount 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.167\baselineskip - minus 0.167\baselineskip - \bigskipamount 1\baselineskip plus 0.333\baselineskip - minus 0.333\baselineskip - \abovedisplayskip\medskipamount - \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip - \advance\abovedisplayshortskip-1\abovedisplayskip - \belowdisplayskip\medskipamount - \belowdisplayshortskip\smallskipamount -} -\def\FSELloadmaths#1#2#3{% - \let\@\relax \def\f##1##2{}% - \def\m##1##2{\csname#1##1\endcsname \csname#2##1\endcsname}% - \def\M##1{\csname#3##1\endcsname \m{##1}}% - \global\expcs\let{#1mathsfonts}\relax -} -\chardef\rmfam=0 \chardef\mifam=1 \chardef\syfam=2 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt deleted file mode 100644 index ac5aae10e59..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -cmr12 -cmr9 -cmti12 -cmti9 -cmbx12 -cmbx9 -cmmi12 -cmmi9 -cmsy9 -cmtt12 -cmss10 scaled 1200 -cmmi10 scaled 1728 -cmmi10 scaled 1200 -cmsy10 scaled 1728 -cmsy10 scaled 1200 -cmr10 -cmr7 -cmti10 -cmti7 -cmbx10 -cmbx7 -cmmi10 -cmmi7 -cmsy10 -cmsy7 -cmtt10 -cmtt10 scaled 1200 -cmbxti10 at 12pt -cmbxti10 at 10pt diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex deleted file mode 100644 index f2304296a7e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,942 +0,0 @@ -% pdcguide.dtx -- user guide for PDCMAC -- Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06> - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "The PDCMAC Package", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision$", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date$", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "A brief user guide for the PDCMAC package.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccmlft.tex, pdcmacvn.tex, ..." -%%%} - -%{{{ pdcguide -%{{{ preamble - -\errorcontextlines10000 - -\ifx\usepsfonts! - \def\bodyfontname{pplr} \def\bodyttfontname{phvr} - \def\headingttfontname{phvro} - \input pdcpsdoc - \mathcode`.=\gbdecimal \mathcode`/="202F -\else - \input pdccmdoc \mathcode`.="0201 \mathcode`/="213D -\fi - -\input pdcmacvn -\majorheadline{PDCMAC Release $\pdcmacversion$} \twosidedtrue -\noheadlinetrue - -\def\n#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`i=`i \mathcode`v=`v \mathcode`x=`x #1 $} - -\def\plainslash{/} \declareactivechar\/ \let/\plainslash -\def\texmf#1#2{{\tt\let/=\slash% $ for matching - \$texmf/#1% - \def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty \plainslash \else /#2\fi}} -\def\url#1#2#3{{\tt#1:\penalty\exhyphenpenalty - \plainslash\plainslash \let/=\slash #2% - \def\tmp{#3}\ifx\tmp\empty \plainslash \else /#3\fi}} - -\newcount\tablecount \tablecount2 -\def\newtableid{\global\advance\tablecount1 \number\tablecount} - -%}}} preamble -%{{{ intro -\section{What is this thing you Earth people call PDCMAC?} -%{{{ intro -\subsec{Introduction} - - PDCMAC is collection of \TeX\ definition files (macro files) - which may be useful for setting documents using plain \TeX\ - (`plain' here meaning \TeX\ formats following similar - conventions to those of Appendix~B of the {\it\TeX book}, as - opposed to more complex formats like \LaTeX). This package is - much less powerful than \LaTeX~2e; it is intended to be a - simpler solution to simpler requirements. Because it is less - complex, the macro code should be more readily adapted by other - \TeX\ hackers. - - The package includes a font-selection system, an output routine, - general formatting macros, and `style files' which input the - other files and set the format for documents. - - The name `PDCMAC' is pronounced `{\it p-d-c}-mac'. In file - names where case matters it is always written in all-lower-case. - The fairly consistent use of a `|pdc|-' or `|ma|-' prefix in - this and other names is intended to prevent these files clashing - with files from other packages. (The `|ma|-' files are part of - the Malvern package.) -%}}} intro -%{{{ conventions -\subsec{Conventions in this guide} - - Contents and names of computer files, and commands to be typed - literally are printed in {\tt this distinctive font}. - Placeholders to be filled in with real file names etc.~are - written in {\it this italic font}. - -%}}} conventions -%{{{ copying - -\subsec{Copying} - The PDCMAC files are copyright \copyright\ 1990--1995 P. Damian - Cugley. They may be used in documents, and distributed as a - complete package as per the GNU General Public Licence - (reproduced at the end of this document). - - The |tex| files generated by the |dtx| files are like `object - files'; you should not distribute them without their source - files (the |dtx| files). - - Do not modify the generated |tex| files; if you must modify the - macros, do this by editing the |dtx| files and running them - through \TeX\ again. If you must distribute modified versions - (instead of persuading me to modify my copies), help reduce the - proliferation of incompatible versions by doing the following: -\bullets - \\describe the modifications clearly in the printed - documentation; - - \\say who modifed them in the header comments in the definition - files, and change the version identifier; - - \\use a different name for the modifed definition files. -\endbullets - The last point is so that documents using the unmodified - versions can coexist with the ones using modified ones. - - - -%}}} copying -%{{{ feedback - -\subsec{Feedback} - I am very interested to hear from people who find a use for this - package. Please send comments and suggestions, or reports of - bugs, to the address above. If you find PDCMAC useful or - amusing, please send me a pretty postcard. Thanks. - -%}}} feedback -%}}} intro -%{{{ unpack install -\section{Unpacking and installing the files} -%{{{ unpack - -\subsec{Unpacking} - - Two common formats for archives are -\bullets -\\ (on Unix) - |tar| files, compressed using GNU |zip| (|gzip|), and -\\ (on MS-DOS) PKZIP-style archives. -\endbullets - Compressed tarfiles will have names like |pdcmac-1.0.tar.gz| or - |pdcmac10.tgz| (the latter form is required by ISO-9660\note{ISO - 9660 is the standard for CD-ROM file systems. Its file names - are like MS-DOS file names: a sequence of 8-letter components - followed by a `|.|' and three-letter suffix. ISO~9660 names use - capital letters, but on case-sensitive operating systems these - are usually transliterated to lower-case.} file systems). - Unpack the package with something like -\display \defverbatim\" - "zcat pdcmac10.tgz | tar -xf -" -\enddisplay - This generates a new directory called |pdcmac-1.0|. - - PKZIP archives unpack files into the current directory, so they - are unpacked like this: -\display - |md pdcmac|\cr - |cd pdcmac|\cr - |unzip a:\pdcmac10.zip|\cr -\enddisplay - assuming the zipfile is so named. - - There is a list of the files in the release in the appendix. -%}}} unpack -%{{{ compile - -\subsec{Generating the macro files} - - The macro files are packaged with their documentation in - |dtx|\note{The \LaTeX~2e distribution uses the file name suffix - |dtx| for files with a similar function. Unlike the \LaTeX\ - system, the |dtx| files for PDCMAC produce the printed - documentation and unpack the macro files themselves using a - single macro file |pdccode.tex| and a single run through plain - \TeX; there are no |drv| or |ins| files.} files; run plain - \TeX\ on each of the |dtx| files in turn to generate the macro - files and the printed documentation. The resulting definition - files have almost no comments in them; instead you must read the - |dtx| files or the printed documentation. - - The macro files are written in the current working directory. - They are identical to the code lines in the printed - documentation (they are generated from the same text in the - |dtx| files). - - There is a file |pdcmondo.tex| which reads all of the |dtx| - files in turn except |pdcsty.dtx| and produces one large (70+ - pages) document as well as all their macro files. This is most - useful if you want to make a printed listing rather than keeping - |dvi| files for reading online. - -%}}} compile -%{{{ install -\subsec{Installing the files} - - The definition (|tex|) files belong in a directory where \TeX\ - can find them. In the new soon-to-be-standardized file name - conventions TWG-TDS~$0.61$\note{The TUG Working Group on a \TeX\ - Directory Structure, {\it A Directory Structure for - Implementation-Independent \TeX\ Files} Version~$0.61$ - (\url{ftp}{ftp.th-darmstadt.de/pub/tex/TDS-compliant/draft}{twg-tds.dvi}, - 10~February 1995).} this is the directory - \texmf{tex/plain/pdcmac}{}. On older systems, the files go with - all the other macro files. - - With TWG-TDS~$0.61$ the documentation goes in - \texmf{doc/plain/pdcmac}{}. If you do not have a directory for - documentation, the documentation files might as well go in the - \TeX\ inputs directory as well. -%}}} install -%{{{ configure - -\subsec{Configuration on Unix systems} - - There is a |configure| script and makefile template included, - which allows the process of unpacking to be run automatically on - Unix systems.\note{The configuration system is based on the GNU - Coding Standards, but was written by hand rather than using - Autoconf.} The remainder of this section assumes you are - installing PDCMAC on a Unix system. - -\subsec{Run\-ning |configure|} - - Start by running a Bourne Shell on the |configure| script, by - typing `|sh configure|'. This examines your file system and - attempts to guess suitable directories in which to put macro and - documentation files. The |configure| script understands options - listed in Table~1. - -\midinsert -\noindent{\bf Table 1}\quad Options for |configure|. Other - options are ignored.\smallskip -\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{ - \def\,{{\rm,}} - \def\\#1\, #2&{\vbox to \ht\strutbox{\hbox{$ - \left. - \vcenter{\ialign{\strut##\hfil\cr#1 \cr#2 \cr}} - \right\rbrace - $}\vss}&} - \halign to \bodywd{\tt#\hfil\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil& - \vtop{\noindent#\smallskip}\tabskip=0pt\cr -\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1.5\jot}% -\it Option&\omit\it Meaning\hfil\cr -\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule \vskip1.5\jot}% - \ttminus h\, \ttminus \ttminus help& - Print a summary of options\cr - \ttminus n\, \ttminus \ttminus no\ttminus create& - Create |config.status| but don't run it to make |makefile|.\cr - \\\ttminus t$dir$\, \ttminus \ttminus texmf=$dir$& - Says where to find a \TeX\ directory hierarchy. For example, - `|-t|\allowbreak|/usr/texmf|' or `|-t|\allowbreak|/usr/local/lib/tex3.14/tex|'. The - |configure| script will often guess correctly without this - option.\cr - \\\ttminus p$dir$\, \ttminus \ttminus prefix=$dir$& - Specifies the parent of the \TeX\ directory, for example, - `|-p/usr|' or `|-p/usr/local/lib|'. This is for compatability - with the GNU coding standards.\cr - \\\ttminus wtds\, \ttminus \ttminus with\ttminus tds& Specify that the \TeX\ directory uses some - approximation to the TWG-TDS $0.61$ file name - conventions. This should not be necessary as - |configure| will usually guess correctly. - \cr -\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule height 1pt}% -} } -\endinsert - - The configuration process creates a script |config.status| which - records the configuration; running |config.status| generates a - file |makefile|\note{Usually a makefile is called |Makefile|, - but I~wanted to make the package proof against file name munging - from being copied onto MS-DOS discs.} from the template - |makefile.in|. - - The |config.status| script has one option |-r| (or |--recheck|), - which re-runs |configure| with the same arguments as were used - to generate |config.status|; any options following |-r| are - passed to |configure|. - -%}}} configure -%{{{ make - -\subsec{Running |make|} - - Now you can use the |make| command to unpack and install all the - files. Do `|make|' to generate all the definition files and - documentation. Then `|make install|' to copy the macros into - \TeX's macros directory and the documentation into \TeX's - documentation area (assuming there is one). The standard - targets which the makefile understands are listed in Table~2. - -\midinsert -\noindent{\bf Table 2}\quad Conventional targets defined in |makefile|.\smallskip -\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{ - \def\,{{\rm,}} - \def\\#1\, #2&{\vbox to \ht\strutbox{\hbox{$ - \left. - \vcenter{\ialign{\strut##\hfil\cr#1 \cr#2 \cr}} - \right\rbrace - $}\vss}&} - \halign to \bodywd{\tt make #\hfil\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil& - \vtop{\noindent\strut#\strut\smallskip}\tabskip=0pt\cr -\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1.5\jot}% -\omit\it Command&\omit\it Meaning\hfil\cr -\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule \vskip1.5\jot}% - all& - Generate all the definitions files and |dvi| files\cr - install& - Generate the definition files and copy them in to \TeX's - macro area. Also copy the |dvi| files into \TeX's documentation - area, if possible.\cr - uninstall& - Delete all the files that `|make install|' would install.\cr - mostlyclean& Delete some files but not as many as `|make clean|'.\cr - clean& Delete files from the current directory that are normally - created by `|make all|'. Don't delete files that could be built - using the makefile but which come with the distribution.\cr - distclean& Delete some more files, including those made by - configuration. If you have unpacked the files and generated the - macro files without creating any other files, this should leave - only the files in the distribution.\cr - realclean& Delete files deleted `|make distclean|' and any others - that can be rebuilt using the makefile.\cr - TAGS& Generate a tags table file for Emacs.\cr - dist& Make a tarfile and zipfile for the package.\cr -\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule height 1pt}% -} } -\endinsert -%}}} make -%}}} unpack install -%{{{ using - -\section{Using PDCMAC style files for your documents} - - Normally a document will start by reading one of the style - files, which in turn load the various definition files. The - style files are intended to be more-or-less compatible with each - other. I have arbitrarily divided the style files into - `leaflets' and `docs'. -%{{{ leaflets - -\subsec{Leaflet styles} - - A leaflet is only a few pages, so does not need a table of - contents or division into large units. There is still a - |\section| command, but it is designed for smaller divisions - than the |\section| command used in `docs' (in a leaflet, - |\section| produces a heading with prominence similar to that - produced by |\subsec| in a doc). - - A leaflet-style document has no front matter, and so should - start with some sort of heading for the title. -\lines \it - |\input pdccmlft| - |\majorheadline{| title |} \noheadlinetrue| - \quad commands to generate the title at the top of the first page -\smallskip - \quad text of the document, perhaps using |\section| commands -\smallskip - |\bye| -\endlines -%}}} leaflets -%{{{ docs - -\subsec{Doc styles} - - A doc is something larger than a leaflet but smaller than a - book. It has a table of contents and numbered sections and - subsections, with section titles being reproduced in the - headline. There is no provision for cross-references and - automatic bibliography (which require an |aux| file and at least - two passes through \TeX). - - Sections may be grouped into larger divisions I have called - \dfn{part}s. Parts are numbered independently of sections, in - upper-case roman numerals. (There is no special reason for not - numbering sections within parts; I~just prefer to have fewer - levels of numbering, so we get `\S$12.6$' instead of - `Subsection~$4.1.6$'.) - -\lines\it - |\input pdccmdoc| - |\part{| title |}| ---or--- |\majorheadline{| title |}| - |\section{| title |}| - \quad contents of section -\smallbreak - more sections -\smallbreak - |\frontmatter| - \quad front matter - |\endfrontmatter| - |\bye| -\endlines - -\subsec{Front matter} - - The front matter of the document---the title page, preface, - forword, etc.---must be printed {\it last}, with the table of - contents at the end of the front matter; this is so that the - table of contents may be accumulated during the \TeX ing of the - file.\note{It has a benefit for people reading the document with - a browser: page~1 of the document is the first page of the DVI - file, which makes selecting a given page easy, and the table of - contents is at the very end, so the browser's `go to last page' - command can be used to find the table of contents quickly.} - The front matter starts with |\frontmatter| and may contain - |\section| commands. Such sections will be unnumbered and will - not appear in the table of contents. - - For a short document, a separate title page is probably - excessive, and an abstract may be preferable to a preface. In - this case the first page after |\frontmatter| could have the - title of the document (with author etc.)\ followed by an - abstract, any copyright information (or other small print), and - the contents (generated by |\endfrontmatter|). In other words, - something like this: -\lines\it - |\frontmatter| - \quad commands to print the title, etc. - \quad|\abstract| - \qquad the text of the abstract - \quad|\endabstract| - \quad copyright information, etc. - |\endfrontmatter| -\endlines - For a longer document, there will be a separate title page and - perhaps a preface. -\lines\it - |\frontmatter| - \quad|\titlepage| - \qquad commands to print the title, etc. - \quad|\splittitlepage| - \qquad print copyright information, etc. - \quad|\endtitlepage| - \quad|\section{Preface}| - \qquad text of preface, etc. - |\endfrontmatter| -\endlines - The macro |\splittitlepage| marks the division between the title - page (title recto, page~i) and the back of the title page (title - verso, page~ii), which is where copyright information goes. - When formatting for one-sided printing, the copyright - information belongs on the title recto, because the title verso - will be blank, so |\splittitle| instead does |\vfill|. -%}}} docs -%{{{ new syms -\subsec{New symbols} - - Several new symbols common to Malvern~A and PostScript fonts are - added (listed in Table~3). Approximations built from other - glyphs are available in Computer Modern documents. - - -\def\chartable#1{% - \midinsert - \leftline{{\bf Table \newtableid}\quad #1}\smallskip - \def\cs##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{\csname##1\endcsname\hfil} - {\tt\char`\\##1}\hfil}} - \def\mcs##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{$\csname##1\endcsname$\hfil} - {\tt\char`\\##1}\hfil}} - \def\mch##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{$##1$\hfil} - {\tt##1}\hfil}} - \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox\bgroup - \hrule\medskip - \halign\bgroup ##\hfil&& \hskip\colsep##\hfil\cr -} -\def\endchartable{ - \egroup - \smallskip\hrule - \egroup - \endinsert -} - -\chartable{New symbols} - \cs{cents}& \cs{pounds}& \cs{yen}& \cs{florin}\cr - \cs{currency}& \cs{lguillemet}& \cs{rguillemet}& \cs{gbdecimal}\cr - \cs{permille}& \cs{registered}& \cs{orda}& \cs{ordo}\cr - \cs{S}& \cs{P}& \cs{dag}& \cs{ddag}\cr -\endchartable - - The symbols in the last row are `new' in the sense that they - will change according to the current font when using Malvern or - PostScript fonts. - - - The maths symbols in Table~4 will be in the current |\rm| font - (fam~0) in PostScript documents. -\begingroup\catcode`_=12 \catcode`\|=12 -\chartable{Maths symbols taken from Adobe's latin character set} - \mch{<}& \mch{>}& \mcs{_}& \mch{|}\cr - \mcs{backslash}& \mcs{setminus}& \mcs{sim}& \mcs{mid}\cr - \mcs{bullet} &\mcs{lbrace}& \mcs{rbrace}\cr -\endchartable -\endgroup - -%}}} new syms -%}}} using - -\section{Appendix} -%{{{ tagged-table intrinsics - -\def\taggedtable#1#2#3{ - \medskip - \noindent{\bf Table \newtableid}\quad#1 - \medskip - \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd - \hrule height 1pt \medskip - \line{\it\strut\hbox to \leftmargin{#2\hfil}{\it #3}\hfil} - \smallskip \hrule - } - \tagged \everytag{\tt} -} -\def\endtaggedtable{ - \endtagged - \removelastskip \medskip \hrule height 1pt \bigskip -} - -%}}} tagged-table intrisnics -%{{{ file types -\subsec{File suffixes} - - In this document, `a |foo| file' refers to a file of the type - conventionally given a name ending in `-|.foo|' (using lower - case because \TeX\ file names are always given in lower case). - This table lists some conventional file name suffixes used for - files in this package. - -\taggedtable{File suffixes used in this package}{\hbox to - \gridwd{Suffix\hfil Origin}}{Meaning} -\def\\#1#2{\TAG{\hbox to \gridwd{\tt#1\hfil\rm#2}}} -\\{1}{Unix} - Manual page for a program, in |nroff| format. -\\{def}{\LaTeX~2e} - Definitions used by macro files but not expected to be referred - to directly in user documents. -\\{dtx}{\LaTeX~2e} - Documented \TeX\ macros---a file which combines macro - definitions with their printed documentation. -\\{eps}{Adobe} - An EPSF (Encapsulated PostScript Format) file. -\\{fig}{Fig} - A picture file in Fig's undocumented format. -\\{fnt}{PDCMAC} - Font list---a list of fonts used in a document, generated by the - PDCFSEL macros. -%\\{idx}{\LaTeX~$2.09$} -% Unsorted index file. (The lamentable convention of using |idx| -% and |ind|, both standing for `index' but representing different -% stages in the index-generation process, is for compatibility -% with \LaTeX.) -\\{in}{GNU} - Template for a configuration file---when using the |configure| - script, the file |foo| is generated from the template |foo.in|. -\\{tex}{\TeX} - (1)~A plain \TeX\ document. (2)~A plain \TeX\ definition file. -\\{tgz}{GNU} - A Unix |tar| archive, compressed with GNU |zip|. (Same as - |tar.gz|.) -\\{txt}{traditional} - Plain ASCII text, readable on the terminal. -\\{zip}{?PKZIP} - An MS-DOS PKZIP archive. -\endtaggedtable - -%}}} file types -%{{{ file list - -\subsec{List of files} - - Here is a list of files supplied with the package. A list of - the files generated from these---the definition files, used in - documents---form the next section. - - All the names are chosen so that they may be copied onto, say, - an ISO~9660\note{See note~1 on page 2.} or MS-DOS file system and - back to a sensible file system without the names being changed. - -\taggedtable{Files supplied in the package.}{File}{Contents} -\\{00readme.txt} - Brief description of the package. - -\\{configure} - A shell script used to automatically configure the makefile for - Unix systems. (This is an unavoidable exception to the rule - that names are ISO-9660-compatible.) - -\\{copying.tex} - A copy of the GNU General Public Licence, in \TeX able form. - -\\{copying.txt} - A copy of the GNU General Public Licence. - -\\{dtxtags} - Shellscript for making tag files in |etags|(1) format. - -\\{dtxtags.1} - A Unix manual entry for |dtxtags|.\note{This (and three more - shellscripts used in the makefile) are not intended to be - installed anywhere, but I~included manual pages just in case - they are---or in case the installer is curious as to what these - scripts do.} - -\\{fig2epsf} - A Unix shellscript that converts figures from Fig's format into - Encapsulated PostScript Format (EPSF) version~$3.0$ files. It - uses |fig2dev| (from the TransFig package) to do most of the - work. (It munges the PostScript code produced by |fig2dev| - 2.1.4.1 so that it will print and will work with Ghostview.) - -\\{fig2epsf.1} - A Unix manual page for |fig2epsf|. - -\\{install.txt} - Installation hints. - -\\{makefile.in} - Template from which the configuration process generates a - makefile, used by Unix's |make| command to automate compilation - and installation. Should be called |Makefile.in| but that's not - ISO-9660-compliant. - -\\{magrmac.dtx} - Documentation for Malvern Greek macros. This replaces the file - |magrmac.tex| included in Malvern release~$1.2$. - -\\{magrman.tex} - Brief user manual for |magrmac.tex|. This replaces the version - distributed with Malvern~$1.2$. It requires some Malvern~G - fonts. - -\\{oput01.eps oput02.eps} - Diagrams for |pdcoput5.dtx|.\note{The second edition of the {\it - PostScript Language Reference Manual} says these should be called - `-|.epsf|', but such names are not ISO-9660-compliant, so I~have - switched to `-|.eps|'.} - -\\{oput01.fig oput02.fig} - Source code for the above figures (Fig format). - -\\{pdcadobe.dtx} - Source code and documentation for |pdcadobe.tex|. - -\\{pdccode.dtx} - Source code and documentation for |pdccode.tex|. - -\\{pdccode.tex} - Macros used by |dtx| files. This file has to be included - because |pdccode.dtx| can't be \TeX ed without it. - -\\{pdccode2.tex} - An experimental variation allowing multiple simultaneous - code files. - -\\{pdcfmt2.dtx} - Source code and documentation for formatting macros. - -\\{pdcfsel.dtx} - Source code and documentation for font selection macros. - -\\{pdcguide.dvi} - A copy of the user guide, already run through \TeX. - -\\{pdcguide.tex} - This user guide for PDCMAC. - -\\{pdcl1maa.dtx} - Source code and documentation for |pdcl1maa.tex|. - -\\{pdcmacvn.tex} - Version number for the whole package. - -\\{pdcmisc.dtx} - Source code and documentation for some small macro files. - -\\{pdcmondo.tex} - Makes a combined listing of all the |dtx| files (except - |pdcsty.dtx|). - -\\{pdcoput5.dtx} - Source code and documentation for an output routine. - -\\{pdcsty.dtx} - Source code and documentation for style files (|pdccmdoc.tex|, - |ma55doc.tex|, etc.). - -\\{pinstall} - A Unix shellscript that substitutes for the |install| command on - systems which don't have GNU |install|.\note{I am not going to - bother trying to make a makefile that will work with all the - different versions of |install|, since there is no easy way to - tell them apart and they are mutually incompatible.} - -\\{pinstall.1} - A Unix manual page for |pinstall|. - -\\{pmkdir} - A Unix shellscript used to create a directory. Unlike plain - |mkdir|, it creates parent directories of the specified - directory if they do not exist. This would be called - |pmkdirhier| but that name is not ISO-9660-compliant. - -\\{pmkdir.1} - A Unix manual page for |pmkdir|. - -\\{version.txt} - List of the version identifiers of the |dtx| files and the - shellscripts that come with the package. -\endtaggedtable - -%}}} file list -%{{{ macro files - -\subsec{List of definition files} - - The following files are the ones that are intended to go in the - \TeX\ inputs area and to be used in documents. Here a - \dfn{macro file} is simply a file of \TeX\ definitions; a - \dfn{style file} is a higher-level definition file that - specifies most of the things that affect the style of a document - (layout, fonts, macros, etc.). Style files start by reading a - bunch of macro files. - -\taggedtable{Files generated from the |dtx| files.}{File}{Contents} -\\{ma55doc.tex} - Style file for short documents with Malvern~55 as the text font. - A table of contents and page headlines are generated - automatically. - -\\{ma55lft.tex} - Style file for very short documents with Malvern~55 as the text - font. `Leaflet'-class documents have no table of contents. - -\\{magrmac.tex} - Macros for typesetting in Greek with Malvern fonts (or any font - with the Malvern~G encoding). There is a brief user's guide in - |magrman.tex|. - -\\{pdcadobe.tex} - Support for fonts with the Adobe Standard Roman and Adobe Symbol - repertoires\note{The \dfn{repertoire} of an encoding scheme is - the set of characters/glyphs it includes. Since PostScript - fonts may be easily re-encoded, repertoire is more significant - then the actual encoding.} in the |dvi| file, and ISO~8859--1 - (Latin-1) conventions in the manuscript file. The output - encoding actually used is that variation on \TeX\ Text generated - by the |afm2tfm| that comes with DVIPS. Newer \TeX\ systems - should instead use PostScript fonts with (a subset of) the 1990 - Cork encoding.\note{Variously called `DC', `EC', `T1', and - `\TeX\ Extended Text---Latin', and described in {\it TUGboat} - 10\#4.} This file actually combines two functions: (1)~making - the various symbols availabe via commands like |\pounds| and - (2)~making Latin-1 characters in the manuscript produce - corresponding characters in the output. Described in - |pdcadobe.dtx|. - - -\\{pdccmdoc.tex} - Style file for short documents with Computer Modern Roman as the - text font. A table of contents and page headlines are generated - automatically. - -\\{pdccmlft.tex} - Style file for very short documents with Computer Modern Roman - as the text font. `Leaflet'-class documents have no table of - contents. - -\\{pdcfmt2.tex} - Macros for formatting text---bulleted and numbered lists, syntax - descriptions, verbatim text, headings, etc. Most of - the facilities used by the style files come from this file. - -\\{pdcfsel.tex} - Macros for selecting fonts. Fonts are organized into - \dfn{fontset}s (selected with macros with names like - |\bodyfonts|) in which fonts are selected with nicknames like - |\it|, |\bf| (specified at the start of the document using - template macros). - -\\{pdchyex.tex} - Some random British English hyphenation exceptions (developed - while I~was using American English hyphenation paterns). You - may not want to use this. Described in |pdcmisc.dtx|. - -\\{pdcimth.tex} - Make letters in maths formulas come out in text italic instead - of math italic. Useful if the body font isn't CMR, or if - multiple-letter identifiers are used. Described in - |pdcmisc.dtx|. - -\\{pdcl1maa.tex} - Support for documents with using the ISO~8859--1 (Latin-1) - character set in the manuscript file and fonts with Malvern~A - encoding in the |dvi| file. Described in |pdcl1maa.dtx|. - -\\{pdccmsub.tex} - Define some Malvern~A and PostScript glyphs (like \yen, - \registered) by overprinting CM glyphs. Described in - |pdcmisc.dtx|. - -\\{pdcmigr.tex} - Make Greek capitals in maths mode use math italic (fam~1) - letters instead of letters from the roman font. Especially - useful when there are no Greek caps in the roman font. - Described in |pdcmisc.dtx|. -\endtaggedtable -%}}} macro files -%{{{ old files -\subsec{Obselete files} - - The following macro files were included with the Malvern~$1.0$ - distribution, but were not intended to be installed. - Nevertheless they appear to have been copied into some older - versions of the Unix\TeX\ distribution. They are obselete, and - their successors have new names (intended to reduce the chance - of accidental clashes). I'd appreciate people removing them - from their \TeX\ systems. -\display - |formac.tex|& - |parmac.tex|& - |utils.tex|& - |ssoutput.tex|\cr - |ldfonts.tex|& - |malvern.tex|& - |cmdoc.tex|\cr -\enddisplay - The following documents are similarly obselete and should not be - in the macros directory anyway. -\display - |aboutmalvern.tex|& - |latexfmv.tex|\cr -\enddisplay - The following macro files have the new-style names, but are - superseded by PDCMAC~$1.0$ files. You are not required to - remove then if you have documents using them. Fortunately, they - appear not to have been absorbed by the Unix\TeX\ distribution - anyway. -\display - |pdcfmt.tex|& - |pdcpars.tex|& - |pdcutil.tex|& - |pdcoput.tex|\cr -\enddisplay - The new versions will have the major number of their version ID - appended to their names (e.g., |pdcfmt2.tex|), and this way new - and old versions may coexist, allowing older documents to still - be processed by \TeX. The functionality of |pdcpars.tex| and - |pdcfmt.tex| have been taken over by |pdcfmt2.tex|. - - -%}}} old files -%{{{ gpl - -\rigidbalancepartialpage{\bigskip} - -\begingroup \notefonts \setncolumns2 \everypage{} \leftmargin=0pt - \advance\textlistdepth2 \let\section=\subsec - \input copying.tex - \rigidbalancepartialpage{\bigskip} -\endgroup - - -%}}} gpl - -\frontmatter -%{{{ an absurd logo - -\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED -%{{{ CMSSDC logo - -\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{ - -\font\titlefont=cmssdc10 at 24pt - -\leftline{\titlefont P D C M A C\quad User Guide} - -\bigskip -} % end of vbox -%}}} -\else -%{{{ PostScript logo - -\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd - \font\thefont=pplr at 120pt - \input rotate - - \line{\thefont - \setbox0=\hbox{\lower0.975ex\hbox{pd}}\dp0=1ex \ht0=0pt \rotu0% - c% - \setbox0=\hbox{\lower0.95ex\hbox{vw}}\dp0=1ex \ht0=0pt \rotu0% - c\hfil - } -} -\medskip -\leftline{\font\thotherfont=pplri at 60pt \thotherfont - \kern-0.1em USER GUIDE} -\bigskip - -%}}} PostScript logo -\fi -%}}} an absurd logo -%{{{ titlepage - -\halign{#\hfil\cr - \headingfonts Edition 1 for Release - $\textfont0=\font \pdcmacversion$\cr -\noalign{\medskip}% - P. Damian Cugley\cr -\noalign{\smallskip}% - Oxford University Computing Laboratory\cr - Parks Road\cr - Oxford \sc{OX2~7HN}\cr - UK\cr -\noalign{\smallskip}% - |damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk|\cr -} - -\bigskip -\abstract - PDCMAC is a collection of macro files intended to be useful with - \TeX\ formats with similar conventions to those described in the - {\it\TeX book}. This document describes how to unpack the files - and use them in \TeX\ documents. -\endabstract - -\bigskip - -\global\setbox\botbox\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd \prevdepth=0pt -\noindent - {\it PDCMAC User Guide}. \copyright~1995 P. Damian Cugley. All - rights reserved. Verbatim copies of this document (including - this copyright message) may be freely distributed. This edition - first published March 1995. -} - -\let\section=\subsec -%}}} title page -\endfrontmatter - -\bye -%}}} -%Local Variables: -%fill-prefix: " " -%fold-folded-p: t -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a83c61b95e6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ -% pdchyex.tex 1.4 1995/03/30 -- some British hyphenations -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex", -%%% version = "1.4", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "A non-exhaustive set of hyphenation exceptions -%%% designed to make TeX with American hyphenation -%%% tables produce some British hyphenations. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%%} - -\message{1.4 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 \uchyph=0 -\hyphenation{ - le-gend le-gends re-adjust re-appear exact-ing - abs-cess abs-cess-es abs-cessed ana-lyse ana-lyses - ana-lysis ana-lyses appear-ance appear-ances bio-graphy - celeb-rate celeb-rates celeb-rations cor-respond-ence - depend-ent des-pise des-pises dis-pised dimin-ish - dimin-ish-es dimin-ish-ed dis-connect dis-connect-ed - dis-connects forget-ting gener-ally haemor-rhage - illus-trate immedi-ate immedi-ately immport-ance - inexplic-able inter-pret inter-est inter-ested - inter-est-ing minis-ter origin-ally philo-sophy - philo-sophic philo-sophic-ally prim-ary prob-ably - semb-lance - calm-est debt-ors fea-ther fea-thers post-humous lamb-like - poingn-ant tough-ish ach-ing archaeo-logy etymo-logy - philo-logist psycho-logist tauto-logy zoolo-gist - art-iest cig-ar-ette bio-logy bio-chem-is-try boy-friend - brit-ain brit-ish com-ic com-ics cug-ley dogs-body - dor-mouse gai-man graph-ic immedie-ate immedi-ate - immedi-ately issue mckean mis-hap mis-haps news-letter - news-paper night-crawler origin-ally origin-ator phys-ique - phys-iques porn-o-graphy porn-o-graphic rec-om-mend-ation - Ser-geant ser-geant Sien-kie-wicz spon-tan-e-ous - spon-tan-e-ously stop-ped strip-ped teen-ager teen-agers - tem-per-men-tal Thatch-er-ism Thatch-er-ite under-ground - under-grounds var-i-able venge-ance warp-smith warp-smiths - whirl-pool -} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex deleted file mode 100644 index fc42eb8365a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -% pdcimth.tex 1.4 1995/03/30 - maths letters in text italic -\message{1.4 1995/03/30} - -\begingroup - \count0="7400 \count1=\count0 - \advance\count0 by`A \advance\count1 by`a - \count2=`A \count3=`a \count4=26 - \loop\ifnum\count4>0 - \advance\count4 by-1 - \global\mathcode\count2=\count0 - \global\mathcode\count3=\count1 - \advance\count0 by1 \advance\count1 by1 - \advance\count2 by1 \advance\count3 by1 - \repeat -\endgroup -\endinput -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex", -%%% version = "1.4", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines -%%% mathcodes to use letters from the -%%% text italic font instead of math italic. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index b7ec2dbe81a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,248 +0,0 @@ -% pdcl1maa.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcl1maa.tex -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "PDCL1MAA -- Formatting Macros", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 1.3 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:09:52 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX definitions file pdcl1maa.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ pdcl1maa -%{{{ preamble - -\relax -\input pdccode - -\document -\rcs$Id: pdcl1maa.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/30 16:09:52 pdc Exp $\endrcs -\codefile{pdcl1maa.tex} -%}}} preamble -%{{{ introduction - -\author{P. Damian Cugley} -\title{PDCL1MAA---Macros for using Latin-1 characters with Malvern~A} -\section{Introduction} - - This document describes |pdcl1maa.tex|, a collection of - definitions designed to make Malvern~A characters available - using the ISO~8859--1 input encoding (Latin-1). - - -\subsec{About this document} - - The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in - |pdcl1maa.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The - \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for - similar purposes.} which, when processed by plain \TeX, - generates a fresh copy of |pdcl1maa.tex| in the current directory - in addition to the |dvi| file. This ensures that the printed - documentation and the code it describes are identical. The - |dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|. - -%}}} introduction -%{{{ File identification -\section{File identification} - - Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the - file. - -\code - \|\% pdcl1maa.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Latin-1 chars in Malvern-A - | - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "ISO 8859-1 characters using Malvern-A fonts. - |%%% This file was generated by running - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\} - | -\endcode -%}}} file id -%{{{ ISO 8859-1 support -\section{ISO 8859--1 input} - -\subsec{Symbols} - - Those characters whose code is the same as the code of the - corresponding glyph are left alone (with catcode~12). For - example, |^^a3| (pounds sterling) is left alone. - - Those that have an equivalent |\chardef| (or |\mathchardef|) - name are defined with |\let|. Those with an equivalent standard - ligature use that ligature. - - I don't use |\declareactivechar| on these because they would not - work properly in verbatim text with catcode~12. (Extending - verbatim text to include Latin-1 will take a few definitions - along the same lines as |\ttlq| etc.) -\code - |\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~ -% A1 -% A2 -% A3 -% A4 - |\catcode`^^a5\active \let^^a5=\yen -% A6 - |\catcode`^^a7\active \let^^a7=\S - |\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\" - |\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright - |\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda - |\catcode`^^ab\active \def^^ab{<<} - |\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot - |\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\- - |\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered - |\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\= -\smallbreak - |\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees - |\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm - |\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2} - |\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3} - |\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\' - |\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu - |\catcode`^^b6\active \let^^b6=\P - |\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal - |\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\c - |\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1} - |\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo - |\catcode`^^bb\active \def^^bb{>>} - |\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14} - |\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12} - |\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34} - |\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`} -\smallbreak - |\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times - |\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div -\endcode - -\subsec{Composite letters} - - - The characters that represent marks for composite - letters\footnote*{This phrase is used on the grounds that the - word {\it accent} tends to provoke lectures on ways in which - many composite letters do {\it not} represent accents in the - languages in which they are used.} are |\let| to the - corresponding composite-letter-making command---one may write - `{\tt\char"7F u\char"18 c}' to get `\"u\c c'. -\code - |\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\`A} - |\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\'A} - |\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\^A} - |\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\~A} - |\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\"A} - |\catcode`^^c5\active \let^^c5=\AA - |\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE - |\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\c C} - |\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\`E} - |\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\'E} - |\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\^E} - |\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\"E} - |\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\`I} - |\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\'I} - |\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\^I} - |\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\"I} -\smallbreak - |\catcode`^^d0\active \let^^d0=\DH - |\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\~N} - |\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\`O} - |\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\'O} - |\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\^O} - |\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\~O} - |\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\"O} - |\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O - |\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\`U} - |\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\'U} - |\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\^U} - |\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\"U} - |\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\'Y} - |\catcode`^^de\active \let^^de=\TH - |\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss -\smallbreak - |\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\'a} - |\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\`a} - |\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\^a} - |\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\~a} - |\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\"a} - |\catcode`^^e5\active \let^^e5=\aa - |\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae - |\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\c c} - |\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\`e} - |\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\'e} - |\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\^e} - |\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\"e} - |\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\`i} - |\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\'i} - |\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\^i} - |\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\"i} -\smallbreak - |\catcode`^^f0\active \let^^f0=\dh - |\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\~n} - |\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\`o} - |\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\'o} - |\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\^o} - |\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\~o} - |\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\"o} - |\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o - |\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\`u} - |\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\'u} - |\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\^u} - |\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\"u} - |\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\'y} - |\catcode`^^fe\active \let^^fe=\th - |\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\"y} -\endcode - -%}}} ISO 8859-1 support -\endcodefile -\enddocument -\bye -%}}} pdcl1maa.dtx - -%Local variables: -%fill-prefix: "\t" -%fold-folded-p: t -%End: - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 17f690c48d5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ -% pdcl1maa.tex 1.3 1995/03/30 -- Latin-1 chars in Malvern-A - -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex", -%%% version = "1.3", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "ISO 8859-1 characters using Malvern-A fonts. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcl1maa.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcl1maa.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } - -\message{1.3 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~ -\catcode`^^a5\active \let^^a5=\yen -\catcode`^^a7\active \let^^a7=\S -\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\" -\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright -\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda -\catcode`^^ab\active \def^^ab{<<} -\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot -\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\- -\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered -\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\= -\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees -\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm -\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2} -\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3} -\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\' -\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu -\catcode`^^b6\active \let^^b6=\P -\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal -\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\c -\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1} -\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo -\catcode`^^bb\active \def^^bb{>>} -\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14} -\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12} -\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34} -\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`} -\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times -\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div -\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\`A} -\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\'A} -\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\^A} -\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\~A} -\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\"A} -\catcode`^^c5\active \let^^c5=\AA -\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE -\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\c C} -\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\`E} -\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\'E} -\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\^E} -\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\"E} -\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\`I} -\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\'I} -\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\^I} -\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\"I} -\catcode`^^d0\active \let^^d0=\DH -\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\~N} -\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\`O} -\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\'O} -\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\^O} -\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\~O} -\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\"O} -\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O -\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\`U} -\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\'U} -\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\^U} -\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\"U} -\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\'Y} -\catcode`^^de\active \let^^de=\TH -\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss -\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\'a} -\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\`a} -\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\^a} -\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\~a} -\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\"a} -\catcode`^^e5\active \let^^e5=\aa -\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae -\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\c c} -\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\`e} -\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\'e} -\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\^e} -\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\"e} -\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\`i} -\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\'i} -\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\^i} -\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\"i} -\catcode`^^f0\active \let^^f0=\dh -\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\~n} -\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\`o} -\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\'o} -\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\^o} -\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\~o} -\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\"o} -\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o -\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\`u} -\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\'u} -\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\^u} -\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\"u} -\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\'y} -\catcode`^^fe\active \let^^fe=\th -\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\"y} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def deleted file mode 100644 index 7ccd9172b55..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ -% pdclft.def 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "pdclft.def", -%%% version = "1.2", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "Sectioning macros for style files. -%%% This macro file was generated by running plain -%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "" -%%%} - -\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm -\botmg=\topmg -\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip -\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi -\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi -\setpaper{210mm}{297mm} -\setnkgrid{4}{3} -\colrule=0pt -\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep -\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt - \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi} -\everyfootnote={\notefonts} -\everylinenum={\smallfonts} -\everylinenum={\smallfonts} -\everytag={\bf} -\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno -\def\thesecno{% - \n{% - \number\secno - \ifnum\subsecno>0 - .\number\subsecno - \fi - }% -} -\def\section{ - \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0 - \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts\thesecno\enspace}{} -} -\def\subsec{ - \global\advance\subsecno1 - \doheading\smallskipamount{\bodyfonts\thesecno\enspace}{} -} -\newtoks\majorheadline -\expandafter\majorheadline - \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}} -\newif\ifnoheadline \newif\iftwosided -\headline{% - \ifnoheadline - \hfil - \else\iftwosided - \ifodd\pageno - \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}% - \else - {\bf\folio}\quad \the\majorheadline\hfil - \fi - \else - \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}% - \fi\fi -} -\footline{% - \ifnoheadline - \global\noheadlinefalse - \hfil{\bf\folio}\hfil - \else - \hfil - \fi -} -\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} -\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}} -\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-% - {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}} -\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}} -\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 } -\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup - \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}} -} \the\toks0 -\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}} -\def\|{% - \relax\ifmmode - \Vert - \else - \begingroup - \ttb \setupverbatim - \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup - \fi -} -\def\inputifexists#1{% - \openin15=#1 - \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi - \closein15 -} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex deleted file mode 100644 index e8a114b16d7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -\def\pdcmacversion{1.0.01} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a01860a53e3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -% pdcmigr.tex 1.4 1995/03/30-- see end of file for more info -\message{1.4 <pdc 1995/03/30>} -\mathchardef\Gamma = "7100 -\mathchardef\Delta = "7101 -\mathchardef\Theta = "7102 -\mathchardef\Lambda = "7103 -\mathchardef\Xi = "7104 -\mathchardef\Pi = "7105 -\mathchardef\Sigma = "7106 -\mathchardef\Upsilon = "7107 -\mathchardef\Phi = "7108 -\mathchardef\Psi = "7109 -\mathchardef\Omega = "710A -\endinput -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex", -%%% version = "1.4", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines -%%% \Gamma, ..., \Omega to use letters from the -%%% maths italic font instead of the roman font. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 4e73e2c8eda..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,555 +0,0 @@ -% pdcmisc.dtx -- documentation and source code for misc macro files -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "Miscellanous macro files", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 1.4 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:13:08 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX definitions files pdcmigr.tex, pdcimth.tex, -%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcmasyb.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions files and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ pdcmisc.dtx -%{{{ preamble - -\relax -\input pdccode - -\document -\rcs$Id: pdcmisc.dtx,v 1.4 1995/03/30 16:13:08 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\def\newfile{\lineno=0 } -%}}} preamble -%{{{ intro -\author{P. Damian Cugley} -\title{Miscellaneous macro files} - -%}}} intro -%{{{ pdcmigr - -\newfile -\section{PDCMIGR: Use math italic Greek capitals} - - Knuth notes that it is conventional to use unslanted Greek - capitals in maths, even though other letters are slanted - (I~personally think that it looks nicer to use slanted Greek - caps). Thus \TeX\ takes the Greek capitals from fam~0 by - default. - - If you are using a body text font that does not have the Greek - capitals---for example, almost any PostScript or Cork-style - font---then this no longer works. Better then to switch to - using the Greek capitals from the math italic font (fam~1). - That's what the file |pdcmigr.tex| does. The characters are - still in maths class~7, meaning that they will respect changes - to |\fam| made by font-switching commands. - -\codefile{pdcmigr.tex} - -\code - \|\% pdcmigr.tex \fileversion~\filedate -- see end of file % - for more info - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\} -\smallbreak - |\mathchardef\Gamma = "7100 - |\mathchardef\Delta = "7101 - |\mathchardef\Theta = "7102 - |\mathchardef\Lambda = "7103 - |\mathchardef\Xi = "7104 - |\mathchardef\Pi = "7105 - |\mathchardef\Sigma = "7106 - |\mathchardef\Upsilon = "7107 - |\mathchardef\Phi = "7108 - |\mathchardef\Psi = "7109 - |\mathchardef\Omega = "710A -\endcode - - This file has more comments than code. Since the code is so - short I think I'll get away with putting the comments after an - |\endinput|. -\code - |\endinput -\smallskip - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines - |%%% \Gamma, ..., \Omega to use letters from the - |%%% maths italic font instead of the roman font. - |%%% This file was generated by running - |%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - |%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } -\endcode - -\endcodefile -%}}} pdcmigr -%{{{ pdcimth - -\newfile -\section{PDCIMTH: use text italic letters in maths mode} - - Very few existing font families have a separate math-italic font. When - using these fonts as body fonts, with the Computer Modern fonts as - maths fonts, it looks wrong to have the maths letters in a completely - different style form the text italic. Therefore it makes sense to - redefine maths mode so that the letters come from the text italic font. - - This is also useful when multiple-letter identifiers are used in maths - mode. We c an say |$difference:=height+depth$| and get `$\it - difference:=height+depth$' instead of `$difference:=height+depth$'. - - In the following, the counters |\count0| to |\count4| are used as - follows: -$$\centerline{\vbox{\halign{\tt\cs{#}\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr - count0&mathcode for current upper case char\cr - count1&mathcode for current lower case char\cr - count2&ASCII code of current upper case char\cr - count3&ASCII code of current lower case char\cr - count4&number of characters left to redefine\cr -}}}$$ - The grouping prevents this temporary use conflicting with \TeX's - use of these counters. - -\codefile{pdcimth.tex} -\code - \|\% pdcimth.tex \fileversion~\filedate~- maths letters in text italic - \|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\} - | - |\begingroup -\smallbreak - | \count0="7400 \count1=\count0 - | \advance\count0 by`A \advance\count1 by`a - | \count2=`A \count3=`a \count4=26 -\smallbreak - | \loop\ifnum\count4>0 - | \advance\count4 by-1 - | \global\mathcode\count2=\count0 - | \global\mathcode\count3=\count1 - | \advance\count0 by1 \advance\count1 by1 - | \advance\count2 by1 \advance\count3 by1 - | \repeat -\smallbreak - |\endgroup -\endcode -\noindent - The value $\hbox{\H{}\tt 7400} + c$ used above means mathcode~7, - fam~4 (|\itfam|), character~$c$. - - Once again, the code is short enough that I think I can get away - with putting the comments at the end: -\code - |\endinput -\smallskip - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines - |%%% mathcodes to use letters from the - |%%% text italic font instead of math italic. - |%%% This file was generated by running - |%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - |%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } -\endcode -\endcodefile -%}}} pdcimth -%{{{ pdchyex - -\newfile -\section{PDCHYEX: Hyphenation exceptions} - - These hyphenation exceptions are ones I~use for must documents. - -\notepar - Of all the macro files in this package, this is the one you - should be most chary of using. These are written for a \TeX\ - system which uses American English hyphenation patterns, but are - intended to help it produce hyphenations suitable for British - English, and this peverse approach will probably lead to all - sorts of anomalies. Ideally separate hyphenation patterns will - be used for British English documents. -\endnotepar - -\codefile{pdchyex.tex} - -\subsec{File identification} - - The list of exceptions is expected to grow, so it seems best to - have the identification at the top of the file. - -\code - \|\% pdchyex.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- some British hyphenations -\smallskip - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "A non-exhaustive set of hyphenation exceptions - |%%% designed to make TeX with American hyphenation - |%%% tables produce some British hyphenations. - |%%% This file was generated by running - |%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - |%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%%} - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\} - | -\endcode - -\subsec{Setting parameters} - - These settings are from {\it Hart's Rules} p.\thinspace141. -\code - |\lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 \uchyph=0 -\endcode - -\subsec{And finally, the hyphenation exceptions} - -\code - |\hyphenation{ -\endcode - First, some words from {\it Hart's Rules}\/ pp.\thinspace14--15. - I've taken the list on p.\thinspace14 and included here those - which were given wrong hyphenation by \TeX's default tables. -\code - | le-gend le-gends re-adjust re-appear exact-ing -\smallbreak - - | abs-cess abs-cess-es abs-cessed ana-lyse ana-lyses - | ana-lysis ana-lyses appear-ance appear-ances bio-graphy - | celeb-rate celeb-rates celeb-rations cor-respond-ence - | depend-ent des-pise des-pises dis-pised dimin-ish - | dimin-ish-es dimin-ish-ed dis-connect dis-connect-ed - | dis-connects forget-ting gener-ally haemor-rhage - | illus-trate immedi-ate immedi-ately immport-ance - | inexplic-able inter-pret inter-est inter-ested - | inter-est-ing minis-ter origin-ally philo-sophy - | philo-sophic philo-sophic-ally prim-ary prob-ably - | semb-lance -\smallbreak - | calm-est debt-ors fea-ther fea-thers post-humous lamb-like - | poingn-ant tough-ish ach-ing archaeo-logy etymo-logy - | philo-logist psycho-logist tauto-logy zoolo-gist -\endcode - Now some random hyphenations I~encountered in my own documents - at some point. I~haven't checked these in a spelling - dictionary, so don't use them in documents where your life - depends on correct hyphenation. -\code - - | art-iest cig-ar-ette bio-logy bio-chem-is-try boy-friend - | brit-ain brit-ish com-ic com-ics cug-ley dogs-body - | dor-mouse gai-man graph-ic immedie-ate immedi-ate - | immedi-ately issue mckean mis-hap mis-haps news-letter - | news-paper night-crawler origin-ally origin-ator phys-ique - | phys-iques porn-o-graphy porn-o-graphic rec-om-mend-ation - | Ser-geant ser-geant Sien-kie-wicz spon-tan-e-ous - | spon-tan-e-ously stop-ped strip-ped teen-ager teen-agers - | tem-per-men-tal Thatch-er-ism Thatch-er-ite under-ground - | under-grounds var-i-able venge-ance warp-smith warp-smiths - | whirl-pool - - |} -\endcode -\endcodefile - -%}}} pdchyex -%{{{ pdccmsub - -\newfile -\codefile{pdccmsub.tex} -\section{PDCCNSUB: Substitutions using Computer Modern glyphs} - - The Malvern and PostScript repertoire includes some characters - not included in the \TeX\ Text fonts used by plain \TeX. I~have - made macros for some of these that assemble symbols from - existing characters. This way documents can be switched between - the different font encoding schemes mroe easily. They won't - look very pretty though. - -\notepar - These work acceptably with ten-point Computer Modern but might - need adjustment with other fonts. -\endnotepar - -%{{{ indentification -\subsec{File dientification} - -\code - \|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- CM subs for PS glyphs -\smallskip - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "Macros for simulating some PostScript characters - |%%% using glyphs form the Computer Modern family. - |%%% This file was generated by running - |%%% plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - |%%% Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\} - | -\endcode - -%}}} indentification - - -\code - |\dimendef\dimena=0 -\endcode -\dimendef\dimena=0 - -%{{{ currency - -\subsec{Currency signs} - -\def\yen{{% - \ooalign{% - \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr - \hfil Y\hfil - }% -}} -\def\currency{{% - \ooalign{% - \dimena-0.10em - \hskip\dimena \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip\dimena\crcr - \hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil - }% -}} - - The Yen sign looks like `50\thinspace000\yen', the cents sign - like `37\rlap/c'. The pounds-sterling sign is always italic. -\code - |\def\pounds{{\it\char36 }} -\smallbreak - |\def\yen{{% - | \ooalign{% - | \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr - | \hfil Y\hfil - | }% - |}} -\smallbreak - |\def\cents{\leavevmode\hbox{\rm\rlap/c}} -\endcode - - The ISO~646 currency sign---originally created to replace the - dollar sign in the international reference version character - set---is supposed to be drawn as a circle with four `ears'; - we'll have to fake it rather crudely: `\currency', as in - `\currency100' or possibly `100\currency'. -\code - |\def\currency{{% - | \ooalign{% - | \hskip-0.1em - | \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip-0.1em\crcr - | \hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil - | }% - |}} -\endcode - - The florin sign `{\it f}' seems to have started life as a way of - getting an italic {\it f} on dot-matrix printers. In an italic - context it still has to be in itaics---switching to a roman - letter does not seem appropriate. -\code - |\def\florin{{\it f\/}} -\endcode - -%}}} currency -%{{{ circled letters - - -\subsec{Things in circles} - -\def\circledletter#1#2{{% - \ooalign{% - \hfil\kern#1\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr - \mathhexbox20D% - }% -}} -\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R} -\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C} - Here's a general macro for making letters in circles---like - the registered trade mark sign `\registered', or the signs - `\circledletter{0.04em}P' and `\circledletter{0.02em}S' - (I~don't use them so I~haven't given them names) or even `\circledletter{0.05em}1'. A matching - copyright sing (using a small capital {\it c} instead of a - lower case {\it c}) looks like `\copyright'. Parameter |#1| - to the macro is the amount to shift the small letter relative - to the circle to get it optically centred. -\code - |\def\circledletter#1#2{{% - | \ooalign{% - | \hfil\kern#1\raise0.00ex \hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr - | \mathhexbox20D% - | }% - |}} -\smallbreak - |\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R} - |\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C} -\endcode -%}}} circled letters -%{{{ guillemets - -\subsec{Guillemets} - -\def\lguillemet{\leavevmode \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}} -\def\rguillemet{\leavevmode \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}} - - Ersatz guillemets look like \lguillemet this\rguillemet. -\code - |\def\lguillemet{% - | \leavevmode - | \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\rguillemet{% - | \leavevmode - | \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}% - |} -\endcode -%}}} guillemets -%{{{ misc -\subsec{Miscellaneous} - -\def\permille{{% - \setbox0 \hbox{/}% - \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/% - \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}% -}} -\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}} -\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}} - - The per-mille sign `\permille' can't be made from `\%' sign because - matching the rings is impossible, so we use `0/00': -\code - |\def\permille{{% - | \setbox0 \hbox{/}% - | \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/% - | \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}% - |}} -\endcode - - The British decimal point is a raised dot: `3\mathhexbox201141' - instead of `3.141'. -\code - |\def\gbdecimal{\mathhexbox201} -\endcode - Unfortunately, this symbol has become a casualty of the `DTP - revolution', and the American use of a full stop as a decimal - point has become common. - - The glyphs `\orda' and `\ordo' are used in to abbreviate Spanish - ordinal numbers: the feminine {\it primera} becomes 1\orda, and - the masculine {\it primero} 1\ordo. -\code - |\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}} - |\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}} -\endcode - - -%}}} misc -%{{{ sc and csc - -\subsec{Substitutions for Malvern's alphabet-switching commands} - - The macros used to select small capitals etc.\ in Malvern fonts - cannot work with Computer Modern, but might appear in documents - anyway. Instead they are all made equivalent to |\relax|. - -\code - |\let\sc=\relax - |\let\csc=\relax - |\let\mc=\relax -\endcode - -%}}} sc and csc - -\endcodefile - -%}}} pdcmasub -\enddocument -\bye -%}}} pdcmisc.dtx -%Local Variables: -%fill-prefix: " " -%fold-folded-p: t -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 5736cf2cbdc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,189 +0,0 @@ -% Combined listing of the PDCMAC macros -% hacked together pdc 1995-03-28 - -\relax -\input pdccode -\input epsf -\errorcontextlines10000 -\document - -\input pdcmacvn - -% Redefine the PDCCODE macros - -%\def\codefile#1{} -%\def\endcodefile{} -%\begingroup\obeylines \toksa={\endgroup % -% \def\CODElinei#1^^M{% -% \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par % -% \endgroup % matches \CODEline -% }% -% \def\CODElinex#1^^M{% -% {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}% -% }% -%} \the\toksa - - -% abbreviated TOC macros taken from pdcsty - -\newwrite\TOCfile -\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc -\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{% - \begingroup\def\n{\string\n} - \def\tmp{#3}% - \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}} - \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup -} -\def\TOCtrim#1:->{} -\def\TOCentryfile#1#2#3{ - \medbreak\noindent{\subsecfont #2}\smallskip -} -\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{ - \indent \llap{\S#1\enspace} - \ignorespaces #2\quad#3\par -} -\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{} - - -% Abbreviated fontmatter definitions from pdcsty: - -\def\frontmatter{ - \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput} - \closeout\TOCfile - \vfill\supereject - \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \headline{\hfil} - \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{} -} -\def\endfrontmatter{ - \section{Contents} - \input\jobname.toc - \vfill\supereject -} -\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue - - -% sectioning taken from pdccode -- adapted to include TOC entries. - -\def\section#1{% - \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0 - \bigbreak - \begingroup - \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000 - \rightskip=0pt plus 2em - \ifsecno \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}\fi #1 - \TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\number\seccount}{#1} - \nobreak\medskip - \endgroup - \noindenttrue -} -\def\subsec#1{% - \advance\subseccount1 - \medbreak - \begingroup - \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000 - \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em - \ifsecno \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.% - \number\subseccount.\enspace}\fi #1 - \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\number\seccount.\number\subseccount}{#1} - \nobreak\smallskip - \endgroup - \noindenttrue -} -\def\title#1{ - \vglue2\baselineskip - \begingroup \titlefont \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000 - #1\smallskip - \endgroup - \leftline{Version \fileversion, - last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate} - \ifx\filelocker\empty\else - \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today} - \fi - \medskip - \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule - \medskip - \rightline{\theauthor} - \bigskip - \headline{\hfil\global\headline{% - \hskip-\leftmargin \sevenbf \themarks \hfil #1 - \fileversion - \ifx\filelocker\empty - \space\mungedate\filedate - \else - e\space\today - \fi - }} - \TOCwrite\TOCentryfile{}{#1} -} - -% A command to include another complete document in this one. - -\def\includedocument#1{ - \begingroup - \let\RELAX\relax - \def\relax{\let\relax\RELAX \iffalse} - \let\document=\fi - \let\enddocument\endinput - \lineno=0 - \input #1 - \vfil\eject \mark{} - \endgroup -} - -\includedocument{maamac.dtx} -\includedocument{magrmac.dtx} -\includedocument{pdcadobe.dtx} -\includedocument{pdccode.dtx} -\includedocument{pdcfsel.dtx} -\includedocument{pdcfmt2.dtx} -\includedocument{pdcl1maa.dtx} -\includedocument{pdcmisc.dtx} -\includedocument{pdcoput5.dtx} - -\headline{\hfil} -\null -% need a blank page (unfortunate kludge) -% This is because each embedded document is followed by a page break -% but we need the a page break before the TOC to finish writing out -% the TOC file. Argh. -\frontmatter -\vfill -\leftline{\titlefont PDCMAC Mondo Combined Listing} -\leftline{\titlefont For release 1\kern-0.07em \raise0.5ex\hbox{.}0} - -\section{Preface} - - PDCMAC is a package of plain \TeX\ macro files. The macro files - are generated by running plain \TeX\ on |dtx| files, which - produces both a copy of the macros and printed documentation - (see the {\it PDCMAC User Guide}\/ for more information). This - `combined listing' is a compilation of most of the |dtx| files - in the PDCMAC distribution (|pdcsty.dtx|, which generates the - sample style files, is not included). - - This compilation document works as follows. First it reads - |pdcmac.tex| and then redefines some macros to write entries for - a table of contents, and then reads the |dtx| files one after - another. The results should be same as running \TeX\ on each of - the |dtx| files separately, except that the pages are numbered - continuously and there is a contents list. - - This is useful for two different purposes: (1)~to make a printed - copy of the macros for reference while using them, and (2)~to - generate all the macro files in one \TeX\ command instead of - several. This is useful when you cannot use the makefile - supplied with the package. If you do have the makefile, it will - probably be the more convenient way to keep the macro files - up-to-date. - - The files are included in alphabetical order. See the PDCCODE - chapter below for information on the PDCCODE system. - -\endfrontmatter -\enddocument -\bye - -%Local Variables: -%fill-prefix: " " -%tex-has-children: t -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 59930102a17..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,986 +0,0 @@ -% pdcoput5.dtx -- documentation & source for outpout routine -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "PDCOPUT5 -- An output routine for zines", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 5.3 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/04/06 11:51:03 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX definitions file pdcoput5.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions file and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex" -%%%} - -%{{{ pdcoput5.tex -%{{{ preamble - -\relax -\input pdccode -\input epsf - -\document -\rcs$Id: pdcoput5.dtx,v 5.3 1995/04/06 11:51:03 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\codefile{pdcoput5.tex} - -\countdef\counta=255 \newcount\countb -\counta=`a \countb="7461 -\loop \ifnum\counta<"7B - \mathcode\counta\countb - \advance\counta1 \advance\countb1 -\repeat -\counta=`A \countb="7441 -\loop \ifnum\counta<"5B - \mathcode\counta\countb - \advance\counta1 \advance\countb1 -\repeat - -%}}} preamble -%{{{ introduction - -\title{PDCOPUT5---an output routine for zines} - -\section{Introduction} - - This document describes |pdcoput5.tex|, a \TeX\ definition file - that defines an output routine for \TeX\ documents. The - complete text of the macros is reproduced, with brief - descriptions of how to exploit them. - - In fact, running plain \TeX\ on the file |pdcoput5.dtx| - generates a copy of the macros in a file called |pdcoput5.tex| - in the current directory, as well as the printed - documentation.\footnote*{The \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files - with the suffix |dtx| for similar purposes.} This should help - ensure that the printed documentation matches the file it - describes. - - The name ends with `-|5|' to distinguish this file from its - predecessor (version 4.1.7), so that documents based on the old - macros can still be printed. - -%{{{ output routines -\subsec{Output routines} - - In a \TeX\ document, there is a special sequence of \TeX\ - commands called the {\it output routine} which controls the - assembly of pages for output to the |dvi| file. - Plain \TeX\ comes with an output routine that handles simple - documents (with footnotes and topinserts); \LaTeX\ has a more - complex output routine that has many extra features (margin - paragraphs, \LaTeX's floats). -%}}} output routines -%{{{ backgorund - -\subsec{Background to this output routine} - - I have been using \TeX\ to typeset fanzines\footnote\dag{The - word {\it fanzine} comes from science fiction fans' jargon: {\it - fan} for amateur (in the sense of unpaid, not necessarily - amateurish) + {\it magazine}. (They call professional magazines - {\it prozines}.) Thus a fanzine (or zine for short) is a small - magazine, often produced by photocopying or cheap printing by - its editor. The word {\it zine} rhymes with {\it scene} not - {\it sign}, and isn't spelled with an apostrophe (unless you are - the sort of person who spells {\it phone}, {\it cello} and {\it - bus} with an apostrophe).} for some years. Unfortunately, for - magazine layouts, the `floating' insertions provided by plain - \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ do exactly the wrong thing---in a magazine, - the designer wants to lay out the components of the page - (illustrations, text, headings) exactly where he or she wants - them, whereas the standard \TeX\ formats are designed to let the - formatter place components according to its own complex rules. - - Originally I~tried browbeating \LaTeX\ into doing the zine - layouts I~wanted. I realized eventually that by the time I~had - redefined enough of \LaTeX's kernel to get the effects I~wanted - I~would more or less have written everything from scratch. The - sort of typesetting I~wanted is so unlike what \LaTeX\ is - designed for that \LaTeX\ was getting in the way. - - Thus I~developed a set of \TeX\ definition files,\footnote\ddag{We - can ignore the intermediate stage, which involved writing a - `user-friendly' format in the style of \LaTeX\ and Texinfo, with - structures very different from plain \TeX's syntax. In the end - I realized that a format that requires disguising or renaming - plain \TeX\ constructs makes using and modifying the macros - harder, not easier, because the user has to understand the new - conventions in addition to plain \TeX\ syntax.} with an output - routine that allowed a page to be peppered with inserts with the - text flowing in between them (with a more restricted class of - inserts than, say, a DTP program, but still flexible enough to - be useful). The output routine also does multi-column text---in - this respect it is very similar to the |multicol| package in - \LaTeX~2e. The routine presented here has been rewritten from - scratch a few times, each time shedding some cruft as I~have a - better understanding of \TeX. -%}}} backgorund -%{{{ layout model - -\subsec{The layout model} - -\topinsert - \line{\vbox{\advance\hsize-1pc \hsize=0.333\hsize - \noindent{\bf Figure 1}\quad Page layout. This shows a - page without the optional extra boxes. In this example, - text columns each span two grid cells. The left-hand - column has an illo (space for an illustration) with caption. - }% - \epsfxsize=\hsize \advance\epsfxsize-1pc - \epsfxsize=0.667\epsfxsize \epsffile{oput01.eps}\hfil -} -\medskip\hrule\medskip -\endinsert - -\topinsert - \line{\epsfxsize=\hsize \advance\epsfxsize-1pc - \epsfxsize=0.667\epsfxsize \epsffile{oput02.eps}\hfil - \vbox{\advance\hsize-1pc \hsize=0.333\hsize - \noindent{\bf Figure 2}\quad Page layout parameters. - This page has with - all the optional boxes (shown with dashed lines). One text - column has a space left for artwork. Text columns are the same - width as grid cells. - }} -\medskip\hrule\medskip -\endinsert - - The main part of the page (everything except the headline and - footline) is called the {\it body}. The body is divided into a - grid of cells. The cells are conceptually the framework on - which page components like text columns and illustrations are - hung. For example, text columns may span two cells. Figure~1 - shows a simple layout. Fitting on the grid usually means the - width of the object is $N\times gridwd + (N-1)\times colsep$ and - its left edge is $K\times(gridwd + colsep)$ from the left edge - of the page body. - - The aim of using a grid layout is to combine flexibility with - enough structure that the result is not a chaotic mess. The - example grid is 5~cells wide, so that text columns can probably - be 2 or 3 cells wide without being too narrow or too wide. - Illustrations may be anything from 1 to 5 cells wide, or may - bleed off the page. - - - - -%}}} layout model -%}}} introduction -%{{{ identification -\section{File identification} - - Macro files nowadays tend to start with a whole slew of header - comments designed to be useful to people comign across the file - in some archive and unaware of what it is for. - -\code - \|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- output routine for zines - | - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - |%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", - |%%% abstract = "TeX output routine for magazine-style layout. - |%%% This file was generated by running - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", - |%%% dependencies = "", - |%%% } - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\} - | -\endcode -%}}} identification -%{{{ internals -\section{Miscellaneous internal definitions} -\subsec{Scratch registers} - - These are one-token names for some handy non-global temporary - registers (in plain \TeX\ these are given names with |@| in - them; these definitions give them names I can use). -\code - |\countdef\counta=255 - |\dimendef\dimena=0 \dimendef\dimenb=2 - |\toksdef\toksa=0 \toksdef\toksb=2 -\endcode - I~don't use |\dimen1| and |\toks1| because they are supposed to - be used only globally (as discussed in {\it\TeX book} - Appendix~B). - -\subsec{Queues} - - These macros manipulate queues of instructions for the ouytput - routine, represented as list macros of a form similar to those - described in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~D Section~2 (the parameters - in different order). - -\notepar - All of these work by making assignments and so will not work in - \TeX's mouth. -\endnotepar - - We can describe these briefly using letters like $x$ to stand - for elements (enclosed in braces) and $xs$ to stand for a list - macro of $x$s. Each macr has a duplicate starting with `|g|-' - which does the same operation globally. - -% |\prepend| $xs$ $x$ --- $xs:=\langle x\rangle + xs$ -%\code -% |\long\def\prepend#1#2{% -% | \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}% -% | \edef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}% -% |} -%\smallbreak -% |\long\def\gprepend#1#2{% -% | \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}% -% | \xdef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}% -% |} -%\endcode - |\qappend| $xs$ $x$ --- $xs:= xs + \langle x\rangle $ -\code - |\long\def\qappend#1#2{% - | \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}% - | \xdef#1{\the\toksb\the\toksa}% - |} -\endcode -% |\catenate| $xs$ $ys$ $zs$ --- $xs:=ys + zs$ -%\code -% |\def\catenate#1#2#3{% -% | \toksa=\expandafter{#2}\toksb=\expandafter{#3}% -% | \edef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}% -% |} -%\smallbreak -% |\def\gcatenate#1#2#3{% -% | \toksa=\expandafter{#2}\toksb=\expandafter{#3}% -% | \xdef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}% -% |} -%\endcode - |\qremove| $x$ $xs$ --- $x, xs := hd(xs), tl(xs)$ - (where $xs = \langle hd(xs)\rangle + tl(xs)$) -\code - |\def\qremove#1#2{% - | \expandafter\glopoff#2\glopoff#1#2% - |} - |\long\def\glopoff\\#1#2\glopoff#3#4{% - | \gdef#3{#1}\gdef#4{#2}% - |} -\endcode - -%}}} internals -%{{{ parameters -\section{Parameters} - - We collect here definitions for parameters that customizate the - layout. In documents, many of these are set in using - higher-level macros. - - The abbreviations |mg| (margin), |wd| (width) and |ht| (height) - are used a lot in dimen names. - -\subsec{Heights and depths} - The physical size of the paper is $paperwd\times paperwd$. The - area which will be filled with text columns is $bodywd\times - bodyht$. This area is divided in to a grid of cells each - $gridwd\times gridht$, with cells separated by $colsep$ - horizontally but butting vertically (there are $n$ cells, so - $n\times gridwd + (n-1)\times colsep = bodywd$). Finally, - $colwd$ is the width of text columns ($colwd = k\times gridwd + - (k-1)\times colsep$) and $colht$ is the height of text columns - on the current page (it is equal to $bodyht$ iff therte is no - topbox or botbox). -\code - |\newdimen\paperwd \newdimen\paperht - |\newdimen\bodywd \newdimen\bodyht - |\newdimen\gridwd \newdimen\gridht - |\newdimen\colwd \newdimen\colht -\endcode - - -\subsec{Margins and separators} - These margins measure from the edge of the paper as defined by - |\paperwd| and |\paperht|. The inner margin (|\innermg|) is on - the left on odd pages and on the right for even pages. - - The bottom margin will be increased slightly later on to make - $$vsize=N\times baselineskip + topskip\quad.$$ - -\code - |\newdimen\topmg \topmg=20mm - |\newdimen\outermg \outermg=20mm - |\newdimen\innermg \innermg=20mm - |\newdimen\botmg \botmg=27mm -\endcode - - Parameters for the distance between the baselines of the - headline and the first line of text the corresponding distance - for footlines. -\code - |\newskip\headlineskip \headlineskip=10mm - |\newskip\footlineskip \footlineskip=10mm -\endcode - - - The parameters |\caprule| and |\capsep| specify the separation - between captions and the adjacent text column. The vertical - displacement is $capsep$, with a horizontal rule of thickness - $caprule$ is drawn in the middle (set this to $0\pt$ to have no - rule). - -\code - |\newdimen\caprule \caprule=0.4pt - |\newskip\capsep \capsep=5mm -\endcode - - The corresponding parameters for column separators---this time - it is a vertical rule. -\code - |\newdimen\colrule \colrule=0.4pt - |\newdimen\colsep \colsep=5mm -\endcode - - The number of text columns on a page. -\code - |\newcount\ncols \ncols=1 -\endcode - -\subsec{Boxes} - To switch the number of columns in mid page, the first text is - run through the output routine and the resultant partial page is - stored in |\partialpage| to be placed at the top of the next - output. - -\code - |\newbox\partialpage -\endcode - - The special boxes |\topbox| and |\botbox|, if non-void, are - placed at the top and bottom of the page, going inside the - headline and footline but outside the body text area (which is - reduced correspondingly). These are often useful in - multi-column text to put titles that span the page. -\code - |\newbox\topbox \newbox\botbox -\endcode - - These boxes, if not void, go at the left and right of the body - text. The amount of space for columns of text is reduced by the - width of the boxes. -\code - |\newbox\leftbox \newbox\rightbox -\endcode - - The output routine is passed the current page contents in - box~255. -\code - |\chardef\pagebox=255 -\endcode - -\subsec{Hooks} - - These two list macros are used to override the output routine - with customized layouts. - - One item is removed from |\pagelist| to generate each page body - (the page body is everything except the headline, footline, - topbox, botbox amd partial page). If the list is empty, then - the default action is `|\makebody\pagebox|'. The commands - should make a box with width |\bodywd|m and heght |\colht|. -\code - |\let\pagelist\empty -\endcode - An item is removed from |\collist| each time a column is to be - created by |\makebody|. Each item should be \TeX\ commands that - generate a box with width |\colwd| and height |\colht|. -\code - |\let\collist\empty -\endcode - - Finally, token registers that may be used to customize pages and - captions. For example, |\everypage| is used in |pdccmdoc.tex| - to create an empty |\leftbox| on each page. -\code - |\newtoks\everypage - |\newtoks\everycaption -\endcode -%}}} parameters -%{{{ make a column (vbox) -\section{How to make one column} - - This is the default way to generate a column of text---this will - normally be invoked $k$ times if there are $k$ columns. - - A column is a vbox of height $colht$ and width $colwd$. It - contains, in order from top to bottom, an illustration (vertical - mode material, normally white space for artwork to be pasted - into), caption separator, text (from the page), caption - separator, and bottom illustration. The illustrations are - usually omitted. When there is no illustration, the caption - separators are omitted too. - The macro takes the following parameters: -$$\halign{\indent\tt\##\hfil&\quad#\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr - 1& vertical mode material& illustration at top of column\cr - 2& \<8-bit number>& box to make middle out of\cr - 3& vertical mode material& illustration for bottom of column\cr -}$$ - To make baselines line up, $capsep=baselineskip$ and the height - of a top illustration must be $N\times baselineskip + topskip$ - and of a bottom illustration must be $N\times baselineskip$ - (|\prevdepth| is set to $0\pt$ at the start of the bottom - illustration, so if it starts with a box, baselineskip glue will - be inserted to make the baseline of the box align correctly.) -\code - |\newdimen\toptotal \newdimen\bottotal -\smallbreak - |\def\xxxmakecolumn#1#2#3#4#5{\xmakecolumn - | {\ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi - | \def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi} - | {#3} - | {\def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi - | \ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\xmakecolumn#1#2#3{% - | \vbox to \colht{ -\endcode - Calculate in |\dimena| how much of the text box will be needed - once we have allowed for any illustrations, footnotes or - topinserts: -\code - | \dimena\colht - | \setbox0=\vbox{#1}\advance\dimena-\ht0 - | \ifdim\ht0>0pt - | \advance\dimena-\capsep - | \advance\dimena\topskip \advance\dimena-\baselineskip - | \fi - | \setbox4=\vbox{\prevdepth=0pt #3}% - | \advance\dimena-\ht4 - | \ifdim\ht4>0pt \advance\dimena-\capsep \fi - | \ifvoid\footins\else - | \advance\dimena-\ht\footins - | \advance\dimena-\skip\footins - | \fi - | \ifvoid\topins\else - | \advance\dimena-\ht\topins - | \advance\dimena-\skip\topins - | \fi -\endcode - Split that much text off the top of the box: -\code - | \splittopskip\topskip \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth - | \setbox2=\vsplit#2to\dimena -\endcode - Now to sandwich it all together. -\code - | \dimena=\ht0 \dimenb=\dp0 \unvbox0 - | \ifdim\dimena>0pt - | \prevdepth=\dimenb - | \capseparator - | \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip - | \kern\dimena - | \nointerlineskip - | \fi - | \ifvoid\topins\else \unvbox\topins \vskip\skip\topins \fi - | \dimena\dp2 - | \ifvoid2 \vfil \else \unvbox2 \fi - | \ifvoid\footins \else - | \vskip\skip\footins \footnoterule - | \dimena=\dp\footins \unvbox\footins - | \fi - | \ifdim\ht4>0pt - | \prevdepth=\dimena - | \capseparator \kern-\prevdepth \prevdepth0pt - | \fi - | \unvbox4 - | }% - |} -\endcode - The caption separator is in an hbox so that - baselineskip glue will be added appropriately. -\code - |\def\capseparator{% - | \hbox to \colwd{% - | \dimena=0.5ex \advance\dimena-0.5\caprule - | \dimenb=\dimena \advance\dimenb\caprule - | \vrule height \dimenb depth-\dimena width\colwd - | }% - |} -\endcode - - Here's a macro for making an illustration (blank space) with - caption, suitable for top of page. |#1| is the cation, |#2| is - vertical mode material commands to make the illustration (often - this will be something like `|\kern|$n$|\baselineskip|' to leave - $n$ lines of blank space). The whitespace between illustration - and caption is adjusted to make the whole shebang line up. -\code - |\def\topillustration#1#2{% - | \setbox0=\vbox{#2}% - | \dimena\ht0 \dimenb\dp0 \unvbox0 - | \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip - | \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip - | \kern-\dimena \prevdepth\dimenb - | \hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \noindent#1\par - |} -\endcode - - Similar for bottom of column. -\code - |\def\botillustration#1#2{% - | \setbox0\vbox{\hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \prevdepth=0pt #1} - | \setbox2=\vbox{\prevdepth=\dp0 #2}% - | \dimena=\ht0 \advance\dimena\dp0 \advance\dimena\ht2 - | \unvbox0 - | \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip - | \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip - | \advance\dimena-\baselineskip - | \kern-\dimena - | \unvbox2 - |} -\endcode - -%}}} make a column -%{{{ make body part of page (hbox) -\section{Making the page body hbox} - - The page body is everything except the footline, headline, - topbox and botbox. It should be a box of height |\bodywd| - (which is normally fixed) and height |\colht| (which is - |\bodyht| minus the top and bot boxes). - - The default macro for making the body is |\makebody| which takes - as its parameter the box number (usually |\pagebox|). (This may - be replaced by adding items to the list macro |\pagelist|.) -\code - |\def\makebody#1{% - | \hbox to \bodywd{% - | \ifvoid\leftbox\else - | \box\leftbox - | \colseparator - | \fi - | \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}% - | \counta\ncols - | \loop \ifnum\counta>1 - | \colseparator - | \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}% - | \advance\counta -1 - | \repeat - | \ifvoid\rightbox\else - | \colseparator - | \box\rightbox - | \fi - | }% - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\colseparator{% - | \hfil \vrule width\colrule depth0pt \hfil - |} -\endcode - - The macro |\makecolumnfromcollist| is used to generate columns - (which must be boxes of height |\colht| and width |\colwd|). It - uses the next item on |\collist| if there is one, otherwise it - just uses |\xmakecolumn|. -\code - |\def\makecolumnfromcollist#1{% - | \ifx\collist\empty - | \xmakecolumn{}{#1}{}% - | \else - | \qremove\temp\collist - | \temp - | \fi - |} - | -\endcode -%}}} make insides of page (hbox) -%{{{ make a page (vbox) -\section{Making a page vbox} - - The macro generates a new page---a vbox to be `shipped out'. - The first page includes a |papersize| special; this is because - if the macros used to change the paper size also generated the - |\special| then there might be conflicting |\special|s which - would confuse the printer driver. This way the paper size may - be changed a few times before the first page. - - The |\colht| register is set to the height of text columns on - this page (which is $bodyht$ minus the height of any partial - page, top or bottom boxes). -\code - |\def\makepage{% - | \vbox{ - | \papersizespecial - | \colht\bodyht \advance\colht-\ht\partialpage - | \advance\colht-\ht\topbox \advance\colht-\ht\botbox - | \advance\colht-\dp\partialpage - | \advance\colht-\dp\topbox - | \the\everypage - | \makeheadline \nointerlineskip - | \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip - | \box\topbox \nointerlineskip - | \ifx\pagelist\empty - | \makebody\pagebox - | \else - | \qremove\temp\pagelist - | \temp - | \fi - | \unvbox\botbox - | \makefootline - | }% - |} -\endcode - - The |\makeheadline| macro generates the headline in the form of - vertical mode material with zero height. It is expanded after - |\everypage| has been expanded, at the very top of the page's - vbox. -\code - |\def\makeheadline{ - | \vbox to 0pt { - | \skip0=\topskip \advance\skip0-2\ht\strutbox - | \advance\skip0-\headlineskip - | \vskip\skip0 - | \hbox to \bodywd{\the\headline} - | \vss - | } - |} -\endcode - - The footline is, naturally, generated with |\makefootline|. - This time there is no requirement for it to be zero height. It - is the last thing in the box being shipped out. -\code - |\def\makefootline{{ - | \baselineskip=\footlineskip - | \hbox to \bodywd{\the\footline} - |}} -\endcode - - The |papersize| special is specified in the manual for DVIPS. - It specifies the physical size of the medium---and so must be - multiplied by the current magnification. -\code - |\def\papersizespecial{{% - | \dimena=0.001\paperwd \multiply\dimena\mag - | \dimenb=0.001\paperht \multiply\dimenb\mag - | \special{papersize=\the\dimena,\the\dimenb}% - | \global\let\papersizespecial=\relax - |}} - | -\endcode -%}}} make a page (vbox) -%{{{ output -\section{The output routine} - - The output routine sets |\hoffset| appropiately (subtracting - $1{\scriptstyle''}$ to allow for \TeX's peculiar origin point - one inch from the top left of the page. -\code - |\def\pdcoutput{% - | \ifodd\pageno \hoffset=\innermg \else \hoffset=\outermg \fi - | \advance\hoffset-1 true in - | \voffset=\topmg - | \advance\voffset-1truein - | \shipout\makepage \advancepageno - | \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else \dosupereject \fi - | \unvbox\pagebox - |} -\smallbreak - |\output={\pdcoutput} -\endcode -%}}} output -%{{{ automated column setting -\section{Specifying a grid} - - These macros for setting the paper size ought to be invoked - after the base font and baseline skip have been set but before - the numebr of columns is chosen. - -\subsec{Specifiying the paper size} - - This is a macro that might be used in documents. It takes two - parameters, \<dimen>s for the width and height of the paper. -\code - |\def\setpaper#1#2{% - | \paperwd=#1\relax - | \paperht=#2\relax - | \OPUTcalcbodywdht - | \OPUTcalctopskip - |} -\endcode - Calculate the page body width |\bodywd| from the paper size and - the size of the margins: -\code - |\def\OPUTcalcbodywdht{ - | \bodywd=\paperwd \advance\bodywd-\outermg \advance\bodywd-\innermg - | \bodyht=\paperht \advance\bodyht-\topmg \advance\bodyht-\botmg - | \OPUTcalctopskip - |} -\endcode - - To avoid having to write `Aiv' or `afour' for specifying - international standard A4 paper, I~use an - |\ifcase|.\footnote*{Note for Americans: A4 corresponds to - American Letter size, and A3 to Ledger size.} This macro - handles A0 to A5. -\code - |\def\setpaperA#1{ - | \ifcase#1 - | \setpaper{841mm}{1189mm}\or - | \setpaper{594mm}{841mm}\or - | \setpaper{420mm}{594mm}\or - | \setpaper{297mm}{420mm}\or - | \setpaper{210mm}{297mm}\or - | \setpaper{148mm}{210mm} - | \else - | \errmessage{Dunno how big DIN A#1 paper is, sorry.} - | \fi - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Adjusting the body height and top skip} - - Plain \TeX\ sets |\topskip| to $10\pt$, which means there is a - gap between the top of the letters of the top line of text and - the top of the pages's vbox (i.e., $vsize$ is measured from the - baseline of the last line to a line $topskip$ above the baseline - of the first line). For magazine-style setting, it is more - usual to have $topskip$ set to the cap-height of the font - (assuming there are no strange tall characters in use). - - To have an exactly $N$ lines to a page, - $$ - bodyht = (N-1)\times baselineskip + topskip \quad. - $$ - This macro increases the bottom margin in order to set $bodyht$ - to such a value. -\code - |\def\OPUTcalctopskip{ - | \setbox0=\hbox{AXbl()!gyJQ,} - | \topskip=\ht0 \maxdepth=\dp0 - | \advance\bodyht-\topskip \divide\bodyht\baselineskip - | \multiply\bodyht\baselineskip \advance\bodyht\topskip - |} -\endcode - - Give this value for $bodyht$, we can set $hsize$ and $vsize$ - according to the number of columns to a page. For $N$ lines to - a column, we need $N\times ncols$ lines to make a whole page, so - $$ - \eqalign{vsize - &= (ncols \times N - 1) \times baselineskip + topskip\cr - &= (bodyht + \delta) \times ncols - \delta\cr - } - $$ - where $\delta=baselineskip-topskip$. -\code - |\def\OPUTcalchsizevsize{ - | \hsize=\colwd - | \vsize=\bodyht - | \advance\vsize-\topskip \advance\vsize\baselineskip - | \multiply\vsize\ncols - | \advance\vsize-\baselineskip \advance\vsize\topskip - |} -\endcode - - -\subsec{Setting the number of columns} - - Now some macros used in documents for setting the number of - coumns. In the general case we have a grid of $n$ cells with - text columnns spanning $k$ cells. This macro takes two number - parameters, $n$ and $k$. It sets |\ncols| to as many columns - fit on the page. - $$ - \eqalign{colwd &= k \times gridwd + (k - 1) \times colsep\cr - ncols &= \lfloor n \mathbin/ k \rfloor\cr} - $$ - Often $n$ is not a multiple of $k$, which leaves some grid cells - `spare' for illustrations or extra margins and so on. -\code - |\def\setnkgrid#1#2{% - | \gridwd=\bodywd - | \advance\gridwd-#1\colsep \advance\gridwd\colsep \divide\gridwd#1 - | \colwd#2\gridwd \advance\colwd#2\colsep \advance\colwd-\colsep - | \ncols#1 \divide\ncols#2 - | \gridht=\baselineskip - | \capsep=\gridht - | \OPUTcalchsizevsize - |} -\endcode - - For simpler layouts, we just set the number of columns and set - the grid and column widths to be the same. -\code - |\def\setncolumns#1{% - | \colwd=\bodywd - | \advance\colwd-#1\colsep \advance\colwd\colsep \divide\colwd #1 - | \gridwd=\colwd - | \ncols=#1 - | \OPUTcalchsizevsize - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Setting default values} - - We give all the parameters default values by assuming A4 paper - and a single-column layout in \TeX's default fonts. -\code - |\setpaperA4 - |\setncolumns1 -\endcode - -%}}} automated column setting -%{{{ balancing columns -\section{Routines for balanced columns} - -\subsec{Balanced columns from a rigid vbox} - - This is the routine discussed in {\it\TeX book}, Appendix~D, - Section~7 (pp.\thinspace396--397). It takes a rigid, regular - vbox (rigid meaning there is no stretchable glue between lines, - and regular meaning that baselines are all the same distance - apart). Its parameters are - $$\centerline{\vbox{\halign{\tt\char`\##\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr - 1&\<8-bit number>& box to chop\cr - 2&\<number>& how many columns to make (${}>0$)\cr - 3&\<dimen>& the value of \cs{topskip} for the box\cr - 4&tokens& what to put between columns\cr - }}}$$ - the last parameter will usually be |\hfil| or |\colseparator|. - Usually this command will be used like -$$\hbox{|\hbox to \bodywd{\rigidbalance...}|}$$ - - -\code - |\newcount\RGDncols -\smallbreak - |\def\rigidbalance#1#2#3#4{% - | \setbox0=\box#1\relax \RGDncols=#2\relax \toksa={#4}% - | \begingroup\splittopskip#3\relax \vbadness=10000 - | \valign{##\vfil\cr \RGDdosplits}% - | \endgroup - |} -\endcode - The helper function that produces the insides of the valign is - recursive. -\code - |\def\RGDdosplits{ - | \dimena\ht0 \divide\dimena\RGDncols - | \advance\dimena\splittopskip - | \setbox1=\vsplit0 to\dimena - | \unvbox1 - | \global\advance\RGDncols-1 - | \cr - | \ifnum\RGDncols>0 - | \noalign{\the\toksa} - | \RGDdosplits - | \fi - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Balance partial page} - - Occasionally it is useful to switch between different grids or - numbers of columns within one page. This macro does this, - creating a shorter-than-usual page body (including topbox and - botbox) and then putting the result in |\partialpage| Its - parameters are |#1| the \TeX\ code used to generate the text - columns and |#2| what to put between the partial page and the - rest of the page. - -\code - |\def\makepartialpage#1#2{ - | \maybepagebreak - | \begingroup - | \output{% - | \message{[partial} - | \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox\pagebox}% - | \global\setbox\partialpage\vbox{ - | \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip - | \the\everypage - | \box\topbox \nointerlineskip - | \hbox to \bodywd{% - | \ifvoid\leftbox\else - | \box\leftbox \colseparator - | \fi - | #1% - | \ifvoid\rightbox\else - | \colseparator \box\rightbox - | \fi - | }% \nointerlineskip - | \box\botbox - | #2 - | \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip - | \kern\dimena - | }% - | \message{page]} - | } - | \eject - | \endgroup - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\rigidbalancepartialpage{ - | \makepartialpage{\rigidbalance0\ncols\topskip\colseparator} - |} -\endcode - Occasionally \TeX\ might have just over a pageful of text when - this command is used (since the page break calculations do not - take into account the space subtracted by - illustrations\footnote*{This is probably a bug.}). In this case - we have to force out a complete page. -\code - |\def\maybepagebreak{% - | \vskip0pt plus\baselineskip \penalty-100 - | \loop - | \dimena\vsize \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\partialpage - | \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\topbox - | \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\botbox - | \ifdim\pagetotal>\dimena - | \eject\null - | \repeat - |} -\endcode -%}}} balancing columns -\endcodefile -\enddocument -\bye -%}}} pdcoput5.tex - -%Local variables: -%fold-folded-p: t -%fill-prefix: " " -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 30828ac9358..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,336 +0,0 @@ -% pdcoput5.dtx 5.3 1995/04/06 -- output routine for zines - -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex", -%%% version = "5.3", -%%% date = "1995/04/06", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, macros", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% abstract = "TeX output routine for magazine-style layout. -%%% This file was generated by running -%%% plain TeX on pdcoput5.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcoput5.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "", -%%% } - -\message{5.3 <pdc 1995/04/06>} - -\countdef\counta=255 -\dimendef\dimena=0 \dimendef\dimenb=2 -\toksdef\toksa=0 \toksdef\toksb=2 -\long\def\qappend#1#2{% - \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}% - \xdef#1{\the\toksb\the\toksa}% -} -\def\qremove#1#2{% - \expandafter\glopoff#2\glopoff#1#2% -} -\long\def\glopoff\\#1#2\glopoff#3#4{% - \gdef#3{#1}\gdef#4{#2}% -} -\newdimen\paperwd \newdimen\paperht -\newdimen\bodywd \newdimen\bodyht -\newdimen\gridwd \newdimen\gridht -\newdimen\colwd \newdimen\colht -\newdimen\topmg \topmg=20mm -\newdimen\outermg \outermg=20mm -\newdimen\innermg \innermg=20mm -\newdimen\botmg \botmg=27mm -\newskip\headlineskip \headlineskip=10mm -\newskip\footlineskip \footlineskip=10mm -\newdimen\caprule \caprule=0.4pt -\newskip\capsep \capsep=5mm -\newdimen\colrule \colrule=0.4pt -\newdimen\colsep \colsep=5mm -\newcount\ncols \ncols=1 -\newbox\partialpage -\newbox\topbox \newbox\botbox -\newbox\leftbox \newbox\rightbox -\chardef\pagebox=255 -\let\pagelist\empty -\let\collist\empty -\newtoks\everypage -\newtoks\everycaption -\newdimen\toptotal \newdimen\bottotal -\def\xxxmakecolumn#1#2#3#4#5{\xmakecolumn - {\ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi - \def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi} - {#3} - {\def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi - \ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi}% -} -\def\xmakecolumn#1#2#3{% - \vbox to \colht{ - \dimena\colht - \setbox0=\vbox{#1}\advance\dimena-\ht0 - \ifdim\ht0>0pt - \advance\dimena-\capsep - \advance\dimena\topskip \advance\dimena-\baselineskip - \fi - \setbox4=\vbox{\prevdepth=0pt #3}% - \advance\dimena-\ht4 - \ifdim\ht4>0pt \advance\dimena-\capsep \fi - \ifvoid\footins\else - \advance\dimena-\ht\footins - \advance\dimena-\skip\footins - \fi - \ifvoid\topins\else - \advance\dimena-\ht\topins - \advance\dimena-\skip\topins - \fi - \splittopskip\topskip \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth - \setbox2=\vsplit#2to\dimena - \dimena=\ht0 \dimenb=\dp0 \unvbox0 - \ifdim\dimena>0pt - \prevdepth=\dimenb - \capseparator - \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip - \kern\dimena - \nointerlineskip - \fi - \ifvoid\topins\else \unvbox\topins \vskip\skip\topins \fi - \dimena\dp2 - \ifvoid2 \vfil \else \unvbox2 \fi - \ifvoid\footins \else - \vskip\skip\footins \footnoterule - \dimena=\dp\footins \unvbox\footins - \fi - \ifdim\ht4>0pt - \prevdepth=\dimena - \capseparator \kern-\prevdepth \prevdepth0pt - \fi - \unvbox4 - }% -} -\def\capseparator{% - \hbox to \colwd{% - \dimena=0.5ex \advance\dimena-0.5\caprule - \dimenb=\dimena \advance\dimenb\caprule - \vrule height \dimenb depth-\dimena width\colwd - }% -} -\def\topillustration#1#2{% - \setbox0=\vbox{#2}% - \dimena\ht0 \dimenb\dp0 \unvbox0 - \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip - \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip - \kern-\dimena \prevdepth\dimenb - \hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \noindent#1\par -} -\def\botillustration#1#2{% - \setbox0\vbox{\hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \prevdepth=0pt #1} - \setbox2=\vbox{\prevdepth=\dp0 #2}% - \dimena=\ht0 \advance\dimena\dp0 \advance\dimena\ht2 - \unvbox0 - \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip - \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip - \advance\dimena-\baselineskip - \kern-\dimena - \unvbox2 -} -\def\makebody#1{% - \hbox to \bodywd{% - \ifvoid\leftbox\else - \box\leftbox - \colseparator - \fi - \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}% - \counta\ncols - \loop \ifnum\counta>1 - \colseparator - \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}% - \advance\counta -1 - \repeat - \ifvoid\rightbox\else - \colseparator - \box\rightbox - \fi - }% -} -\def\colseparator{% - \hfil \vrule width\colrule depth0pt \hfil -} -\def\makecolumnfromcollist#1{% - \ifx\collist\empty - \xmakecolumn{}{#1}{}% - \else - \qremove\temp\collist - \temp - \fi -} - -\def\makepage{% - \vbox{ - \papersizespecial - \colht\bodyht \advance\colht-\ht\partialpage - \advance\colht-\ht\topbox \advance\colht-\ht\botbox - \advance\colht-\dp\partialpage - \advance\colht-\dp\topbox - \the\everypage - \makeheadline \nointerlineskip - \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip - \box\topbox \nointerlineskip - \ifx\pagelist\empty - \makebody\pagebox - \else - \qremove\temp\pagelist - \temp - \fi - \unvbox\botbox - \makefootline - }% -} -\def\makeheadline{ - \vbox to 0pt { - \skip0=\topskip \advance\skip0-2\ht\strutbox - \advance\skip0-\headlineskip - \vskip\skip0 - \hbox to \bodywd{\the\headline} - \vss - } -} -\def\makefootline{{ - \baselineskip=\footlineskip - \hbox to \bodywd{\the\footline} -}} -\def\papersizespecial{{% - \dimena=0.001\paperwd \multiply\dimena\mag - \dimenb=0.001\paperht \multiply\dimenb\mag - \special{papersize=\the\dimena,\the\dimenb}% - \global\let\papersizespecial=\relax -}} - -\def\pdcoutput{% - \ifodd\pageno \hoffset=\innermg \else \hoffset=\outermg \fi - \advance\hoffset-1 true in - \voffset=\topmg - \advance\voffset-1truein - \shipout\makepage \advancepageno - \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else \dosupereject \fi - \unvbox\pagebox -} -\output={\pdcoutput} -\def\setpaper#1#2{% - \paperwd=#1\relax - \paperht=#2\relax - \OPUTcalcbodywdht - \OPUTcalctopskip -} -\def\OPUTcalcbodywdht{ - \bodywd=\paperwd \advance\bodywd-\outermg \advance\bodywd-\innermg - \bodyht=\paperht \advance\bodyht-\topmg \advance\bodyht-\botmg - \OPUTcalctopskip -} -\def\setpaperA#1{ - \ifcase#1 - \setpaper{841mm}{1189mm}\or - \setpaper{594mm}{841mm}\or - \setpaper{420mm}{594mm}\or - \setpaper{297mm}{420mm}\or - \setpaper{210mm}{297mm}\or - \setpaper{148mm}{210mm} - \else - \errmessage{Dunno how big DIN A#1 paper is, sorry.} - \fi -} -\def\OPUTcalctopskip{ - \setbox0=\hbox{AXbl()!gyJQ,} - \topskip=\ht0 \maxdepth=\dp0 - \advance\bodyht-\topskip \divide\bodyht\baselineskip - \multiply\bodyht\baselineskip \advance\bodyht\topskip -} -\def\OPUTcalchsizevsize{ - \hsize=\colwd - \vsize=\bodyht - \advance\vsize-\topskip \advance\vsize\baselineskip - \multiply\vsize\ncols - \advance\vsize-\baselineskip \advance\vsize\topskip -} -\def\setnkgrid#1#2{% - \gridwd=\bodywd - \advance\gridwd-#1\colsep \advance\gridwd\colsep \divide\gridwd#1 - \colwd#2\gridwd \advance\colwd#2\colsep \advance\colwd-\colsep - \ncols#1 \divide\ncols#2 - \gridht=\baselineskip - \capsep=\gridht - \OPUTcalchsizevsize -} -\def\setncolumns#1{% - \colwd=\bodywd - \advance\colwd-#1\colsep \advance\colwd\colsep \divide\colwd #1 - \gridwd=\colwd - \ncols=#1 - \OPUTcalchsizevsize -} -\setpaperA4 -\setncolumns1 -\newcount\RGDncols -\def\rigidbalance#1#2#3#4{% - \setbox0=\box#1\relax \RGDncols=#2\relax \toksa={#4}% - \begingroup\splittopskip#3\relax \vbadness=10000 - \valign{##\vfil\cr \RGDdosplits}% - \endgroup -} -\def\RGDdosplits{ - \dimena\ht0 \divide\dimena\RGDncols - \advance\dimena\splittopskip - \setbox1=\vsplit0 to\dimena - \unvbox1 - \global\advance\RGDncols-1 - \cr - \ifnum\RGDncols>0 - \noalign{\the\toksa} - \RGDdosplits - \fi -} -\def\makepartialpage#1#2{ - \maybepagebreak - \begingroup - \output{% - \message{[partial} - \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox\pagebox}% - \global\setbox\partialpage\vbox{ - \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip - \the\everypage - \box\topbox \nointerlineskip - \hbox to \bodywd{% - \ifvoid\leftbox\else - \box\leftbox \colseparator - \fi - #1% - \ifvoid\rightbox\else - \colseparator \box\rightbox - \fi - }% \nointerlineskip - \box\botbox - #2 - \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip - \kern\dimena - }% - \message{page]} - } - \eject - \endgroup -} -\def\rigidbalancepartialpage{ - \makepartialpage{\rigidbalance0\ncols\topskip\colseparator} -} -\def\maybepagebreak{% - \vskip0pt plus\baselineskip \penalty-100 - \loop - \dimena\vsize \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\partialpage - \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\topbox - \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\botbox - \ifdim\pagetotal>\dimena - \eject\null - \repeat -} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 59d64508a5e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ -% pdcpsdoc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "pdcpsdoc.tex", -%%% version = "1.2", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% This macro file was generated by running plain -%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, -%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def", -%%%} - -\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\input pdcimth -\input pdcmigr -\input pdcfmt2 -\input pdchyex -\input pdcoput5 -\input pdcfsel -\input pdcadobe -\autoloadfonts -\def\KBcanonical#1{% - \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi -} -\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi -\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}} -\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}} -\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.} -\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}} -\def\KBpagbr{pagdr} \def\KBpagbri{pagdro} -\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr} \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri} -\def\KBpagri{pagro} \def\KBpagbi{pagbo} -\def\KBphvri{phvro} \def\KBphvbi{phvbo} -\def\KBpcrri{pcrro} \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo} -\def\KBphvrrni{phvron} \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon} -\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n} \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n} -\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n} \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n} -\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi -\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi -\def\STYheadingT{% - \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}% - \@\f{asy}{psyr}% - \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}% - \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% -} -\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt} -\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi -\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi -\def\STYbodyT{% - \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}% - \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}% - \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}% -} -\let\sc=\relax \let\mc=\relax \let\csc=\relax -\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny} -\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt} -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000 -\bodyfonts -{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 } -\input pdcdoc.def -\inputifexists{pdcpsdoc.cfg} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 9912b2544fb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ -% pdcpslft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents -%%%@TeX-definition-file { -%%% filename = "pdcpslft.tex", -%%% version = "1.2", -%%% date = "1995/03/30", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", -%%% supported = "Maybe", -%%% This macro file was generated by running plain -%%% TeX on pdcsty.dtx", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. -%%% Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the -%%% package it came in.", -%%% dependencies = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, -%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def", -%%%} - -\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>} - -\input pdcimth -\input pdcmigr -\input pdcfmt2 -\input pdchyex -\input pdcoput5 -\input pdcfsel -\input pdcadobe -\autoloadfonts -\def\KBcanonical#1{% - \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi -} -\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi -\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}} -\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}} -\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.} -\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}} -\def\KBpagbr{pagdr} \def\KBpagbri{pagdro} -\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr} \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri} -\def\KBpagri{pagro} \def\KBpagbi{pagbo} -\def\KBphvri{phvro} \def\KBphvbi{phvbo} -\def\KBpcrri{pcrro} \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo} -\def\KBphvrrni{phvron} \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon} -\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n} \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n} -\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n} \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n} -\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi -\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi -\def\STYheadingT{% - \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}% - \@\f{asy}{psyr}% - \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}% - \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% -} -\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt} -\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi -\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi -\def\STYbodyT{% - \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}% - \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}% - \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}% -} -\let\sc=\relax \let\mc=\relax \let\csc=\relax -\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny} -\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny} -\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt} -\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000 -\bodyfonts -{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 } -\input pdclft.def -\inputifexists{pdcpslft.cfg} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 58c5ac76808..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1153 +0,0 @@ -% pdcsty -- documentation and source code for several style files -*-tex-*- - -%%%@TeX-document-file { -%%% title = "Damian's random style files", -%%% filename = "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx", -%%% version = "$Revision: 1.2 $", -%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", -%%% date = "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:12:17 $", -%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", -%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", -%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory," -%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", -%%% abstract = "This document describes and is the source code for -%%% the TeX style files pdccmdoc.tex, ma55doc.tex, -%%% etc. and definitioon files pdcdoc1.tex and pdclft1.tex. -%%% Running plain TeX on this file produces both the -%%% definitions files and the printed documentation.", -%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", -%%% copying = "This program is free software; you can redistribute -%%% it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU -%%% General Public License as published by the Free -%%% Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, -%%% or (at your option) any later version.", -%%% notice = "This program is distributed in the hope that it will -%%% be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the -%%% implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A -%%% PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public -%%% License for more details.", -%%% notice = "You should have received a copy of the GNU General -%%% Public License along with this program; if not, write -%%% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, -%%% Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.", -%%% codetable = "USASCII", -%%% dependencies = "pdccode2.tex" -%%%} - - -%{{{ pdcsty.dtx -%{{{ preamble - -\input pdccode2 -\rcs$Id: pdcsty.dtx,v 1.2 1995/03/30 16:12:17 pdc Exp $\endrcs - -\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt } -\newcount\lineno -\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1 - \scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}} - - -\codefile{cmX}{pdccmlft.tex} \codefile{cmT}{pdccmdoc.tex} -\codefile{maX}{ma55lft.tex} \codefile{maT}{ma55doc.tex} -\codefile{psX}{pdcpslft.tex} \codefile{psT}{pdcpsdoc.tex} -\codefile{X}{pdclft.def} \codefile{T}{pdcdoc.def} - -\def\maonly{\global\maXtrue \global\maTtrue - \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse - \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse - \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse - \banner{Malvern}} -\def\cmonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse - \global\cmXtrue \global\cmTtrue - \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse - \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse - \banner{Computer Modern}} -\def\psonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse - \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse - \global\psXtrue \global\psTtrue - \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse - \banner{PostScript fonts}} - -\def\styonly {\global\maXtrue \global\maTtrue - \global\cmXtrue \global\cmTtrue - \global\psXtrue \global\psTtrue - \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse - \banner{Style files}} -\def\Tstyonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTtrue - \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTtrue - \global\psXfalse \global\psTtrue - \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse - \banner{Doc style files}} -\def\Xstyonly{\global\maXtrue \global\maTfalse - \global\cmXtrue \global\cmTfalse - \global\psXtrue \global\psTfalse - \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse - \banner{Lft style files}} - -\def\Tonly {\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse - \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse - \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse - \global\Xfalse \global\Ttrue - \banner{Sectioning macros for Docs}} -\def\Xonly {\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse - \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse - \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse - \global\Xtrue \global\Tfalse - \banner{Sectioning macros for Lfts}} - -\def\banner#1{ - \par - \line{% - \vrule height 1ex width 0.2ex - \leaders\vrule height 1ex depth -0.8ex \hskip2em - \enspace{\it \strut #1\/}\enspace - \leaders\vrule height 1ex depth -0.8ex \hfil - } -} - -\def\onlyone#1{ - \allfilesfalse \global\csname#1true\endcsname - \banner{{\tt\csname filename#1\endcsname}} -} -\def\onlytwo#1#2{ - \allfilesfalse \global\csname#1true\endcsname - \global\csname#2true\endcsname - \banner{{\tt\csname filename#1\endcsname}, - {\tt\csname filename#2\endcsname}} -} - -\def\common{ - \par - \allfilesfalse \global\Xtrue \global\Ttrue - \closebanner -} - -\def\closebanner{ - \line{% - \vrule height 1.8ex depth -0.5ex width 0.2ex - \leaders\vrule height 0.7ex depth -0.5ex \hfil - } -} - - - -%}}} preamble -%{{{ introduction - -\null\vskip2\baselineskip\hrule\bigskip -\leftline{Style files for the pdc- macros \fileversion\space(\filedate)} -\bigskip\hrule\bigskip -\headline{\hfil\global\headline={\hfil - \sevenbf Style files for the pdc- macros - \fileversion\space(\filedate)}} - -\section{Introduction} - -\subsec{About the style files} - - This document describes a family of plain \TeX\ style files for - typesetting documents which are short enough not to need any - fancy indexing or cross-references, but long enough to want - numbered section headings and a table of contents. - - A {\it style file} in this context means a definitions file that - specifies the formatting of for a document: layout, choice of - fonts, instructions for how to format lists, and so on. The - style files use the macros defined in other definition files to - supply most of the features they need. The document only needs - one `|\input|' command to set up most of the commands it needs. - -\subsec{No cross-references} - - Omitting cross-references is important because it means we can - avoid having documents that have to be run through \TeX\ more - than once (the first time to generate a raw index or - cross-reference file, the second to incorporate the references - into the document). This greatly simplifies the macros. - - So that the table of contents may be generated automatically - without requiring a second pass, it is printed {\it last\/} in - the file. It follows that the table of contents belongs at the - end of the front matter of the document (on pages numbered in - roman numerals), immediately before page~1. It is easiest if - all the front matter is printed last. After the end of the - document proper, put the front matter enclosed in |\frontmatter| - \dots |\endfrontmatter|; this automatically switches to page - numbering in roman numerals, and puts the table of contents at - the end. - - The file |pdccmdoc.tex| does documents using the Computer Modern - fonts. There is a variant called |pdccmlft.tex| intended for - `leaflets' that are even shorter than the `docs' produced with - |pdccmdoc.tex|. Leaflets have no front matter section, no table - of contents, and section headings are much less prominent---they - should only be a few pages long at most. The Malvern versions - are called |ma55doc.tex| and |ma55lft.tex|. - -\subsec{About this document} - - The file that generates this printed documentation, |pdcsty.dtx| - is a `documented \TeX' file. As well as briefly describing what - the macros are for and how they work, it includes a complete - listing of their definitions. The text of the definitions is - also written to files in the current directory, generating fresh - copies of the style files. This way this documentation and the - files it describes are guaranteed to match. - - The lines of all definitions are numbered continuously, even - though only a subset of all the definition lines will go in each - file. - -%}}} introduction -%{{{ starting up - -\section{Starting up} - -\subsec{File identification} - - Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the - file, for the benefit of people wondering what the file is for. - The macro file otherwise has no other comments, in the hope that - this will let \TeX\ read it in faster. (It should be possible - for the identification comments to go {\it after} an |\endinput| - at the close of the file, but the convention is to have them at - the start.) - - The following segment is common to the style files and the - definiton files. - -\code - \|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for short documents -\smallbreak - |%%%@TeX-definition-file { - \|\%\%\% filename~~~~~~~= "\filename", - \|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion", - \|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate", - |%%% package = "pdcmac 1.0", - |%%% author = "P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% email = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk", - |%%% address = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory, - |%%% Parks Road, Oxford OX1 3QD, UK", - |%%% codetable = "USASCII", - |%%% keywords = "TeX, plain TeX, style file", - |%%% supported = "Maybe", -\cmonly |%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in - |%%% Computer Modern fonts. -\maonly |%%% abstract = "Top-level macro file for documents set in - |%%% Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts. -\onlytwo{X}{T} - |%%% abstract = "Sectioning macros for style files. -\allfilestrue\closebanner - |%%% This macro file was generated by running plain - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~TeX on \jobname.dtx", - |%%% copyright = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley", - |%%% copying = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE. - \|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the - |%%% package it came in.", -\onlytwo{X}{T} - |%%% dependencies = "" -\cmonly |%%% dependencies = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex, - |%%% pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -\maonly |%%% dependencies = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, - |%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -\psonly |%%% dependencies = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, - |%%% pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex, -\Tstyonly - |%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def", -\Xstyonly - |%%% pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def", -\allfilestrue\closebanner - |%%%} - | - \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\} - | -\endcode - - This is followed immediately by a list of the macro files - included by this format: -\code -\styonly - |\input pdcimth - |\input pdcmigr - |\input pdcfmt2 - |\input pdchyex - |\input pdcoput5 - |\input pdcfsel -\cmonly - |\input pdccmsub -\maonly - |\input maamac -\psonly - |\input pdcadobe -\common -\endcode - - -%}}} starting up -%{{{ layout - -\section{Layout} - -\subsec{Paper sizes} - - The section defining the paper size is at the very top of the - file to make it easy for someone adapting the macros to American - Letter size paper to find them. - - Nevertheless, we set the top and bottom margins to be large - enough that even if it is printed on American paper, nothing - important will be cut off. This requires decent-sized margins - at the top and bottom of pages (since the end of the page that - will be lost depends on whether the printer driver has its real - origin at top-left or bottom-left). The edge of the printing - area is guessed at as being $7\,{\rm mm}$ from the edge of the - paper. -\code - |\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm - |\botmg=\topmg - |\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip - |\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi - |\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi -\smallbreak - |\setpaper{210mm}{297mm} -\endcode - - The document has `tab-index' headings, that is, headings go in a - wide left margin to the left of the body text. The underlying - structure is a grid is 4~cells wide, with the text spanning - across the rightmost 3~cells. Definitions in the fonts section - below specify that the text will be set ragged-right. -\code - |\setnkgrid{4}{3} - |\colrule=0pt - |\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep -\endcode - The output routine's |\leftbox| is set at the start of each page - to make space for the left margin. -\code - |\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt - | \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi} -\endcode - - While we're here, we customize some of the environments supplied - by pdcFMT2: -\code - |\everyfootnote={\notefonts} - |\everylinenum={\smallfonts} -\maonly - |\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}} - |\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}} -\common - |\everylinenum={\smallfonts} - |\everytag={\bf} -\endcode - -%}}} layout -%{{{ fonts -\section{Fonts} - - This section describes the fonts available in the document. - - We introduce extra nicknames |\bi| for bold italic (used for the - first mention of new techical terms), |\mf| for the METAFONT - logo, |\mfi| for the METAFONT logo in italic (Something of an - affectation) and |\ttb| for an `emphasized' typewriter (usually - it is best if this is slanted, not bold). -\code -\styonly - |\autoloadfonts -\endcode - - The style files differ because of encoding schemes more than - because of the particular fonts. For example, a style for Times - Roman will work for Palatino too,if we change the names of the - fonts used. To do this, a macro |\basefontname| may be defined - before the style file is read in; if it isn't defined it is - given a default value. - -%{{{ cmr - -\subsec{Fonts for Computer Modern documents} -\cmonly - We use Computer Modern Sans Serif for the headings in CM - documents. I have not put much effort into making formulas - work in headings. -\code - |\def\STYheadingT{% - | \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - | \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17 - |\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt} - | {small}{tiny} - |\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt} - | {subheading}{small} -\endcode - - We use Computer Modern for body text. -\code - |\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}% - | \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}% - | \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - | \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - | \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt - |\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt -\endcode - -%}}} cmr -%{{{ malvern - -\subsec{Fonts for Malvern documents} -\maonly - - Headings are in Malvern~75. The maths fonts are scaled for - expediency; I~do not make much effort to make formulas work in - headings. -\code - |\def\STYheadingT{% - | \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}% - | \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading} - |\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\endcode - - - We use Malvern~55 for body text. The supplementary font with - encoding~B is added, with font nickname |\rmsy|. -\code - |\newfam\rmsyfam -\smallbreak - |\def\STYbodyT{% - | \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}% - | \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}% - | \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - | \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - | \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}% - |} -\endcode -% The main problem with defining the body fonts is that the -% $x$-height of Malvern is larger then Computer Modern. This makes -% in necessary to load the maths fonts at a larger size to match. -% (A better solution might be to make a parameter file for -% Computer Modern so that maths fonts may be generated with -% compatible proportions.) -%\code -% |\loadfont\bodytt{cmtt10 scaled \magstep2} -% |\loadfont\notett{cmtt10 scaled \magstep1} -% |\loadfont\smalltt{cmtt10 scaled \magstephalf} -% |\loadfont\bodytb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstep2} -% |\loadfont\smalltb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstep1} -% |\loadfont\notetb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstephalf} -%\endcode - There is no point using |\loadfont| on the maths symbol fonts, - since they have to be loaded anyway the first time |\bodyfonts| - is called. -\code - |\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2 - |\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 - |\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1 - |\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 - |\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf - |\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf -\endcode -%}}} malvern -%{{{ PostScript - -\subsec{Fonts for Times documents} -\psonly - The big problem with PostScript fonts is what they are called; - I~shall be assuming that Fontname~$1.6$\footnote*{Karl Berry, - {\it File Names for \TeX\ Fonts} $1.6$ ({\tt - ftp:\penalty\exhyphenpenalty //ftp.umb.edu\slash pub\slash - tex\slash fontname/}).} applies: fonts with |afm2tfm|'s - variation on the \TeX\ Text encoding are called |ptmr| and fonts - with Adobe's StandardRoman encoding are called |ptmr0| (rather - than |rptmr|). - - This macro attempts to make it possible to guess the standard - name for the italic variant of a given font. - |\KBcanonical{|\<tentative font name>|}| takes a font name which - is formed from an upright name optionally followed by `|i|' - representing an italic variation. It returns the corresponding - standard name. For example, |ptmri| is left unchanged, but - |phvri| is changed to |phvro| and |phvrrni| is changed to - |phvron|. -\code - |\def\KBcanonical#1{% - | \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi - |} -\smallbreak - |\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi - |\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}} - |\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}} - |\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.} - |\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}} -\smallbreak - |\def\KBpagbr{pagdr} \def\KBpagbri{pagdro} - |\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr} \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri} - |\def\KBpagri{pagro} \def\KBpagbi{pagbo} - |\def\KBphvri{phvro} \def\KBphvbi{phvbo} - |\def\KBpcrri{pcrro} \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo} - |\def\KBphvrrni{phvron} \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon} - |\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n} \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n} - |\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n} \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n} -\endcode - - Headings are in Helvetica. The maths fonts are scaled for - expediency; I~do not make much effort to make formulas work in - headings. -\code - - |\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi - |\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi -\smallbreak - |\def\STYheadingT{% - | \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}% - | \@\f{asy}{psyr}% - | \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}% - | \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - |} -\smallbreak - |\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt} -\smallbreak - |\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading} - |\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading} -\endcode - - - We use Times Roman by default for body text, and Courier for - typewriter text. Adobe's Symbol font is included, with font - nickname |\asy|; a family called |\asyfam| has already been - created by |pdcadobe.tex|. -\code - |\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi - |\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi -\smallbreak - |\def\STYbodyT{% - | \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}% - | \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}% - | \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}% - | \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}% - | \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}% - |} -\endcode - - - Finally the alphabet-switching commands defined for Malvern - fonts are given dummy definitions. -\code - |\let\sc=\relax \let\mc=\relax \let\csc=\relax -\endcode - -%}}} malvern - -\common -\subsec{Definitions common to all formats} - -\code -\styonly - |\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny} - |\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny} - |\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny} - |\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny} -\endcode - - The text is set left-justified (ragged-right). To make this - work, the fontdimens that control word spacing are set to force - interword spaces to all be the same width. -\code - |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt} - |\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000 -\smallbreak - |\bodyfonts - |{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 } -\common -\endcode - -%}}} fonts -%{{{ minimal section headings -\section{Simple sectioning} - -\onlyone{X} - A `leaflet' is divided into short sections, which may contain - subsections (but usually will not). There may well be more than - one section on a page. - - The section number is held in two count registers, and printed - (enclosed in |\n{|\dots|}|) with the macro |\thesecno|: - -\code - |\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno -\smallbreak - |\def\thesecno{% - | \n{% - | \number\secno - | \ifnum\subsecno>0 - | .\number\subsecno - | \fi - | }% - |} -\endcode - - The section and subsection commands are implemented - straightforwardly with macros from |pdcfmt2.tex|, since there is - no need for marks or fiddling with table-of-contents files. -\code - |\def\section{ - | \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0 - | \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts\thesecno\enspace}{} - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\subsec{ - | \global\advance\subsecno1 - | \doheading\smallskipamount{\bodyfonts\thesecno\enspace}{} - |} -\endcode - - The page header includes only the title of the file, which the - user sets with the command |\majorheadline{|\<text>|}| -\code - |\newtoks\majorheadline - |\expandafter\majorheadline - | \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}} -\endcode - All those |\expandafter|s are to get the initial value in upper - case. - - The flag |noheadline| signals that the headline is to be omitted - on this page (e.g., the title page). The |twosided| flag is set - for two-sided binding. -\code - |\newif\ifnoheadline \newif\iftwosided -\smallbreak - |\headline{% - | \ifnoheadline - | \hfil - | \else\iftwosided - | \ifodd\pageno - | \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}% - | \else - | {\bf\folio}\quad \the\majorheadline\hfil - | \fi - | \else - | \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}% - | \fi\fi - |} -\smallbreak - |\footline{% - | \ifnoheadline - | \global\noheadlinefalse - | \hfil{\bf\folio}\hfil - | \else - | \hfil - | \fi - |} -\endcode - -%}}} minimal section headings -%{{{ sectioning -\section{Sectioning in PDCCMDOC documents} - -\onlyone{T} - Now a document is divided into {\it sections}, which are further - divided into so-called {\it subsecs} and {\it subsubsecs}. - (Division into subsubsecs should be done sparingly.) - - The sections may be grouped into {\it parts}---or, to look at it - another way, parts are a larger division of the document than - sections, but sections are not numbered within part numbers. - Each |\part| command should be almost immediately followed by - |\section|. - -\subsec{Macros for section numbers} - - The part and section numbers are kept in \TeX\ number registers, - with corresponding `|\the|-' macros to print the value - formatted. -\code - |\newcount\partno -\smallbreak - |\def\thepartno{% - | \ifcase\partno O\or I\or II\or III\or IV\or V\else - | \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\partno}% - | \fi - |} -\endcode - Formatted section and subsec numbers are generated by one macro - |\thesecno|. It automatically omits (sub)subsec numbers if they - are zero. The whole number is enclosed in |\n{|\dots|}| so that - the formatting of numbers may be customized. -\code - |\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno \newcount\subsubsecno -\smallbreak - |\def\thesecno{% - | \n{% - | \number\secno - | \ifnum\subsecno>0 - | .\number\subsecno - | \ifnum\subsubsecno>0 - | .\number\subsubsecno - | \fi - | \fi - | }% - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Parts} - - The |\part| macro takes one argument, the title. It sets a - token register |\majorheadline| which is printed on the left - page of two-sided documents. - - The |\majorheadline{|\<text>|}| command may be used immediately - after a |\part| command if the part title is not suitable to go - in the headline. This should also be used at the start of the - document to the title of the document, if division into parts is - not used. -\code - |\newtoks\majorheadline - |\expandafter\majorheadline - | \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}} -\smallbreak - |\def\part#1{% - | \global\advance\partno1 - | \newpageheading{2\baselineskip}{\headingfonts} - | {}{\thepartno.\quad#1} - | \TOCwrite\TOCentrypart{\thepartno}{#1} - |} -\endcode - -\subsec{Section headings} - - Section headings will start on a new page if the current page is - almost finished. The section heading is set across the full - width of the page, including the margin usually used for - tab-indexed headings. - - To force the next section to start a new page, do - |\sectionpenalty-10000| immediately before it. -\code - |\newcount\sectionpenalty -\smallbreak - |\def\sectionheading#1{ - | \par - | \vskip 0pt plus 0.3\vsize - | \penalty\sectionpenalty \sectionpenalty-200 - | \vskip 1\bigskipamount plus -0.3\vsize - | \begingroup \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin - | \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt - | \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=500 - | \interlinepenalty=100 - | \headingfonts \nointerlineskip - | \hbox{\hskip-\leftmargin - | \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \leftmargin - | \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \hsize} -% | \nobreak\medskip - | #1\par - | \nobreak\smallskip - | \endgroup - | \global\noindenttrue - |} -\endcode - As well as generating a heading, the section macro generates - marks used for the page headings and a TOC entry. The marks are - of the form in a way similar to that discussed in Chapter~23 of - the {\it\TeX book}. More precisely, a mark is placed on either - side of the section heading of the form -$$\hbox{\tt\arg{\<rhs>}\arg{\<lhs>}}$$ where \<rhs> is the section - number that belongs on the right-hand page, reflecting the - situation at the bottom of the page, whereas \<lhs> is what - belongs on following left-hand pages. -\code - |\newtoks\sectiontoks - |\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue -\smallbreak - |\def\section#1{ - | \ifsecno - | \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0 \global\subsubsecno0 - | \fi - | \toks0={#1} - | \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\ifsecno\S\thesecno\space\fi\the\toks0 }} - | \edef\tmp{\ifsecno\noexpand\S\the\secno\space\fi} - | \global\sectiontoks\expandafter{\tmp#1} - | \sectionheading{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi #1} - | \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\the\sectiontoks}} - | \TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1} - |} -\endcode - Subsecs and subsubsecs use the |\doheading| macro defined in - |pdcfmt.tex|. They do not appear in page headings, but may - appear in the TOC. -\code - |\def\subsec#1{% - | \ifsecno \global\advance\subsecno1 \global\subsubsecno0 \fi - | \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts}{} - | {\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1} - | \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1} - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\subsubsec#1{% - | \ifsecno \global\advance\subsubsecno+1 \fi - | \doheading\smallskipamount{\rm}{}{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1} - | \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1} - |} -\endcode - - The headline and footline are controlled by two flags. The - command |\noheadlinetrue| suppresses the headline for this page - (e.g., a title page). The |twosided| flag says whether the - document should be formatted for two-sided printing. -\code - |\newif\ifnoheadline - |\newif\iftwosided -\smallbreak - |\footline={% - | \ifnoheadline - | \global\noheadlinefalse - | \hfil\bodyfonts\n\folio\hfil - | \else - | \hfil - | \fi - |} -\endcode - The headline varies according to whether it is a one-sided page, - a left-hand page or a right-hand page. On a one-sided page, it - has the major headline (part or document title) at the left, and - the section title of the {\it first} section on the page on the - right with the folio. On a left-hand page, there is the folio - and the major headline, and on a right-hand page there is the - section title for the {\it last} section on the page, and the - folio. -\code - |\headline={% - | \ifnoheadline - | \hfil - | \else - | \bodyfonts - | \iftwosided - | \ifodd\pageno - | \hfil - | \expandafter\firstoftwo\botmark\quad - | {\bf\n\folio}% - | \else - | {\bf\n\folio}\quad - | \the\majorheadline - | \hfil - | \fi - | \else - | \the\majorheadline - | \hfil - | \expandafter\secondoftwo\topmark\quad - | {\bf\n\folio}% - | \fi - | \fi - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\firstoftwo#1#2{#1} - |\def\secondoftwo#1{} -\endcode -%}}} sectioning -%{{{ table of contents -\section{Table of contents intrinsics} - - This section defines the macros used to generate a table of - contents. The entries are written to a file \<jobname>|.toc| in - the current directory. At the end of the manuscript this files - is closed and then read to generate the table of contents. - - Macros special to the TOC-generating section have names starting - with `|\TOC|-'. -\code - |\newwrite\TOCfile - |\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc -\endcode - - Entries in the TOC file are of the form -$$\hbox{\tt\cs{TOCentry}\<foo>\arg{\<secno>}\arg{\<title>}\arg{\<folio>}}$$ - where |\TOCentry|\<foo> is a csname, \<secno> is some - automatically-generated section number like `|1.2|', \<title> is - the section title as supplied by the user, and \<folio> is the - folio for this page, in arabic or lower-case roman numeral form. - - They are generated with calls to |\TOCwrite| like this -$$\hbox{\tt\cs{TOCwrite}\cs{TOCentry}\<foo>\arg{\<secno>}\arg{\<title>}}$$ - The \<secno> is evaluated when |\TOCwrite| is called, whereas - the \<title> is carefully written without being expanded so that - its expansion happens when the TOC file is read in. The - \<folio> is automatically appended when it is written. -\code - |\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{% - | \begingroup\def\n{\string\n} - | \def\tmp{#3}% - | \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}} - | \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TOCtrim#1:->{} -\endcode - - - Now we define all the `|\TOCentry|-' macros. -\code - |\def\TOCentrypart#1#2#3{ - | \smallskip - | \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0\leftmargin - | \moveleft\leftmargin\hbox to\dimen0{\strut\bf #1. #2\hfil} - | \smallskip - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{ - | \smallskip\noindent\llap{#1\kern1pc}% - | {\bf \ignorespaces #2\quad\rm \n{#3}}\par - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{ - | \ifvmode \noindent \else \quad \fi - | {#1}~{\ignorespaces #2} - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\TOCentrysubsubsec#1#2#3{} -\endcode -%}}} table of contents -%{{{ front matter -\section{Printing the front matter} - - The front matter of the document---the title page, preface, - forword, etc.---must be printed {\it last}, with the table of - contents at the end of the front matter; this is so that the - table of contents may be accumulated during the \TeX ing of the - file.\footnote*{It has a benefit for people reading the document - with a browser: page~1 of the document is the first page of the - DVI file, which makes selecting a given page easy, and the table - of contents is at the very end, so the browsers `go to last - page' command can be used to find the table of contents - quickly.} - The front matter starts with the command |\frontmatter| and may - contain |\section| commands. Such sections will be unnumbered - and will not appear in the table of contents. - - For a short document, a separate title page is probably - excessive, and an abstract may be preferable to a preface. In - this case the first page after |\frontmatter| could have the - title of the document (with author etc.)\ followed by an - abstract, any copyright information (or other small print), and - the contents (generated by |\endfrontmatter|). In other words, - something like this: -$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr - |\frontmatter|\cr - \quad\it commands to print the title, etc.\cr - \quad|\abstract|\cr - \qquad\it the text of the abstract\cr - \quad|\endabstract|\cr - \quad\it copyright information, etc.\cr - |\endfrontmatter|\cr -}$$ - For a longer document, there will be a separate title page and - perhaps a preface. -$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr - |\frontmatter|\cr - \quad|\titlepage|\cr - \qquad\it commands to print the title, etc.\cr - \quad|\splittitlepage|\cr - \qquad\it print copyright information, etc.\cr - \quad|\endtitlepage|\cr - \quad|\section{Preface}|\cr - \qquad\it text of preface, etc.\cr - |\endfrontmatter|\cr -}$$ - The macro |\splittitlepage| marks the division between the title - page (title recto, page~i) and the back of the title page (title - verso, page~ii), which is where copyright information goes. On - a one-sided document, the copyright information belongs on the - title recto, because the title verso will be blank, so - |\splittitle| instead does |\vfill|. - - Setting |\pageno| nagative makes it print in roman numerals. - Calling |\secnofalse| suppresses section numbering. The first - page has no headline. -\code - |\def\frontmatter{ - | \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput} - | \write\TOCfile{\folio} - | \closeout\TOCfile - | \vfill\supereject - | \ifvoid\partialpage\else \null\vfill\eject \fi - | \beginthe{frontmatter} - | \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \noheadlinetrue - | \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{} - |} -\endcode - The front matter is finshed off with the contents list, - generated by |\endfrontmatter|. This reads the TOC file, which - was closed at the end of the last page of the body of the - document. -\code - |\def\endfrontmatter{ - | \section{Contents} - | \input\jobname.toc - | \vfill\supereject - | \endthe{frontmatter} - |} -\endcode - - Here's macros for generating the titlepage---it shoul;d enclose - commands to generate the title, author and publisher information - for the document. If it is used, it goes immediately after - |\frontmatter|, so that the title page is page~i. -\code - |\def\titlepage{ - | \vfill\eject - | \beginthe{titlepage} - | \noheadlinetrue - | \def\splittitlepage{ - | \iftwosided \vfill\eject\null\vfill \else \vfill \fi - | } - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endtitlepage{ - | \eject - | \endthe{titlepage} - |} -\endcode - - This |abstract| environment doesn't do anything fancy. -\code - |\def\abstract{ - | \smallskip - | \beginthe{abstract} - | \setbox\parbox\hbox to \gridwd{\subheadingfonts Abstract\hfil} - | \noindenttrue \bodyfonts - |} -\smallbreak - |\def\endabstract{ - | \smallskip - | \endthe{abstract} - |} -\endcode -%}}} front matter - This concludes the code that is included only in documents with TOC. -\common - -%{{{ abbreviations - -\section{abbrevs} - - - The definitions of |\pt| and |\mm| work only in maths mode. -\code - |\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} - |\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}} -\smallbreak - |\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-% - | {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}} - |\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}} -\endcode - -\subsec{Program names with small caps} - - Some program names use small capitals in their names. For - normal fonts there is no point trying to duplicate this, since - small capitals aren't common to all fonts. But small capitals - come `for free' with Malvern, so we might as well use them. The - following definitions apply to Malvern~A fonts. -\code -\maonly - |\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}} - |\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }} -\cmonly - |\def\PS{PostScript} -\common -\endcode - -\font\sf=cmss10 - Here's a redefinition of |\TeX|. This adds a spacefactor 1000 - to the end (so that \TeX\ doesn't apply its usual heuristic that - a full stop following a capoital {\it X} isn't a sentence end). - It also loosens up the logo, producing `\TeX' rather than the - usual `T\negthinspace\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-0.125emX'. This - design is more forgiving of changes in font (for example, in - sanserif it makes `{\sf\TeX}' instead of `{\sf - T\negthinspace\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-0.125emX}'). -\code - |\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 } -\endcode - - The macro |\dfn{...}| formats a defining instance of a word or - phrase (usually used the first time a new technical term is - introduced). When generating an index with a command |\index|, - this also adds the phrase to the index. -\code - |\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup - | \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}} - |} \the\toks0 -\endcode - - Here's a hack for using email-style emphasis using - `asterisking'. Text enclosed in matching asterisks is - emphasized. -\code - |\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}} -\endcode - - -\begingroup\defverbatim\~ - When documenting computer progams it is useful to be able to - present dialogues between the user and the computer, with the - user's commands distinguished by a slightly different font. - Here we define ~\|~\<text>~|~ so that it behaves like - ~|~\<text>~|~ except that |\ttb| is used instead of |\tt|. In - maths mode it is still equivalent to |\Vert|. -\code - |\def\|{% - | \relax\ifmmode - | \Vert - | \else - | \begingroup - | \ttb \setupverbatim - | \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup - | \fi - |} -\endcode -\endgroup -%}}} abbreviations -%{{{ postamble -\section{Finally} - - The definitions common to all style files are read last, so that - they can take account of changes to |\baselineskip|. -\code -\Tstyonly - |\input pdcdoc.def -\Xstyonly - |\input pdclft.def -\common -\endcode - - And, at last, a file {\tt\<filename>.cfg} is read, if it exists. -\code - |\def\inputifexists#1{% - | \openin15=#1 - | \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi - | \closein15 - |} -\styonly - \|\\inputifexists\{\filenamesanssuffix.cfg\} -\common -\endcode - -\endcodefile{cmX} \endcodefile{cmT} \endcodefile{maX} \endcodefile{maT} -\endcodefile{psX} \endcodefile{psT} \endcodefile{X} \endcodefile{T} -\bye -%}}} postamble -%}}} pdccmcode.dtx - -%Local variables: -%fold-folded-p: t -%fill-prefix: " " -%End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall deleted file mode 100644 index 0bcb9be0459..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -#!/bin/sh - -# I can't figure out how I'm supposed to use a builtin "install" -# program in a makefile given that every Unix has an incompatible version! - -# This script shall behave similarly to GNU "install". - -version="1.1 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>" - -echo= -strip=: - -while test $# -gt 0; do - case $1 in - -c) ;; - -n|--no-create) - echo=echo ;; - --g*=*) - group=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;; - -g|--g*) - group=$2; shift ;; - -g*) - group=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;; - --o*=*) - owner=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;; - -o|--o*) - owner=$2; shift ;; - -o*) - owner=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;; - --m*=*) - mode=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;; - -m|--m*) - mode=$2; shift ;; - -m*) - mode=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;; - -s|--strip) - strip=strip ;; - -h|--help) - cat <<@EOF -$0 -- install files -usage: - $0 [ OPTION ]... FILE1 FILE2 - $0 [ OPTION ]... FILE1...FILEn DIR - $0 --help | --version -options: - -c ignored - --group=GROUP --owner=USER --mode=MODE -g GROUP -o USER -m MODE - --strip -s -@EOF - exit 0 ;; - -V|--version) - echo "PDCMAC install ($0) version $version" - exit 0 ;; - -*) - echo >&2 $0: $1: not understood -- try $0 --help - exit 2 ;; - *) - files="$files $lastfile" - lastfile=$1 ;; - esac - shift -done - -#echo group=$group owner=$owner mode=$mode lastfile=$lastfile files=$files - -$echo cp -p $files $lastfile || exit 1 -if test -d "$lastfile"; then - $echo cd $lastfile -else - files="$lastfile" -fi - -if test -n "$group"; then - $echo chgrp $group $files || exit 1 -fi - -if test -n "$owner"; then - $echo chown $owner $files || exit 1 -fi - -if test -n "$mode"; then - $echo chmod $mode $files || exit 1 -fi -$echo $strip $files - -exit 0 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4b405f35ace..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ -.TH PINSTALL 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE" -.SH NAME -pinstall \- shellscript for copying programs into system directories, -compatible with install -.SH SYNOPSIS -.na -.B pinstall -[ -.B \-c -] [ -.I options -] -.I file1 -.I file2 -.br -.B pinstall -[ -.B \-c -] [ -.I options -] -.I file\|.\|.\|. -.I dir -.br -.BR pinstall -.B \-\-help -| -.B \-\-version -.PP -.I options -= [ -.B \-\-no\-create -] [ -.BI \-\-group= groupname -] [ -.BI \-\-owner= username -] [ -.BI \-\-mode= mode -] [ -.B \-\-strip -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.na -This documents the -.SM PDCMAC -version of -.IR install (1), -called -.IR pinstall . -It is only used if -.SM GNU -.I install -is not available. -.PP -This copies -.I file1 -(which must exist) -to the name -.IR file2 , -or -the -.I files -into the directory called -.IR dir , -preserving the last-modified times -(just like -.BR "cp \-p" ). -.PP -This command is implemented as a shellscript. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B \-c -Ignored. -.TP -.BI \-\-group= "groupname, " "\-g " groupname -.PD 0v -.TP -.BI \-\-owner= "username, " "\-o " username -.TP -.BI \-\-mode= "mode, " "\-m " mode -.PD -Set the group, owner or mode for the new files (using the same -conventions as -.IR chgrp (1), -.IR chown (1), -and -.IR chmod (1) -respectively). -Only root can combine changes of mode and group. -.TP -.BR \-\-help ", " \-h -Print a usage message and exit. -.TP -.BR \-\-no\-create ", " \-n -Do not copy files; instead print the commands that would have been performed. -.TP -.BR \-\-strip ", " \-s -Apply -.IR strip (1) -to the files after copying them. -.TP -.BR \-\-version ", " \-V -Print a version identification message and exit. -.SH AUTHOR -P. Damian Cugley -.I damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk -.SH "SEE ALSO" -pmkdir(1), chgrp(1), chown(1), chmod(1), cp(1), strip(1), install(1) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir deleted file mode 100644 index b0b5862cc3b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -#!/bin/sh - -version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" - -# pmkdir [ -m MODE | -g GROUP | -o OWNER | -n ] DIR -# -- create a directory DIR, including any necessary -# intervening directories. -# Also takes note of 3 enbvironment variables: -# GROUP -- group to give to new directories -# OWNER -- owner for new directories -# MODE -- mode for new directories -# If called with the name of an existing directory, this will still -# change group, mode, owner (if they are set). - -me=`basename $0` - -while test $# -gt 0; do - case $1 in - --m*=*) - MODE=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export MODE ;; - -m|--m*) - MODE=$2 ; export MODE; shift ;; - --g*=*) - GROUP=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export GROUP ;; - -g|--g*) - GROUP=$2; export GROUP; shift ;; - --o*=*) - OWNER=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export OWNER ;; - -o|--o*) - OWNER=$2; export OWNER; shift ;; - -n*|--n*) - echo=echo ;; - -h|--h*) - cat <<'@EOF' -$me -- make directory and any parent directories necessary - -$me [--no-create] [--mode=MODE] [--group=GROUP] [--owner=OWNER] DIR... -$me --help | --version - -MODE is a mode for the new directory(s); see chmod(1). -GROUP and OWNER are the group and owner; see chown(1) and chgrp(1). - -The --no-create option means don't do anything, print the commands instead. - -If not specified on the command line, the environment variables MODE, -GROUP and OWNER are used. If there are no environment variables, the -defaults used by mkdir(1) apply. -@EOF - exit 0 - ;; - -V|--v*) - echo $me for PDCMAC $version - exit 0 ;; - -*) - echo >&2 `basename $0`: $1: not understood - exit 2 ;; - *) - p=`dirname $1` - test -d $p || $0 $p || exit 1 - $echo mkdir $1 || exit 1 - test -n "$OWNER" && { $echo chgrp $OWNER $1 || exit 1; } - test -n "$GROUP" && { $echo chgrp $GROUP $1 || exit 1; } - test -n "$MODE" && { $echo chmod $MODE $1 || exit 1; } - ;; - esac - shift -done diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c9a5981cb21..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ -.TH PMKDIR 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE" -.SH NAME -pmkdir \- make a directory and possibly its parents as well -.SH SYNOPSIS -.na -.B pmkdir -[ -.B \-\-no\-create -] [ -.BI \-\-group= groupname -] [ -.BI \-\-owner= username -] [ -.BI \-\-mode= mode -] -.I dir\|.\|.\|. -.br -.BR pmkdir -.B \-\-help -| -.B \-\-version -.SH DESCRIPTION -.na -This documents the -.SM PDCMAC -version of -.IR mkdirhier (1), -called -.IR pmkdir . -.PP -For each -.I dir -this creates a directory with that file name. -Unlike -.IR mkdir (1), -any intermediate directories required will also be -created. -.PP -This command is implemented as a shellscript. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BI \-\-group= "groupname, " "\-g " groupname -.PD 0v -.TP -.BI \-\-owner= "username, " "\-o " username -.TP -.BI \-\-mode= "mode, " "\-m " mode -.PD -Set the group, owner or mode for the new files (using the same -conventions as -.IR chgrp (1), -.IR chown (1), -and -.IR chmod (1) -respectively). -Only root can combine changes of mode and group. -.TP -.BR \-\-help ", " \-h -Print a usage message and exit. -.TP -.BR \-\-no\-create ", " \-n -Do not copy files; instead print the commands that would have been performed. -.TP -.BR \-\-version ", " \-V -Print a version identification message and exit. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.TP -.SM GROUP -.PD 0v -.TP -.SM OWNER -.TP -.SM MODE -.PD -The values of these variables are used if the corresponding command-line -options are omitted. -.SH AUTHOR -P. Damian Cugley -.I damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk -.SH "SEE ALSO" -pinstall(1), chgrp(1), chown(1), chmod(1), mkdir(1), mkdirhier(1) |